Categories
Podcast episode

The Tax Guru the WSJ says has Wall Street’s “Strangest Hustle”: w/ Andy Lee, Parallaxes Capital – EP237

According to the Wall Street Journal, this episode’s guest Andy Lee is “The Tax Whiz With the Strangest Hustle on Wall Street”. He’s the founder and CIO of Parallaxes Capital, and he joins us to talk about tax receivable agreements (TRAs). Andy explained what TRAs are, how they come about for companies going public such as Shake Shack in 2015, and why he’s investing in them. Disclaimer: Nothing in this episode should be construed as financial or investment advice. 

Please contact us with any questions, comments and suggestions by emailing us at contact@economicsexplored.com or sending a voice message via https://www.speakpipe.com/economicsexplored

You can listen to the episode via the embedded player below or via podcasting apps including Google PodcastsApple Podcast and Spotify.

About this episode’s guest: Andy Lee, Founder and CIO of Parallaxes Capital

Andy founded Parallaxes Capital in 2017. Previously, he was with Lone Star Funds, focused on investing in the Americas. He began his career at Citigroup.

Andy graduated from the University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign with a Masters in Accountancy and a Bachelors in Finance and Accountancy.

Andy has been featured in publications including Wall Street Journal, Capital Allocators, Institutional Investor, NBC, Forbes, ReOrg Radio and Fitch’s LevFin Insights. He has spoken at events and conferences for organizations such as the Association of Asian American Investment Managers (“AAAIM”) and leading academic institutions including the University of Illinois, University of Pennsylvania and Texas Christian University (“TCU”)

When Andy is not working, he enjoys taking his corgi (Taco) on long walks.

Fun Fact: Andy, rarely one to back down from highly ambitious goals, ran a marathon less than 180 days from ACL, MCL and PCL surgery.

Source: https://parallaxescapital.com/our-team/ 

What’s covered in EP237

  • Introduction. (0:00)
  • TRAs for companies going public in the US. (6:18)
  • TRAs agreements and their value for private equity investors (i.e. pre-IPO owners). (12:52)
  • Tax refunds, risk management, and investment opportunities. (19:57)
  • TRAs and investment strategies. (24:47)
  • TRAs and their potential as a diversified investment. (30:55)

Takeaways

  1. TRAs convert future corporate tax savings (e.g. from depreciation expenses) into current income streams.
  2. TRAs provide long-dated, typically 15-year income streams that can be sold by pre-IPO owners (e.g., private equity investors).  
  3.  Private equity firms use TRAs to increase their earnings from the sale of businesses they’ve invested in. 
  4. Ideal Candidates for TRAs are large, stable companies with predictable long-term profitability (e.g. Shake Shack), rather than high-growth tech startups which often lack immediate profitability.
  5. US tax expertise is required to properly analyze and invest in TRAs.

Links relevant to the conversation

WSJ article about Andy, “The Tax Whiz With the Strangest Hustle on Wall Street”: https://www.wsj.com/finance/investing/tax-whiz-strange-hustle-wall-street-d51ddbc6 

Parallaxes Capital: https://parallaxescapital.com/ 

Lumo Coffee promotion

Lumo Coffee Discount: Visit Lumo Coffee (lumocoffee.com) and use code EXPLORED20 for a 20% discount until April 30, 2024.

Transcript: The Tax Guru the WSJ says has Wall Street’s “Strangest Hustle”: w/ Andy Lee, Parallaxes Capital – EP237

N.B. This is a lightly edited version of a transcript originally created using the AI application otter.ai. It may not be 100 percent accurate, but should be pretty close. If you’d like to quote from it, please check the quoted segment in the recording.

Andy Lee  00:04

Tax is the largest asset class in the world that no one’s ever heard of. It’s a very much part of the fabric of our society. Like there are so many avenues through which tax assets are expressed and are monetized.

Gene Tunny  00:26

Welcome to the economics explored podcast, a frank and fearless exploration of important economic issues. I’m your host gene Tunny. I’m a professional economist and former Australian Treasury official. The aim of this show is to help you better understand the big economic issues affecting all our lives. We do this by considering the theory evidence and by hearing a wide range of views. I’m delighted that you could join me for this episode, please check out the show notes for relevant information. Now on to the show. Hello, and welcome to the show. In this episode, I talked to the man that the Wall Street Journal has described as the tax whiz with the strangest hustle on Wall Street. It’s Andy Lee from parallaxes capital and we’re talking about tax receivable agreements T RAS. What on earth rtra is and why has Andy invested in them? How did companies like Shake Shack end up bound by T IRAs? Stay tuned to find out. Please be aware that Andy’s firm parallaxes capital is a big investor in TRS and nothing in this episode should be treated as financial or investment advice. I would love to hear your thoughts on the discussion that I have with Andy today. So please get in touch and let me know what you think. And if you have any questions, my contact details are in the show notes. As sponsor this episode is Lumo coffee a seriously healthy organic coffee with three times a healthy antioxidants of regular coffee. Lumo coffee offers a 20% discount for economics explore listeners until 30 April 2024. Be sure to check out the show notes for more details. Without further ado, let’s dive into the episode. Enjoy. Andy Lee from parallaxes. Capital, welcome to the programme.

Andy Lee  02:09

Thank you for having me.

Gene Tunny  02:11

It’s a pleasure, Andy, I’m keen to learn about this very exotic, very interesting, and, you know, asset class I hadn’t heard of before before I learned about what you’re doing these tax receivable agreements, so keen to chat about that to start with? Could you tell us about parallaxes? Capital? What’s the idea with the name? How did you come up with the name? Absolutely.

Andy Lee  02:38

So a parallax is an astronomy term. Whereby you look at a planet from a different vantage point to arrive at a different perspective of an object. So there are several meanings in the name, the first being an ode to my old firm, it was called Lonestar funds. And so looking at a person having a different perspective, the more secular meaning around was that many people look at problems from a singular point of view. And in order to solve an equation, like you need to look at it from multiple perspectives, to arrive at multiple solution sets. And so the plural of parallax parallax cysts. And so that was as parallax was unavailable. parallaxes was, and so that was helpful. But also it talks a little bit to my faith. I’m a Christian. And as a Christian, and we’re not so much focused on the here and now, but more focused on eternity. So a very long term perspective.

Gene Tunny  03:41

Very good. Yes, it’s a it’s a good name. I always remember those that classic 1970s film with I think it was Warren Beatty, the parallax view, which is one of those great 1970s conspiracy films that I’d recommend. So yeah, very, you know, top marks on the name. So well done. I’ve got to ask me, what is parallaxes? Capital? What? So if you’re a, you’re a fund manager of some kind, or what are you actually doing?

Andy Lee  04:10

So we’re an investment manager based in the in the US and we have raised six funds dedicated to the strategy of monetizing tax receivable agreements. So a tax receivable agreement, think about it, like a long dated annuity that is not too dissimilar from a streaming royalty on metals or mining, musical royalties of pharmaceutical royalties. So long data annuity like cash flows, that we provide upfront liquidity for to holders of these assets in order for them to have to recycle that capital to do other more productive items.

Gene Tunny  04:55

Gotcha. Okay, so, a couple of things there just immediately long dated how long and by the upfront liquidity? I mean, what is this? Is this a repurchase agreement? Or are you? Are you buying them outright? What’s, how do you how are you? What’s that involve?

Andy Lee  05:16

So are the two questions the first duration lies? It’s typically a 15 year piece of paper. Just to provide a perspective on it, we actually have fun one was a 21 year of fun to hold the paper. I know I look very young as an Asian American, it’s a gift, as I’ll call it. But people weren’t sure if I was even 2001 When I went out to raise our first fund. On the second question, it is the latter. Do what you suggest that we buy these outright from counterparties, including the likes of private equity, their CO investors, management team as well as founders, providing them upfront liquidity for what is otherwise a unloved and misunderstood asset.

Gene Tunny  06:02

Okay, gotcha. Right. And what is the asset itself? So there’s obviously a stream of income coming from somewhere for this to be valuable, what is the actual underlying asset? Absolutely.

Andy Lee  06:18

Think about it almost like a tax refund, that one might receive after they file their taxes. So some here in the US, every April 15, individuals have to file their taxes, fulfilling their tax obligation to the United States. Oftentimes, many of these individuals have overpaid their taxes. And so on April 15, they would file your taxes, the US government would say, hey, Jean, you’ve overpaid your taxes by 100 bucks, we’ll pay it to you in two months. For many individuals, they might want the money immediately. And so there are businesses such as the likes of an h&r block, that would say, June instead of waiting for $100, in two months, we’ll give you $95. Today, a Buy It Now price, we do the exact same thing. But not for consumers. We do it for corporations, where they have 15 years of refunds available to them, that would come due. And so instead of waiting every year to get that annuity, they want that money today. And so we prospectively provide them that factoring solution upfront proceeds.

Gene Tunny  07:37

Ah, okay, I think okay, this is starting to make sense. Right. So what type of companies are we talking about? I mean, what from my reading? And looking into this, it looks like is this is this highly relevant to the tech sector to startups?

Andy Lee  07:55

I wish I’m the only one, it may not be the most relevant that attack sector is primarily driven by the fact that many tech firms here in United States are very focused on growth at all costs, relative to profitability, many of them, or the vast majority of the tech sector runs unprofitably Primarily because the market prior to 2020, to value them on growth, more than they did on cash flows, primarily because they believed that these were long data annuity streams. And the SAS businesses were long data annuity themes, and that whenever they stopped growing, they will become incredibly profitable. That obviously then come to fruition whenever growth stopped. So that’s not the where we primarily transact names that we’re are associated with, include the likes of a REMAX, a Shake Shack, yeah. Duffin Phelps, so large corporates that are investment grade near investment grade businesses, there’s also the Edit element that as quickly as a tech business disrupts a industry itself is vulnerable to being disrupted. And so for an investment manager like myself, focus on the space that we’re in, like, we don’t focus on the next year or next five years, we have to believe that a business is going to be a going concern for 15 years. So that’s a very different perspective or lens that you have to look at a opportunity, primarily because you might be a great business today. Do I believe that you’re gonna be a great business in 15 years, if you’re not a great business? Senior, you might be a great business for five years that will result in me getting a return of my capital. Ultimately, I’m in business to get a return on my capital. And if you’re no longer in business in your six, I got my money back. And then I just wasted a huge opportunity cost for my investors.

Gene Tunny  10:08

Yeah, yeah, gotcha. And how does this tax receivable agreement? come about? Then? And also, I mean, okay, so I guess maybe I need to go back a bit. What’s generating this, this tax refund primarily? What is it that that is generating these potential tax refunds that will be coming in the future and that you’re able to then you buy you effectively buy those tax refunds off the companies? So I guess I’m interested in what’s generating them, if there are any sort of commonalities. And also then how do you go about making that agreement? What’s the contract look like? Is it regulated? Or is there a standard form? Can you tell us a bit about that place? Andy?

Andy Lee  10:55

Yeah, absolutely. So the most common version of that is, whenever a company is going public, they enter into a specific tax transaction in the US transforming their business, from what we call a flow through, which is a partnership or an LLC becoming a C corporation, that transaction is known as the up seat transaction, that transaction enables the company to be a beneficiary of large tax assets that will become available to them over 50, typically 15 years. So that’s an incredibly valuable asset. As a result of entering to these transactions, they enter into the agreement, the agreement is relatively rote. It’s while it’s a cottage industry, much of it has been rinse and repeat it over 30 years has been around since the 1980s. And so something that as well Warren precedents, as well as presidential documents for them to follow. And so for us, these are ultimately ended up in the hands of what we call a natural holders. So in the private equity context, private equity firms have tenure fun lives. So they take a company public, and oftentimes, they sell down the equity within the 10 years that their funds allow for them. These, if you took a company public in your A these assets, then start a 15 year clock. So in your two to three, it will be your 11 for private equity fund, you’re looking to move on and sell these positions. And that’s where we stop at we’re a second during market liquidity provider for these

Gene Tunny  12:51

assets. Rod okay. And I mean, you talk about large tax assets. What if, if I understood your terminology correctly? What are you talking about? Are you talking about what is it is a depreciation or is it the things that Yeah, Okay, gotcha

Andy Lee  13:10

items that can be depreciated or amortised. So raw. What what what’s an item that depreciate a car? A building on land is not depreciable because like obviously land is the land. But things are amortised include things that aren’t intangible in nature. So customer relationships, among others, that might be available intellectual property, among others.

Gene Tunny  13:37

Gotcha. So this is a way for these companies to to get well to get to get cash to reinvest in their operations or to you know, for working capital, whatever. Can you explain what is it? What’s in it for them? Because I mean, they they sacrifice this, you know, the this tax, you know, this expense that they can use to reduce their, their tax liability in the future? They get the upfront cash, what is it? Is it is it out of desperation that they’re going into these agreements. So how

Andy Lee  14:11

I would make a slightly different connotation. Remember, I mentioned that the sellers are private equity firms, or investors among others. So at the time of the IPO, these assets are owned by the company. Remember, pre IPO, the Board of Directors got our fiduciary duty is to maximise value for pre IPO shareholders, the public markets, we as in the US have seen a massive move away from active to passive investors. active investors are very focused on understanding what intrinsic value are, and so they’re very focused on understanding the free cash flow capabilities and generation of a business. However, on the other side of the equation passive Investors are more algorithmic, algorithmic or systematic in nature and are focused on among other things, revenue, multiple growth rates, EBIT, da multiples, price earning, none of which really captured the value of tax assets, primarily because they’re less standardisation across things such as capital expenditure, and intensity of a business, working capital, cash taxes. And so as a result of not necessarily the attributes that they seek being captured by the evaluation metrics, these tax assets are ignored. And so private equity firms are saying, Look, this fundamentally improves the free cash flow generation of a business. If you’re not going to give us an incremental value, incremental value for it, we’re going to extract it for ourselves by entering into a tax receivable agreement. So the holders of these cash flows are more sort of private equity firms. As a result of the finite fund lives, we step into the breach to provide liquidity to.

Gene Tunny  16:12

Okay, we’ll take a short break here for a word from our sponsor.

Female speaker  16:17

If you need to crunch the numbers, then get in touch with adept economics. We offer you Frank and fearless economic analysis and advice. We can help you with funding submissions, cost benefit analysis, studies, and economic modelling of all sorts. Our head office is in Brisbane, Australia, but we work all over the world. You can get in touch via our website, www dot adapt economics.com.au. We’d love to hear from you.

Gene Tunny  16:47

Now back to the show. What’s an example of a private equity firm as a Carlyle Group? Is that the sort of group you’re talking about, or KKR?

Andy Lee  16:57

Yeah, all of these massive mega funds all have trs, primarily because they had it for the investment manager themselves when they went public. And subsequent to that the principals realise the disconnect in how the the various markets private and public markets think about it differently. And if they’re extracting value from their portfolio companies, as private equity got more and more competitive?

Gene Tunny  17:25

Yeah. Yeah. I mean, it’s, it’s interesting to me, it’s one of these, these niche types of investments. I mean, honestly, I hadn’t heard of them before. You know, actually, there’s not Nishioka. Well, tell me more. 

Andy Lee  17:42

Tax is the largest asset class in a world that no one’s ever heard of. It’s a very much part of the fabric of our society. Like there are so many avenues through which tax assets are expressed, and are monetized. In the US, we have the concept of tax credits, that are now that were historically transferable or monetizable. And now they have direct pay. I don’t know you’ve been to Europe, with your significant other, and may have gone shopping in that regard. In the in Europe, there is what they call it the value added tax for which is a foreign or you can get a refund at the airport. Yep, there’s a huge business, global blue, that’s currently owned by Silverlake, that generates hundreds of million dollars of EBIT da by running the VAT tax refund programme at the airport. Similar to the example I gave you on individual taxes, that in commercial business that basically says to travellers whenever to depart in the EU, hey Jean, instead of waiting to get a check to Australia for that 1000 euros will just give you $700 Today, and they earn a sweat relative to that. There are so many businesses like that, across that run the gamut. And the lack of understanding creates the opportunity because it is the single largest opportunity set that doesn’t have commercial elements to it. And intellectual capital that has been brought to bear. Why is that? primarily driven by the fact that tax professionals here at least here in the US, when people hear attacks, they literally run away all the plug your ears, that like that’s the last thing they ever want to talk about. Every year we have to file on April 15. People consider it like being worse than going to the dentist. So like it’s something that is a very misunderstood and underappreciated even though there’s clear value add that can be created an economics that can be derived from it. Yeah,

Gene Tunny  19:56

yeah, for sure that that example you gave is a very good one. And that’s really helped crystallise in my mind. And so you’re, you’re doing what they’re doing. But with, well, you can compare what you’re doing with what they’re doing, you’re doing it for big corporations or for the private equity companies that have invested in them, they want to get out, you come in, you provide some liquidity, and you take this stream of these, these benefits that they can get from reducing their taxable income so that they will pay you that benefit associated with that in the future. You’ll get it from you get it from the company itself, too. Can you tell us what the agreement like who’s the contract or the Yeah,

Andy Lee  20:42

the agreement is between the TRA holder, then the private equity firm, now parallaxes. And the company every year, yeah, post tax filing season, the company has obligated to deliver a notice to the holders, if they utilise the asset, and the calculation of the refund, at which point of time, they have to repatriate the refund to the holder of the TRA. And so for which every q4 is a little bit like Christmas, we a little bit of an early Christmas, where we started collecting payments for the underlying payment stream. Gotcha.

Gene Tunny  21:24

Okay, so with the example you gave of the business was a silver like the global blue that does the refunds, or they will pay you up front? The VAT or the VAT refund? And they there’s a there’s a discount applied? So they get a benefit they’re taking on? Suppose they’re probably taking on less risk if they’ve got receipts? How do you think about that risk? I mean, what risk is there from, from your point of view? And how do you manage that risk? Yeah,

Andy Lee  22:00

yeah, three primary forms of risk that we manifest. The first and foremost is credit risk. So in global blues example, the EU governments failing and choosing not to, or stepping them on the pavement. For us, it’s more, it’s entirely around is the business going to exist? To the point about do I believe that this is a durable franchise, and will be around in 15 years. And so I have to believe that the company is a going concern will be a going concern, profitable and will exist in earnest. And so that’s a big part of our underwrite. And our focus on these businesses, we’re not looking for a flash in the pan, were looking for long, durable franchises. One on credit risk. The second risk is you never lose your tax asset. Like in the same way, if you don’t go, you don’t use a global blue solution, you still are eligible for the refund for multiple years. So you can go, you can fly back to Australia, on your next trip to Europe, you can file your tax refund. And that has we can do it’s the exact same thing, tax assets never get lost. They’re merely deferred. And so that has the potential to impact our IRR, which is a time weighted measure. But obviously, it’s an extent we collect it, then it doesn’t hurt our total profit dollar or mo YC on the opportunity. The last aspect is around corporate tax rates. So think about a tax acid as being the derivative of two variables, one at the tax asset itself, the notional value of a tax asset, so think about a net operating loss of 100. Think about the tax rate being your price to let’s just say 25% 100 by 25 results in a $25 cash flow. To the extent that tax rates went down and to 20%, then the tax acids 100 by 20, or $20 to the extent and went up 100 by 40, then you get $40. And so relative to most other asset classes, we have an inverse relationship to the primarily because if tax rates went up, equities likely would see some form of a correction downwards. Conversely, on the way up, ever when tax rates went down, equities would likely rally. We have an inverse relationship to that. And so for many of our investors, they view it as a nice tail hedge relative to potential policy changes here in the US.

Gene Tunny  24:47

Gotcha. Okay. So you mentioned a term before MOC. So that is multiple on invested capital. So just clarify that. That makes sense. Right? So, yeah, just thought I’d ask you about that, that risk. Because, you know, whenever you’re swapping these, or you’re taking on these, or that the stream of benefits and you’re providing upfront money, that can be risky. And we saw what happened with Lex Greensville, from the green cell family, which is a dime in Brisbane and Queensland, which is south of Bundaberg, which is where the green cell family farm is. And, you know, he was he was doing great things, but then, you know, he got into got into trouble because he thought he found this, you know, this this thing, this part of the market that no one really was properly servicing before and was providing, you know, he was buying the invoices, I think, wasn’t he and then we’re providing that supply chain finance. And then, you know, it was all working until the pandemic and and companies started delaying payments, and then the whole thing fell over for him. So he was in. And that was a real shame. What happened there real, real, real shock. So yeah, I just just wanted to ask you about the risk, because I like I just wonder, is there a risk here that? Yeah, I just want to make sure you’re I mean, I’m sure you are, you’re crunching the numbers, you’re highly experienced in this in this industry?

Andy Lee  26:22

Yeah, I think for Greensville, I mean, Dale had on the asset side of the equation, to your point, there started to being deferrals or delays to the cash flows that they were receiving, there was a little bit of an asset liability mismatch, whereby they was the liabilities they borrowed heavily, and would deliver at an incredibly aggressive rate. And so that resulted in them being unable to fulfil their obligations on the liability side of the equation today. We have also achieved securitisation. Today, our book is unlevered as we have paid it off, but that is something that we are incredibly conscious about. And look, there’s always that under inherent tail risk. The point is like you should never have too much of a mismatch. And so inherently, it’s we’re always very concerned about not having too high of a leverage level that we will be unable. Should there be shortfalls in our expectations or under writings. Yeah, yeah.

Gene Tunny  27:30

Right might have a look at some of the, what you’ve got on your website. There are some interesting things here on your website here. So I’ll put a link to that in the show notes. So parallaxes capital is an alternative asset manager and as a market leader in monetizing tax receivable agreements. Okay, so I think I’ve got a much better understanding of what that’s all about. And the stats you’ve got on your website, I don’t know if these are still current, but it says 20 Plus tax receivable agreements, purchase so they’re, so they could be large companies like Shake Shack or whatever. REMAX you mentioned that you’ve got these tax receivable agreements from and then it’s $750 million of an discounted principal balance purchase? Could you explain a bit about what what that seven 50 million figure means? Please, Andy,

Andy Lee  28:25

absolutely. Remember the example that I gave you as to the value of a tax asset such as a net operating loss multiplied by a tax rate of a 25%. We own across our portfolio $750 million of cash effective tax assets. So if you want to understand what our notional number is, you do that 750 divided by a 25% tax rate. And you would end up with like $3 billion of notional. So 30 million is what our portfolio over the next 15 years will deliver back to us should deliver back to us. Rod,

Gene Tunny  29:06

okay. And do you provide any indication of what the potential rate of return to investors is?

Andy Lee  29:14

on a net basis? We deliver call it a 15% return. Ron, okay.

Gene Tunny  29:21

Gotcha. And, Ron, so that’s obviously going to compare favourably to to more traditional asset classes, but of course, you know, risk associated with that, and nothing we’re saying here is we’re not I’m not offering any financial or investment advice, of course. Right. And who’s investing in your funds? Andy? So you’re in New York City, I believe. Who who’s investing in your funds? Is it family offices? Is it is it investment, Marilee

Andy Lee  29:54

endowments and foundations as well as small pensions? Right and Oh, CIOs,

Gene Tunny  30:00

endowments, foundations and small, small pensions Did you say confirm

Andy Lee  30:05

as well as address or CIO firms?

Gene Tunny  30:09

Sorry, I’m not familiar with that acronym IC, sorry, what type of firms and

Andy Lee  30:14

outsource Chief Investment Officer firm. Think about smaller endowments may not have the sufficient scale to hire their own research teams to allocate capital. And so they aggregate capital into a larger firm, who then deploys money on their behalf in an outsource format. As a result of that bundling, they’re able to capture economies of scale as well as gain access to best in class managers,

Gene Tunny  30:46

broad Okay, without necessarily recommending, in particular, outsourced CIO, cio firms, you know, any examples of them? I’d be interested in following up on those I can’t say I’ve really come across many of them. There

Andy Lee  31:00

are some huge ones such as a partner’s capital. A Hamilton lane, a stepping stone. Yeah, a Cambridge associates. A RCEP.

Gene Tunny  31:15

Yeah, right. Now, it’s fascinating. I mean, one of the things that our previous guest on my show, David Bahnson, who’s with oh, gee, the name of his firm escapes me, but it’s quite a, he’s got quite a reasonable amount of funds under management. He’s over at over on the West Coast. I mean, one of the points that he makes on on his capital brief show is that the the capital markets in the US are just so deep. There’s just so much. So so much money, obviously, with so much talent and so much creativity and innovation. And, you know, this is what I’m learning today is what I’m seeing today. Is is part of that it’s part of that story. It’s it’s all it’s it’s really fascinating. Yeah, so yeah, thanks for thanks for all this. I’m sorry. So my questions might be, might be a bit bit basic, but I’ve, yeah, there’s

32:14

a lot. We’re all learning together.

Gene Tunny  32:16

Very good. Very good. There’s a lot I’m unfamiliar with in this in this space. So it’s really good. My final question and it relates to a book I’ve been listening to recently. It’s Tony Robbins, his new book, The Holy Grail of investing. I’ve been listening to it on Audible. I don’t know if you’ve come across it at all. But it’s, yeah. It’s very good. Because I mean, one thing about Tony Robbins is that he just knows all of these ultra successful ultra wealthy people and he’s able to pick their brains. So he’s talking to people like Ray Dalio and, and I think Paul Tudor Jones, I think was a client of Tony Robbins. But what he picked up from Ray Dalio is this idea of this holy grail of investing and he asked Ray Dalio for some advice and, and Ray Dalio is best advice to him was, what you’ve got to find is eight to 12, uncorrelated investments for your portfolio. So he’s talking about things that, yeah, they’re uncorrelated, so they’re not going to vary. You know, what’s the right way of thinking about this there? Because the returns are so I suppose unexpected or random relative to everything else, that if you get enough of them, then you should you can outperform the market. So even if the markets in a downturn, you can still be, you can still be doing okay. So I think that’s the that’s the basic idea. I probably haven’t explained that well enough to come back to that. But I think it’s an interesting concept. And, I mean, how do you see this your tax receivable agreements? How do you see them as part of a diversified portfolio or as part of trying to achieve this, this collection of uncorrelated investment assets that Ray Dalio would call the holy grail of investing? Do you have any thoughts on that?

Andy Lee  34:10

Yeah, absolutely. So like, look, there are so many different opportunities that are as a result of an inefficient and inefficiency, opaqueness of a market as well as size of markets that create incredible moats for one to be able to harvest what I might describe as alpha from it. And that alpha isn’t necessarily something that is academic in nature, is just driven by inefficiency. That can be an opportunities like what global blue does. They have a regulatory moat. Like, no one day Oh, there’s only one kiosk at any given airport. There’s only one way for you to get a refund unless you want to go Go home and send multiple stamps and mailing your refund, that inherently has have some exposure to obviously discretionary spending, among others, but you’re looking for opportunities where they’re just such inefficiencies and markets that you’re able to harness that operational alpha, um, that can be created as a result of sourcing. And so like, I think Elliott says, is incredibly well, that they seek to sweat their assets. What they do isn’t difficult. It’s just incredibly laborious. And so that’s what we try to do at parallaxes playing in non traded markets, ie there are no brokers. Unlike a, you can’t buy this on a Bloomberg or on your friendly broker, like those are things that that require you to go out and transact on a individual by individual basis. Is it hard to do? No. Is it something that many want to do? Also very much, that’s not something that many desire to do? The best and the brightest here in the US aren’t looking to make their living and become a master of universe and tax? That’s just not something that occurs? No,

Gene Tunny  36:14

no, certainly isn’t. I think it’s so fascinating. You mentioned I mean, alpha, so you’re going for that excess return, you’re talking about excess return relative to typical market returns. And then you mentioned Elliot, and I’m trying to remember the I don’t know, I can’t remember the name of the whole firm, but as Elliott, the is that the firm that buys distressed debt, and then Sue’s the countries that it’s that it’s bought the debt from

Andy Lee  36:41

most famous for Argentina. Yeah, gotcha. Or Argentina or seizing having seized a warship from Argentina. Rot.

Gene Tunny  36:48

Yeah. Wow. Okay, I’m gonna have to cover them in a future show. That’s fascinating stuff. Okay, Andy, that that’s been do

Andy Lee  36:57

something that many are unwilling to do. Yeah. How many investment firms are willing to confront a country and confiscate a warship?

Gene Tunny  37:08

Yeah, it’s, it’s bold. It’s certainly Absolutely. Right. Okay. And it has been terrific. I’ve learned, I’ve learned a lot. And yeah, so again, it’s an illustration of just those deep capital markets and just the level of, of ingenuity, the level of rigour that is being applied to finance Well, in the US and worldwide. So this is, this is terrific. Oh, finally, I should ask is this just is this mainly a, what you’re doing this? Is this mainly applies to the US, does it? Or do you see it happening in other countries

Andy Lee  37:50

that technology can occur all over the world? Um, that’s likely not something that I thought parallaxes can pursue. Primarily because tax is a very local domain of expertise. You’re not going to have a US tax preparer. help prepare your Australian taxes. They’re just not familiar. They’re barely familiar with Canadian bumper rules, or Mexican tequila taxes. They’re very much not familiar with Australian. It’s just a local domain of expertise. Gotcha.

Gene Tunny  38:20

Okay. Right, Andy, anything else before we wrap up?

Andy Lee  38:24

Nope. Thank you so much for taking the time. No worries, I

Gene Tunny  38:28

will put a link to parallaxes capital on your on the in the show notes. And yeah, refer them to to your material. So if you’re interested in you’re in the audience, and you want to learn more about tax receivable agreements, you can you can check out Andy’s website. Andy, you’re obviously one of the great authorities on this issue. So I would definitely refer people to us. So Andy Lee from parallaxes capital. Thanks so much for your time. I really enjoyed the conversation. Take care and be well rato thanks for listening to this episode of economics explored. If you have any questions, comments or suggestions, please get in touch. I’d love to hear from you. You can send me an email via contact at economics explore.com Or a voicemail via SpeakPipe. You can find the link in the show notes. If you’ve enjoyed the show, I’d be grateful if you could tell anyone you think would be interested about it. Word of mouth is one of the main ways that people learn about the show. Finally, if your podcasting outlets you then please write a review and leave a rating. Thanks for listening. I hope you can join me again next week.

39:47

Thank you for listening. We hope you enjoyed the episode. For more content like this. To begin your own podcasting journey head on over to obsidian-productions.com

Credits

Thanks to Obsidian Productions for mixing the episode and to the show’s sponsor, Gene’s consultancy business, www.adepteconomics.com.au. Full transcripts are available a few days after the episode is first published at www.economicsexplored.com. Economics Explored is available via Apple PodcastsGoogle Podcast, and other podcasting platforms.

Categories
Podcast episode

Housing Crisis and Immigration: Australia’s Tough Choices w/ John August – EP236

This episode of Economics Explored features a deep dive into the ongoing housing crisis in Australia with John August, a Pirate Party of Australia official and Sydney radio host. Gene and John discuss the significant influence of immigration rates and building restrictions on housing availability and prices. They also consider potential policy solutions to ensure more equitable housing access, including developing a charter city named Turing. 

Please contact us with any questions, comments and suggestions by emailing us at contact@economicsexplored.com or sending a voice message via https://www.speakpipe.com/economicsexplored

You can listen to the episode via the embedded player below or via podcasting apps including Google PodcastsApple Podcast and Spotify.

About this episode’s guest: John August

John August is the Treasurer of the Pirate Party Australia. John does computer support work in retail and shareholder communication. He is passionate about justice and ethics in our world, particularly as it plays out in law generally and intellectual property in particular. He has stood on behalf of the Pirate Party in the Federal seat of Bennelong and also as a Councillor for Ryde City Council.

Along with technology and law John is also interested in spoken word and poetry. He broadcasts on community radio and hosts the program “Roving Spotlight” on Tuesdays from noon-2pm on Radio Skid Row Marrickville Sydney, and writes about his ideas on the website www.johnaugust.com.au. You can keep up to date with what John is up to via his Facebook page: https://www.facebook.com/profile.php?id=100063805005395

What’s covered in EP236

  • Introduction. (0:00)
  • Housing crisis in Australia, with focus on supply and demand issues, affordability, and government policies. (2:44)
  • Population growth, immigration, infrastructure, and housing affordability in Australia. (8:04)
  • Housing affordability and land value taxation. (13:40)
  • A Georgist approach to taxing land. (22:05)
  • Immigration and foreign aid in Australia. (31:24)
  • Reducing immigration and addressing housing challenges in Australia. (37:46)
  • Immigration policy, infrastructure, and zoning regulations in Australia. (41:45)
  • Potential for charter cities (e.g. Turing) and high-speed rail links. (47:34)
  • Foreign aid, shipping, and taxation. (53:35)

Takeaways

  1. The housing crisis in Australia is exacerbated by high immigration levels and stringent building restrictions, which together affect affordability.
  2. Policy debates are intensifying around whether to restrict immigration to ease housing demand or to relax zoning restrictions on development to boost supply.
  3. The concept of “upzoning,” similar to Auckland’s approach, could be a viable solution to create more housing in existing urban areas.
  4. Proponents of high immigration levels often overlook the infrastructural and social costs associated with a rapidly increasing population through high immigration rates.
  5. The discussion around housing is not just about economic metrics but also about the quality of life and housing accessibility for all population segments.

Links relevant to the conversation

Lumo Coffee promotion

Lumo Coffee Discount: Visit Lumo Coffee (lumocoffee.com) and use code EXPLORED20 for a 20% discount until April 30, 2024.

Transcript: Housing Crisis and Immigration: Australia’s Tough Choices w/ John August – EP236

N.B. This is a lightly edited version of a transcript originally created using the AI application otter.ai. It may not be 100 percent accurate, but should be pretty close. If you’d like to quote from it, please check the quoted segment in the recording.

John August  00:04

I try to be careful with my language I try to be descriptive but not provocative or sensationalist. You know. It’s a hard thing to be disciplined and do that because I know how tempting it is to just say something outrageous and think, oh, this will attract some attention.

Gene Tunny  00:28

Welcome to the economics explored podcast, a frank and fearless exploration of important economic issues. I’m your host gene Tunny. I’m a professional economist and former Australian Treasury official. The aim of this show is to help you better understand the big economic issues affecting all our lives. We do this by considering the theory evidence and by hearing a wide range of views. I’m delighted that you can join me for this episode, please check out the show notes for relevant information. Now on to the show. Hello, and welcome to the show. In this episode, I catch up with John August, a Sydney radio host and Pirate Party of Australia official. We dive into the topic of Australia’s housing crisis and we explore the impacts of immigration and building restrictions on the situation. I’d love to hear your thoughts on our discussion today. Do you think we need to restrict our immigration levels to improve housing affordability? What about the situation in your own country? If you’re outside of Australia, let me know. And how about up zoning to have more development in low density residential areas similar to what they’ve done in Auckland in New Zealand. And what do you think about the cheering chatter city idea? Let me know. My contact details are in the show notes. Also, please don’t hesitate to reach out with any ideas or suggestions you may have on how we can improve the show. our episode today is sponsored by Lumo coffee, or seriously healthy organic coffee with three times a healthy antioxidants of regular coffee. WeMo coffee is offering a 20% discount on economics explore listeners until APR 3020 24. Be sure to check out the show notes for more details. Without further ado, let’s dive into the episode. John Auguste Welcome back on the programme.

John August  02:10

Yes, thanks, Jane. It’s good to be back. I got a lot of interesting things on your podcast. And I guess it’s lovely to be back. And I hope you’re interviewing lots of other people the second time or third time as well, I suppose that’s

Gene Tunny  02:21

yes, yes. You’re my, this is your fifth time on the show. I think I had Dan Mitchell on the last week. And I mean, Dan must be up to about four or five. So yes, yes. But it is good to have you back on the show. We keep in touch and you’re always providing good feedback. And you’ve got, you know, really informed and interesting positions on different issues. So I always enjoy chatting with you. And one of the things I wanted to talk to you about today is this issue of this housing crisis that we are having here in Australia where we’ve got rental vacancy rates of around 1%. Whereas normally they’re about two to 3%. We’ve got we’ve got people, you know more people homeless, who are people living in tents up on Wickham terrace near where I live in Brisbane. It’s it’s absolutely diabolical. And there’s a big debate about immigration, to what extent is immigration causing and to what extent is it being caused by building restrictions? So there’s a there’s a big policy debate going on at the moment. So to start with, John, I wanted to get a sense from you. How are you? We’re seeing this current housing crisis. Do you see it as a as a crisis? And what are your thoughts on what’s driving it? Okay,

John August  03:45

well, goodness me, I think the word crisis is so much abused. I don’t think we’ve not had a housing crisis for the last, you know, one or two decades, but it’s fair to say things are getting worse. And look, I’m sympathetic to the people whose position is suddenly so dire. But you know, I’m reminded of the old statement that a recession is when someone else loses their job, and depression is when you lose your job. And like, it does seem to me that for a lot of people, you know, housing affordability has been an issue for decades, but people nod shrug and go, Oh, yeah, well, I guess these things happen. But then suddenly, when their children are having difficulty getting into the housing market and getting a property of their own, then suddenly people start to say, oh, my gosh, this is a problem. And, you know, what’s been said is that there’s a decent number of people who do own property want to maintain their values, and they’re the people who were swinging the vote at the moment. But there are what you might call real supply issues at the moment that are real and tangible. But then there’s supply issues which are a smoke and mirrors Shall we say, they’re a distraction, they’re a sideshow. They’re they’re an excuse for vested interest to peddle their, their interest. So let me try to explain that. But we do have supply chain issues with the builders. And there’s also a lot of builders who are in precarious positions. And I do believe that’s credible, they’re in precarious positions, their margins are tight, the cost of their inputs is rising, and they are actually struggling to build stuff that people want to have built. And that is certainly an issue just at the moment, we’ve got to say, this is a, you know, there were COVID Supply Chain disruptions, and it’s continuing. And I don’t know why. But it seems that so many construction businesses, you know, on on dire financial ground, you know, just just one or two notches away from bankruptcy. And that does seem to be a real thing. And I think that’s really only raised the tent over the last few years. And that is real, and that is substantial. But the other side of it is that there are supply issues, which I think are artificial, or a smokescreen. Now, Dr. Cameron Murray, that you’ve sometimes interviewed, now, he, he’s actually saying that there’s an absorption rate. So, you know, you can only build so much. And he’s also saying that developers are going to sort of drip feed property. And you know, they basically winch to government and say that there should be land releases. And then when they make a report to shareholders, they talk about all the land assets and say, you know, this is an asset that we are coveting and maintaining. So there is this whole story of land banking, there’s a story of people having properties which are held unoccupied. Now, I think it’s the PROSPER people in Melbourne, they did the sort of surveys were people running around with bicycles paying attention to property, lots that weren’t didn’t have buildings on them, they were looking at the water consumption of units and saying, Look, how many of these things are unoccupied. You’ve probably heard the one about the ratio of median value property compared to median income has gotten a lot worse over the decades. And that’s certainly true. And that what why that’s happened is basically my assertion, it’s sort of developed by some people in the Pirate Party like Mark Evans, he’s sort of saying, like, look, we made changes to taxes, there was a time when we introduced the capital gains tax discount, and property prices double. And then that fed in with lower interest rates. And that sort of basically pumped up the prices a lot more. Because on the one hand, we do have that statistic of median price of accommodation compared to median income. But over that time, interest rates have gone down. So like, what you have to look at, is not now what that number, I think, is scary, I think it’s bad, and it’s scary. But from the point of view of someone paying off their mortgage, their mortgage is going to be a certain amount on the Capitol and a certain amount on the interest. And if the interest is lower, then you can actually bid up the price of the property. And you know, as interest rates go down, the values of properties are going to go up just because you’re able to bid in that way. And so I would say it’s comparatively low interest rates, it’s sort of tax schemes, that sort of mean people, you know, it’s a good idea to invest in property. And of course, you know, I know people who will say, No, say that you’re investing as property is a bit of a misnomer, really, investment is building a new factory, to some degree, maybe even building okay, maybe even building a new apartment block, that’s maybe investment because it’s actually changing the economy. But if all you’re doing is changing ownership, that’s, that’s not really investment in a deeper sense. And I do feel that there’s this incentive towards building stuff, but not actually to letting it out. Because, you know, the PROSPER report has been that there are a lot of vacant properties. There are a lot of people doing land banking. So I think that it’s a specious argument that, oh, we just need more land releases when there’s so much land that’s held out of use as a result of the decision by the people who own that property. Now, so there’s lots of narratives here. Now, one of the things I’ve said is this thing about, you know, the capital gains tax discount the low interest rates, but going back further, you’ve had Menzies who sort of I think he’s sort of changed things so that land or land ownership was a lot more attractive. And I mean, I’ve heard narratives that there was a crash in the 1890s. And that really only recovered, I think, you know, when Menzies came in, and when there was also a deal of immigration. So that if you look at the the one gross picture is that sure immigration did actually push up the property values as well. So I would also say that if you listen to some of our overseas commentators, and they talk about, you know, the Asian economic miracle or the Irish economic miracle, then they might talk about the Australian economic miracle. And they say that our economic miracle is based on population growth, and in construction, and I’m sure that like mining and farming, and then maybe a little bit of niche manufacturing do not hurt along the way. But that’s a story that is told. And so I do think that population is a part of the picture. But before you think that I’m sort of trying to say we shouldn’t look out for your refugees, or we shouldn’t do our bit. As far as the globe is concerned, I think if we actually increased our foreign aid 2.7% of GDP, we could at least say, Look, we are being a decent global citizen who are trying to do good in the world. But when you have people coming into our country, and putting load on the infrastructure, you know, that is going to cause its own problems. Now, unfortunately, that that’s hard for me to give you now hard references to all of these things. But yeah, there is a view that like if you do more than 2% of maintenance, and new construction of infrastructure, you end up tripping over your shoelaces, there’s just so many roads being dug up so much disruption to what’s going on. So and then the other story is that retrofitting infrastructure into a city isn’t easy. I mean, you know, we had one harbour crossing in Sydney, and then we had another harbour crossing, and certainly in the Sydney CBD, you can’t really plug more lanes into, into our CBD without ripping down buildings. And it’s like a hideously difficult task. So and I know, Dr. Kendra Murray, again, you’ve had him as a guest, he has actually put a report on the immigration population growth. And he’s also saying, Look, you know, in for infrastructure, it’s hard to sort of retrofit infrastructure down the track. So we’ve got now, how does this relate to housing? Okay, I acknowledge that there’s all these different parts of the picture that I’m ringing to bear. But you know, what, one of the things we can say is, look, the level of immigration certainly isn’t making life easy as far as making housing affordable. But I’m also trying to say, look, we can, as a nation, be gracious, pump up our foreign a 2.7% of GDP. And at least, the cost of being a good Global Citizen, falls moderately fairly on all of this, through the taxation system, we’re not suffering because of our infrastructure catch up, or various other things. Now, at least it’s contained, there is the text, some of its going to GDP. But the other thing is, I think refugees are about five or 10% over intake and people so we could actually double our refugees and have our immigration input. And, you know, this is a matter of such detailed debate that you know, all the skilled people coming in now, is there really a shortage? Or is this basically business not being willing to pay the going market rate, and not being willing to train people? Now, one of the bizarre things is, I think, on the list of scarce professions is actually shifts. Now, they do actually say, Look, this is not fast food workers at your local supermarket, but more chefs working in our refills or any actual restaurants. Now I have to say, look, if the Hilton wants to import another high end shift from like, France or something Well, fair enough, that’s understandable. But when you’re saying there’s a sort of shift to work in establishments, like the RSL, or whatever, you start to think, hang on, there’s something wrong with this picture. You could say that what what’s going on here is that businesses are benefiting from cheaper labour, and the rest of us are paying for it in terms of the infrastructure difficulties that we have, and the difficulties with the housing market. But but you know, there’s so many threads to this narrative, because, you know, people will talk about capital gains tax negative gearing, this sort of thing. But you have actually had property booms in Japan in the US, and they haven’t had those systems there. And they’ve still had issues with his property. So my more general thing is like, you’ve got some issues. They’re different in each country, but they do actually add up to making things unaffordable. And so. So my story is that, you know, you’ve probably heard me say it before that we do want to have land value taxation. We do want to sort of limit our immigration. And we do want to have a policy where we are actively catching up on infrastructure and doing a bit better job of running our cities, rather than just basically having all these different things because there’s so much development, and they say, oh, we’ll make some Got a charge on the development. And that’s how we’ll get our our infrastructure. But, you know, we’re not in a sense, we’re not paying for our infrastructure properly. And that’s causing problems. And we’re basically letting people pump up their property values, and not getting any of that. And I think that’s sort of making the economy unbalanced, and that sort of a georgeous picture. But, you know, one of the things about the affordability of housing is, as I said before, it’s not just ratio of median income to median price, it’s the interest rates, and then there’s how much of your weekly income, are you actually paying any interest plus capital payments, and my suspicion is, our loans are getting longer in duration. But people who can afford a loan are still, you know, they’re struggling, but they’re paying them off because the interest is lower. And there’s this bigger picture, which also includes interest rates. And that’s basically prices have been beat up because people can pay them. But I think it would be better if rather than these payments going into increase property values that actually went to the government in terms of land value taxation, as far as a lot of people are concerned, they’re still paying the same amount of money, but at least that money is going into helping the government afford infrastructure, rather than the pockets of people who are watching their property values escalate. Yeah,

Gene Tunny  16:22

yeah. Okay. John has been there’s a lot there. And I think what you’ve, what you’ve done is I mean, you’ve highlighted just all of the relevant factors here in this supply factors as demand side factors, and they’re both going to be relevant in determining the the market outcomes that we see. So I think that’s, that’s fair enough. There are a few things I want to pick up on and, and talk about. But first, can you remind us about the whole Georgist movement, please? And what land what you mean by land value taxation, and what you see as the benefits of that, please? Okay,

John August  16:59

well, this is something where we are distinguishing, I guess, real investment from speculation. And let’s say, Look, if first off, building large blocks or units is a bit controversial, some people say that there’s all these horrible limiting regulations. But then other people say, the council has this limitation. And then the developer wants to have the council break their limits, and basically have extra floor space or extra floors or extra floor space ratio. And they say, Look, if you break your rules, we’ll give you this extra wad of money. And, and then if the council refuses, they take it to the land and Environment Court. So there’s this whole dodgy picture around development. But let me try to say that, obviously, if if a block of units is welcome, and the locals are getting pissed off, you know, you can actually say, look, you’re increasing the density of, of habitation. And that is actually investment and improving things equally, building a new factory, or doing various things that’s investment. But other thing is just transfer of ownership and speculation. And the other side of speculation is you own property, and the value goes up because of the efforts of somebody else, then you have a benefit that you haven’t actually worked for. So this is making a distinction between what you might call genuine economic worth, which is like opening a new factory, getting it started employing things running the production line, things are actually happening, you have brought stuff together, you’ve invested, you’ve actually done something, those workers are actually doing something on a day to day basis. And that’s, you know, in the Georgia’s framework that is real economic activity, but putting your money in something and then just watching it grow in value, that is, I guess, less morally worthwhile than than actual investment. So that’s one part of the story. But the thing is, if you grab some property, and while other people do stuff that grows in value, you haven’t actually done anything. Now developers will say, Aha, it’s a strategic choice we develop here. We are helping the economy go. You know, I guess I do sort of, for the most part, challenge that. But let me try to tell a bit of a story that sort of encapsulate some of what’s going on in the Georgia’s picture. Let’s say that you have a property. And I don’t know that the council builds a garbage dump next to it. And you all then complain and try to get compensation for the fact that there’s a garbage dump there and say, oh, you know, you’ve reduced my property value. But let’s imagine that you build your property, and then about a kilometre away. Either someone builds a shopping centre or somewhere or the government builds a railway line and puts a railway station there. And both of those things increase the value of your property. By now, while in the first case, you went on to the council complaining look, you have reduced my property value. And now with the case of the shopping centre, that’s a bit more murky, because you know, the private end industry isn’t doing it. But in the case of the case of the railway station, while you will see a queue of people at the council complaining about the fact that they garbage dump nobody and accuse up at the government saying oh, my gosh, you’ve increased the value of my property, I feel so guilty that you’ve done this, and this is a bonus. And look, here’s your share, I know you’re taxing me. But here’s a bit of extra money, because of what you’ve done for my property. Right, notice the asymmetry there. So what GA is the same in a lot of cases, people just own property, what’s the value grow, and they’re not actually doing anything. So because they’re not doing anything, really, the public is entitled to that. And so now we get into the thing of like, does the government represent the title, the people doesn’t represent the state, but let’s just say the best approximation is to say, let’s let the government claim some of that, like I was imagining that person doing voluntarily. And notice, you do actually have, I think, some situations where when when people do do infrastructure, they’re trying to charge businesses, but that’s sort of an ad hoc thing. It’s not really, you know, full on land value taxation that’s uniform, and trying to capture this on an ongoing basis. And also, vacant property is no invite and mill Melbourne, they were trying to put on a vacant property tax, because one of the things that people are noticing is, all these people, either land banking, or having units that they’re holding out of us. Look, if you really want to do that, really, you should be paying for the privilege, I suppose. And in France, my understanding is, if you have one property, that’s cool. But if you have two properties, your second property is taxed as though you’re renting it. So you’d better well be renting it because if you’re not, you’re really paying paying through the nose for that privilege. And I suppose the thing about a lot of things in France is you can have one of anything. That’s the sentiment. But once you have more than that, see things change. And I think that’s a lot of the way that that that is constructed. Now, the whole Frank system. But what about but to try to summarise the Georgia sentiment is that rather than imagining developers and speculators and people who are who are making Gamble’s that pay off both them and society, it’s saying look compared to actual economic activity, people who just own property and watch it grow in value without actually contributing to that to themselves where that what’s its other people’s or the government’s actions that are contributing to that, really, that’s not a fair and equitable earning, that money really should be going to the government. And the other thing is, there’s all these theories of taxation and deadweight loss and, and distortions and so on. And I have Okay, I have to admit, I don’t have the arguments on my fingertips. But my understanding is that there are a lot of economists who will say, land value taxes are the least distortionary taxes in an economic sense. Now, certainly people who own properties, and also particularly pensioners who, I guess, you know, facing an uncertain future, obviously, they will be concerned about paying taxes on their land. But even in New South Wales, I think the government was looking at giving people the option of swapping from the stamp duty to land by your taxation, and it would be sort of a more a better thing for them. And I know the year the then a liberal state government was looking at going in that direction. And I was actually making tweets saying good on them. And then there was a thing that they were sort of chucking rocks. And I mean, this sort of approach has been used in the AC T for a very long time. But the other thing is, Jean, I’m surprised that in all your meandering through the the world of activism or intellectual circles or whatever, you’ve never met, Axe grinding georgeous, because where I come from here a dime a dozen, but anyway, nonetheless.

Gene Tunny  23:54

Right? No, not Not really. But you know, I’ve heard the arguments over the years. And you’re right. I mean, the argument is that well, because land can’t move, right. There’s a tax on land is, if it’s the if it’s on that on the rent, so to speak, the that unearned increment, then it’s going to be non distortionary. So that certainly is the argument and and then you’re talking about their proposals to tax vacant, vacant properties, etc. And that French, that French tax measure that are their policy? That sounds interesting, I’ll have to look at that. And so do you see that this is a way this is? I mean, it’s obviously it’s not going to solve the whole problem. But do you see measures such as this part of the way that you can address the housing affordability problem?

John August  24:55

Yeah, I would say there are short term and long term issues. Notice, okay, just briefly going on a diversion. I mean, these fine companies are struggling, I mean, you know, a nice thing to do would be to have a government fund where they can make special loans to sort of keep a given government given business afloat. And look, you still want to look at the business and say, Look, if we give you some help, is there’s this rough patch that you will get through, and then you’ll come out the other end, and have the same some confidence in that. So sort of a bit of an easier way to get a loan than a regular bank, but you still want to keep a little bit of a sense of, you know, these are things that are going on. And as far as supply chain issues, look, I just hope that construction methods will get a bit innovative over the next next half year or year. And they’ll work out ways of getting around the shortages that they have. I mean, you know, there’s all these ideas for like 3d printing of this, that and the other and sort of hempcrete. And, I mean, there’s there’s a lot of avenues that people could actually go down to try to try to address these issues. But okay, that’s sort of your short term thing. And certainly, Georgia’s reforms would be a part of it, because the government at least would have more of a chance to catch up on infrastructure, and there’d be less of this upward pressure on on properties. Now, one of the things is, I think, you know, there’s some economists have identified that, you know, it’s like, very difficult to think of a certain number of voters want to maintain their asset values, and the other people who don’t yet own property, want those asset values to not not at least not rise up as much as they have been. So you’ve got this fundamental political dilemma that this is going away from economics, and my gosh, it’s all propaganda going around, but it wouldn’t surprise me if like the trucks have come home to roost, and things over the next five years will go really topsy turvy politically, as so many people who wanted to get property have been sort of frozen out of it by circumstances, and they’re, they’re looking for answers. And, you know, oh, gosh, you know, maybe that will happen. I see so many people who are a lot more confident than me, and they’re, I guess, your political propagandists. But let’s say I wouldn’t, it wouldn’t surprise me if that happened. But what I guess I’m trying to get is, paradoxically, if you tax property in a more effective way, the whole economy goes into a bit more balanced, and you actually have more property available to live in. And you have better infrastructure in the city. And I know, it’s a bit paradoxical. But now my assertion is, if you tax land properly in the right way, then that will help to rebalance the economy to the point where things become more, more, more affordable. And the other side of things is that, you know, it’s sad thing is, I don’t know what the problem is, I don’t know how to fix it. But it does feel like investment in the real economy to actually do stuff is just so boring as complete or so tiresome as compared to investing in property. In a sense, investing in property shouldn’t be something that happens over there in the corner, just to keep people in accommodation, it shouldn’t be a dominant thing in the economy. When people think of investing, they should be thinking and investing in, in real actual economic activity. And, you know, that’s part of the thing is that our economy is out of balance in that way. But yes, I’m going off on a mountain of a bit of a tangent, I know, population is part of the issue. But I know cam was actually saying, Look, we had this whole COVID thing with a lack of immigration, and the property market was still still moving ahead. Now, one of the things to keep in mind, that was actually the top end of the market, where I guess people were still shuffling their, their money around. And my understanding is it didn’t happen at the bottom end. I think cam has his own explanations, but I tend to think that it’s the bottom end of the market, where people are competing with the immigrants. So So part of the thing would be to actually control our rate and immigration gets get serious about the catch up on infrastructure. But we could also move towards, you know, point 7% GDP on foreign aid, and perhaps even doubling our refugee intake just to show Look, we’re not being narky, about this humanitarian thing, we’re just trying to manage infrastructure and manage what’s going on in our economy. But I would also say there’s all this tooing and froing, politically, and I would say, Look, we do want to manage our flow of people into the country, but it’s not going to be a magic one that fixes the problem. And we know that because when there was COVID, and we had a serious lack of people coming into into Australia, it didn’t really change things that much though, there is that particular example of Victoria and Melbourne, where I guess there’s a very interesting outcome. They’re sort of saying, hang on, you give a whole bunch of supply and it doesn’t really improve affordability. that much. So, you know, there’s something deeper going on there?

Gene Tunny  30:02

Well, yeah, on the Georgia State proposal, I think I’m gonna have to come back to that, because it’s an interesting idea. And there are economists who are who have looked at it and Henry George was is obviously, he made some, you know, an important contribution to to economics or political economy, as it was called then

John August  30:21

we we in Australia have actually pursued Georgist ideas to some degree, and also the fact that our council rates are actually based on the unimproved value of the land. My understanding is that people were thinking of Georgia’s principles, when they actually figured out look, how are we going to implement this whole rates thing? But you could equally argue that that while our rates are related to our property values, it’s not it’s not trying to grab the our unearned income. It’s more this is how we’re going to pay for the libraries and the roads and the rubbish and the this and that. And we’re just going to sort of tax it proportionately in this way. But it’s not actually trying to grab that value. Yeah, it’s but anyway, so there’s a few things going on there. And yeah, I mean, let’s say, look, it’s not going to be a magic wand. It’s not a single solution. But by golly, I reckon it would help to sort of turn our economy around to a way that’s basically fairer overall. And I do embrace that part of the Georgia’s narrative.

Gene Tunny  31:24

Okay, we’ll take a short break here for a word from our sponsor.

Female speaker  31:30

If you need to crunch the numbers, then get in touch with adept economics. We offer you Frank and fearless economic analysis and advice, we can help you with funding submissions, cost benefit analysis, studies, and economic modelling of all sorts. Our head office is in Brisbane, Australia, but we work all over the world, you can get in touch via our website, www dot adapt economics.com.au. We’d love to hear from you.

Gene Tunny  31:59

Now back to the show. John, I want to go talk about the migration numbers. Again, I think you did make a good point. And this is not necessarily endorsing what you’re saying. But you’re saying you could actually double the number of refugees. And that’s not that doesn’t necessarily mean you’re going to Well, you could actually reduce the title migration numbers, but double categories or increased categories that we think are good for Australia or that were that we that we value or the community would like to see more migration in those categories, rather than, say foreign students who seem to be making the bulk up the bulk of the immigration title at the moment?

John August  32:43

Well, certainly, I mean, please, I, I hope I’m not not having a go at foreign students. But you know, there is the thing that where you have a university with lots of foreign students, it does rather disrupt the property market in the proximity of the university. And I think that is the experience. And that’s why I was saying that if our GDP is it points out wherever foreign aid is point 7% of GDP, at least the burden of that ethical, ethical decision falls moderately evenly on all taxpayers, which I think is fairer than the current situation. But But yes, yeah, that the thing is like, immigration is a few things like one of them is refugees, where we basically say, look, it’s a rough world, we’re going to give some people refuge from those difficulties. Okay, fair enough, then you’ve got, you know, basically businesses claiming that there is a shortage. And I think we can look at that a bit more carefully and say, Look, this is a different definitional issue. Look, maybe business is actually short on on particular forms of employees. And that means we when we go to the shopping centre, pay a bit and pay a bit more for something. Well, in a sense, so what you might say, this is a consequence of how we run the country. And that’s the outcome there. And then you have, I guess, sort of family reunions. And you know, it, I suppose, in a sense, it would be lovely if our world were free of conflict, and everything was sort of reasonably on an even keel. And people could just move around as they see fit and come to Australia, because they thought it was a nice place to move to, but I suppose, you know, I don’t think we can do that. And one of the other things is that when we’re talking about foreign aid, now, if we actually have, let’s say, people, doctors, nurses, whatever coming from less well off countries to us, and we’re not paying for the training costs, then in a virtual sense, the cost of that training should be subtracted from our foreign aid. So we have our actual foreign aid number, and then we subtract from that the cost of training people that we have gotten from countries less well off from ourselves, and then we actually end up with our our actual corrected foreign aid number. And, you know, I’m not the only person living in a country observation. So, you know, this is one of the things where, look, you do want to be a part of the world, you want to be compassionate, you want to do your bit. But obviously, you want to do it in a way where you’re managing your own situation, your own economy. And I think that we can, you know, ethically sort of look at controlling our immigration numbers. And as I say, look, there’s people who’ve told this story that no, there was a crash in the 1890s. And the property values really only went up, you know, with Menzies and immigration and so on. And that’s when you notice that first sort of lift from that doldrums coming out of the 1890s. So there’s certainly some interesting stories there. And yeah, it’s hard for me to hit you with a whole bunch of figures to actually prove these assertions, but I can say I’m doing my best.

Gene Tunny  35:48

Yeah, no, I think I think you’re telling the broad story correctly. As far as I can tell. Now, I’m interested in your thoughts on foreign aid. I mean, you’re talking about more than you’re talking about tripling, like three axes. Now, foreign aid, aren’t you? Because at the moment, if I had a look on the parliamentary website, it says our official do So Australia’s ODA, so our official development assistance, as a proportion of GNI, it’s expected to remain at the 2021 22 level of 0.2%. So that’s for 2223. And you’re talking about 0.7%. Now, we see the average is point three 2%. What

John August  36:33

well, point 7%? Is my understanding that that is the UN recommended level. And obviously you you kind of wonder like, is the UN rational? Are they this Are they this, but sometimes, an international body has the objectivity that you would like. So that’s sort of why I’m thinking about point 7%, at least something to aspire to. Or if we could be reaching towards point 7% and do better than any other nation on the planet. Then if we were limiting immigration, or doing various other things, we could say, well look at our foreign aid. Now, keep in mind, you got to be careful that your foreign aid is not just a hidden subsidy for construction companies to build stuff that these third world countries don’t actually need or can use. There are some subtleties there. And look, notice, tell you the reason why I brought up foreign aid is in the shadow of immigration and controlling immigration and saying, look, there’s refugees, there’s immigration, how do we demonstrate that we are doing our bit as a global citizen to make the world a better place? And it’s in that shadow that I’m talking about foreign aid? So you know, it hasn’t it hasn’t been totally out of left field? It’s sort of sort of the trend. Yeah.

Gene Tunny  37:46

Okay. And, and I think your point about how you can actually, like we could, we could massively lower or substantially lower the number of the amount of immigration because we had 550,000. Net overseas migration, that’s the figure for the last 12 months, if I’ve got that, right. And, I mean, that’s just extraordinary. Yep. So, record, this is from Leith van Sullens, one of his latest pieces, elbow lies his way out of rental crisis. I love her. I love all their titles. Well, I

John August  38:21

try to be careful with my language. I tried to be descriptive, but not provocative or sensationalist? You know. It’s a hard thing to be disciplined and do that, because I know how tempting it is to just say something outrageous and think, oh, this will attract some attention.

Gene Tunny  38:42

Yeah, but I mean, I quite I mean, I’ve been following them. And I think this, I think their time has come. So for a long time they’ve been, you know, running these lines, and they have the public hasn’t really been receptive to it, or they have it hasn’t been a popular position. But now I think, given the challenges that we’re facing in housing, given this, the absorption problem that it seems that we’re, we’re facing, I think they’re getting a lot more the reception to their line is is is it’s a lot better,

John August  39:14

as well. Well. Keep in mind, I think I’ve already said this, that I do not believe that, you know, just reducing immigration is going to be a magic one. We have to, in some sense, aggressively pay catch up on our infrastructure. And another thing I’ll point out is, I don’t know what it’s like in Brisbane, but certainly in Sydney, you’ve got the issue where you’ve got the rich suburbs, and the people who are like the nurses, the fire is the police officers, the people doing cleaning the people doing whatever, can’t afford to live there. So they’ve got to basically travel all the wire across Sydney, and they’re putting a needless load on the road network that doesn’t really need to be there. And for the rest of us that are not in that situation. We’re obviously coping with congested roads. So you You know, for me, that’s a side effect of that sort of asymmetric wealth distribution. And one of the things that may be happening in in Brisbane, I know some councils in Sydney, are looking at getting into public housing, not in a grand sweeping way. But key worker accommodation. This is a, this is accommodation that will be there for the police officers and their families, for the nurses and their families, for the firefighters and their families, and perhaps for the cleaners in their families that are actually servicing that area. And, you know, you’ll basically have to say, look, either I have a job, or I will be getting a job in the area. And I mean, one of these professions, so the council will then give you some subsidised the place to live. And, you know, that’s interesting that councils are even contemplating doing that. I mean, I mean, I guess this is, this is sort of a, I guess it’s a bit of an issue around infrastructure and housing, I guess, a few steps from, from your original question, but nevermind can’t help myself. I’m

Gene Tunny  40:58

going to understand the logic of it. So I’ve seen that in, in rural towns in particular, so you’ve got a visited a potato processing facility in one of the Riverina towns, and they actually own some houses in the local town, so that they’ve got places for the, I think, you know, the migrant workers who come into work at their processing facility, so they’ve got somewhere to live when they’re, when they’re in the area. So I can see the logic of that, and why it might make sense for some councils to look at that awesome. Well,

John August  41:34

I know that, you know, just travelling around country towns, it’s interesting, when there’s some sort of development and all the tradies have taken all the motels or, or there’s some sort of running festival or something like that. Yeah. By golly, you know, you notice that when you when you go to a country town thinking, Oh, this is a quiet, sleepy country town, there’ll be lots of vacancies at the motel and Well, anyway,

Gene Tunny  41:58

that’s very true. Okay, I want to go back to those numbers. So migration programme, so they’re in the permanent migration programme. So remember, I talked about how our net migration has been running at about 550,000. Okay, the permanent migration programme, which is what you’re talking about, which is refugees, or the family reunions, and skilled migration that’s set at 190,000 places. So that’s just a fraction of the total net overseas migration and a big part of it are our students over foreign students coming to universities, and also, the students who stay on they get an extension, so they do a degree, and then they stay here for a couple of years after that. And you know, some of them will have work rights, and they’ll be they’ll be in our labour for so I’ll and you know, a lot of it is that and so we’ve got this big temporary migration number. So I’ll put a link to leiths post in the show notes, because I think it’s a nice summary of all of the relevant data. We’ve got around 700,000 student visa holders in Australia, but in terms of temporary visa holders, so that could be students, their families, people who are who did a degree and then they’re still staying here. That’s at 2.2 to 2.4 million people. So depending on whether you use the city as a quarterly, seasonally adjusted number, that’s about 2.3 million it looks like and I’ll put that in the show notes. So is that

John August  43:33

that at the moment, or per quarter or per year? Or what are we what are we saying here? Yeah, that’d

Gene Tunny  43:38

be at the moment. So that’d be the stock of them. Yeah. stock at a point in time. Yeah. Yeah. And so we’re well above where we were at COVID. And you could argue that we’ve actually, you know, some of the people will say, I actually it’s just catch up and we’re just on the same trajectory. Okay. Maybe so, and this is something that Leif addresses here. And his his point is that well, okay, this this argument, the the refers to a tweet from Bill, is it a bill Rizvi, who was a former immigration bureaucrat, where he was saying, Our look, we’re just we’re actually where we would have been if we’re on the same trajectory pre pandemic and then so Leith goes recipes arguments ridiculous because the pandemic completely constipated the supply side of the housing market by sending material costs through the roof sending builders boss so you’re talking about this before John, and reducing building capacity by months of lock downs, deliberately engineering a record immigration rebound into a supply restricted market was the height of idiocy and is why we are suffering from the worst rental crisis and living memory

John August  44:46

led to a well articulated position, I suppose I’d have to think about it much more carefully to say look, is it right or is it wrong, but it sounds very reasonable on the face of it, you know, pretty prima facie is the legal people would say and but my broad position would be, look, we were playing catch up on infrastructure before, if we’re actually going to get some breathing space, we’ve got to have a commitment to catch up on infrastructure at the same time as we limit immigration. So we can actually get ahead of the curve because I think a lot of this, this silly bugger games of like he’s a development will divert some of the benefits from that to building infrastructure that’s not getting ahead of the curve. And like, look, just a bit of an anecdote from like, history of Sydney, is way back when our first rail lines went out to Sydney to service the farmers, okay. And that was why they were built. So if you wanted to build a settlement, you know, 10 or 20, KS out of out of the City Central, what would it then be in the city centre, you just build a railway station on some part of the railway track, and boom, boom, there’s the start of your community, your infrastructure has led your community rather than the infrastructure coming sometime later based on some deferred payment schedule, you know, so you know, where where? Yeah, I mean, let’s manholes and may well have a good point. I’m not going to disagree with it. But my position is, we were playing catch up before and if we’re going to be serious about playing, doing actual proper catch up, then we can’t just do business as usual like it was however many years ago. So that but yeah, he may well have a good point there.

Gene Tunny  46:23

One other thing I want to talk about before we wrap this up, is I want to talk about zoning, heritage character protection. Now 20% of Brisbane lots are protected by character, protection or heritage of some kind. So most of the pre war housing that well that’s protected all the old Queenslanders, it’s very difficult to redevelop those old Queenslanders to knock them down and to, to build townhouses, townhouses are now banned in low residential suburbs in Brisbane. So we’re, we’re limiting the supply side in that way. And Peter Tula has made my colleague at Centre for independent studies, he’s made a strong case for relaxing these restrictions, because they are driving up the cost of house and he points to what’s happened in Auckland, in Auckland in New Zealand. And I think there’s an emerging view that we need to have a yes in my backyard a young beatitude rather than a not in my backyard, a NIMBY attitude. Do you have any thoughts on that, John?

John August  47:36

Okay, well, first off my, my original position was saying, look, there’s too much land banking going on, and too much drip feed into the supply from the developers. And you know, the and now that analysis by the Melbourne George’s people running around with Drupal while riding around with cycles, looking how many vacant blocks there are analysing of blocks that don’t actually have water usage corresponding to people actually living there. So look, there’s a lot of stuff being held out of views, and that needs to be properly identified and engaged with. But as far as your other story about zoning, my best idea of a compromise would be if someone is basically wanting to hold on to that property and saying, Look, we want this to have its heritage value preserved, then basically, maybe they should be paying for that. And they should be paying for the privilege of having that status. Now the one of the problems is, is this something that owner wants something that the state government wants something that the council wants something that the community wants? Because I think there are cases of people who really want to develop their property, and it’s been hit with a heritage order. And they are people who want to develop and they are constrained by this. And I do do me I might mind vague feeling on this at the moment is, if someone wants to keep their property and says, Look, I endorse this heritage status, then they should perhaps pay extra. If the heritage status is being imposed on them by council on may resent it, then perhaps the council should pay for increased maintenance costs, because it’s harder to keep these old places going. And then there’s a thing of like, does the community have a legitimate interest in keeping the vibe of the place now, we’re talking about a lovely little coastal community and you drive through it and it’s a bit bit sort of not not overdeveloped close to the coast and it really does have a charming feel for me as a tourist driving through it. And I do wonder if that sort of thing is justified, but as with so many things, you know, this is a balance and the point that you’re making that may be a lot of people and not so much worrying about their heritage. values so much as being selfish, I suppose that’s a thing between a legitimate interest in inherited value, and a certain degree of selfishness. And I tend to think that if we have something like the rocks in Sydney, or, or New Orleans in the US or something, and you’re sort of saying, Well, look, here is this part of the city, which we are going to preserve. And I think that’s right, in Paris, they’ve got old Paris and New Paris. And I think if you’ve actually been to Paris, and just seeing this sea of like, four storey buildings, or maybe they’re five storey buildings, and it’s just awesome to contemplate, and then you turn your head, and there’s new parents sort of thing. So you know, that might be a bit of a better compromise, rather than this, this sea of sort of heritage buildings. Now, in contrast to some other commentators who I guess a lot more politically exploiting, than me, notice, I’m willing to say, let’s put all these ideas on the table and look at them all. Look at them all at once on the table at the same time. Now, it would be a bit sad to lose this green space, but as far as like the surrounding areas, but okay, look, you’ve actually triggered a thought that actually came out of The Science Party, which is a relative of the Pirate Party under the fusion Alliance. And we were actually talking about charter cities, and there’s one in Honduras and this sort of thing. And, you know, I’m just going to be very brief and say, Look, Shenzen, in China worked. And this one in Honduras doesn’t seem to have worked, even on delivering on its own terms. But that’s not an argument against all charter cities, because Shenzhen seems to have worked. But part of the reason why Shenzhen may have worked is because of the culture of community that was created. You know, a lot of the people either they stayed there because they want to stay there, or they move because they just chose to. So there could be a social variable behind this. But anyway, trying to get to a conclusion here. The Science Party did actually propose a charter city in between Sydney and Canberra, I guess maybe The Science Party grew up in Sydney. But anyway, so this charter city of touring was, to some degree going to be privately funded, have a road network that was going to be below ground from the beginning, have a lot of tower blocks, and a lot of green space, and paradoxically have actually higher density than the average density of Sydney, and also be privately funded. And the amazing thing is that ticked so many boxes you wouldn’t believe. But it’s, I’m not, I’m not going to comment on how politically practical it is, or how practical practical it is. But by golly, it’s an intriguing notion, you know, and that’s, that’s the charter city of touring that the The Science Party was once maybe they’re still actively promoting it. But certainly at one stage, they were promoting it as a cute way of doing the thing. And from my point of view, I sort of say, Alright, there’s touring. So we started our fast rail link between Sydney and Canberra via touring. And over time, we extend that extend that south towards Melbourne, and north towards Brisbane. And we eventually have a high speed rail linkage between Brisbane and Melbourne. But that’s a whole other thing of, you know, the practicality of the High Speed Rail Link and, you know, the relative captive monopoly of rail track of air transport between Sydney and Melbourne and so on and so forth. But, but yeah, that’s, that’s, that’s its own sort of rabbit warren. But anyway, so But in talking about your lives, and no one has

Gene Tunny  53:35

asked you about cheering Yeah. Just cheering It’s named after Alan cheer. That’s correct. Yes, you’d

John August  53:40

think that would come out of The Science Party. Darwin was actually named after Charles Darwin. So. But anyway, so yes, I’m willing to think about EMB zoning and those sorts of issues, but tried to put them on the table with all these other things at the same time. And as I say, in contrast to a lot of activists, I’m actually willing to say, look, let’s at least think about putting them all on the table at once.

Gene Tunny  54:01

Very good. And it’s not about getting rid of green space. I wouldn’t want to do that, I think. And it’s not about high rise towers, right, what they’re talking about, it’s about the missing middle housing units, six packs or townhouses because some of these old Queenslanders, you can we can get much better use of that land if we redevelop them. I think I think there’s a lot of merit in that because what we’ve got at the moment is we’ve got high density allowed in certain parts of the city that are former commercial or light industrial areas. And we have these massive towers. And yet we’ve got other areas which are close to the city with very low density, whereas we could have some nice missing middle housing, some medium density, which I think would really help us out a lot and I had Natalie Raymond from yimby, Queensland on in a previous episode, so I’ll put a link in the show notes to that. Right now, John has been has been great. Yeah, lots of issues. Ernie given me a lot to think about, we’re gonna have to come I’m gonna have to come back and chat with you about overseas development assistance. And the the the issues around that I liked how you mentioned or you were alluding to this concept of boomerang aid, because you know, aid that effectively just comes back to your country, because, you know, quite a bit of it is that, and it’s not necessarily beneficial to the, it may not be beneficial to the countries that receive it. So, yeah, I think there’s definitely some, then there’s a big debate about foreign aid and to what extent it is beneficial to the countries that receive it, or is it just beneficial to the elite and the countries? Does it help the poor? What What issues does it create? So I think we can we can have a good chat about that. And also about Georgia ism, and land value taxation. I think that’s something that probably warrants its own episode. Anything you’d like to say before we conclude anything else?

John August  55:54

All right, well, I’ll just give a plug for a film called a frightened Yeah. Which is as in freight, you know, that’s shipping. So you can get that to that at thought navy.com. And that’s talking about the nature of shipping because shipping is such, I mean, this film was made a while ago, but as far as I understand, shipping is still as dodgy as it once was that basically, people are working boring, risky jobs on shipping. And were sort of basically bought cheaper goods at the supermarket. But look, you know, hopefully, I’m not not a pretentious middle class guy, but I’m willing to pay for the dolphin safe tuna and the the, the the, the open range eggs. And, and certainly, if you know, this conditions on board ships are a bit more comfortable, you know, I’m happy to pay a bit more for my goods at the supermarket. And I think that, you know, basically there is the quite the possibility that in a sense, the shipping companies are offloading, you know, responsibility on to us when they themselves have gotten unfortunate work practices and flags of convenience and all this sort of thing, a bit of a metaphor to tax tax dodgers and Cayman Islands and so on. So but that that’s its own sort of, I guess, rabbit hole, but I thought I’ll give that particular film a bit of a plug. It’s certainly worth checking out.

Gene Tunny  57:12

Okay. John Agus, thanks so much for your time, I really enjoy the conversation. As always, you’ve given me a lot to think about. So thanks so much.

John August  57:21

Okay, well, well, you’ve also put forward your side of things. And notice I haven’t tried to dismiss it. I’ve just said, Look, we need to put all these things on the table at once. And I’m certainly willing to at least think about things so absolutely. certainly happy to do that. Very good. Thanks, John. Okay, thank you.

Gene Tunny  57:38

Right. Hi, thanks for listening to this episode of economics explored. If you have any questions, comments, or suggestions, please get in touch. I’d love to hear from you. You can send me an email via contact at economics explore.com, or a voicemail via SpeakPipe. You can find the link in the show notes. If you’ve enjoyed the show, I’d be grateful if you could tell anyone you think would be interested about it. Word of mouth is one of the main ways that people learn about the show. Finally, if your podcasting app lets you then please write a review and leave a rating. Thanks for listening. I hope you can join me again next week.

58:25

Thank you for listening. We hope you enjoyed the episode. For more content like this where to begin your own podcasting journey, head on over to obsidian-productions.com

Credits

Thanks to Obsidian Productions for mixing the episode and to the show’s sponsor, Gene’s consultancy business, www.adepteconomics.com.au. Full transcripts are available a few days after the episode is first published at www.economicsexplored.com. Economics Explored is available via Apple PodcastsGoogle Podcast, and other podcasting platforms.

Categories
Podcast episode

Is Uncle Sam Running a Ponzi Scheme with the National Debt? w/ Dr Dan Mitchell – EP235

In this episode, show host Gene Tunny engages with Dr Dan Mitchell in a frank discussion about the US’s looming debt crisis. The conversation covers Dan’s new book, co-authored with Les Rubin, The Greatest Ponzi Scheme on Earth: How the US Can Avoid Economic Collapse. In the episode, Dan talks about the unsustainable trajectory of federal debt, the consequences of government overspending, and the tough choices needed to avert economic disaster. Hear how Dan reacts to the Modern Monetary Theory view that debt and deficits aren’t a problem.

Please contact us with any questions, comments and suggestions by emailing us at contact@economicsexplored.com or sending a voice message via https://www.speakpipe.com/economicsexplored.

You can listen to the episode via the embedded player below or via podcasting apps including Google PodcastsApple Podcast and Spotify.

About this episode’s guest: Dr Dan Mitchell

Daniel J. Mitchell is a top expert on fiscal policy issues such as tax reform, the economic impact of government spending, and supply-side tax policy. Mitchell is a former senior fellow with The Cato Institute and The Heritage Foundation and served as an economist for Senator Bob Packwood and the Senate Finance Committee. His articles can be found in such publications as the Wall Street Journal, New York Times, Investor’s Business Daily, and Washington Times. He is a frequent guest on radio and television and a popular speaker on the lecture circuit. Mitchell holds bachelor’s and master’s degrees in economics from the University of Georgia and a Ph.D. in economics from George Mason University. 

What’s covered in EP235

  • Introduction. (0:00)
  • US government debt and entitlement programs. (4:48)
  • Government spending and its impact on the economy. (9:05)
  • US government spending, Social Security, and fiscal policy. (14:06)
  • US retirement systems and entitlement programs. (18:32)
  • Medicare reform and the federal budget. (24:05)
  • US budget deficits and entitlement programs. (27:59)
  • Taxes, spending, and economic growth. (33:01)
  • Kyle Kulinksi clip. (38:11)
  • Dan responds to Monetary Monetary Theory (41:00).  
  • Entitlement programs and government spending. (44:40)

Takeaways

  1. The US federal debt is soaring, with projections showing a large increase in the debt-to-GDP ratio in the coming decades.
  2. Government spending, particularly on entitlement programs, is the primary driver of fiscal imbalance.
  3. Addressing the debt crisis requires significant policy changes, including reforming entitlement programs like Social Security and, to a lesser extent, Medicare and Medicaid.
  4. Reforming Social Security through personal retirement accounts could save trillions over the long run.  
  5. Lessons from other countries show that fiscal discipline and restructuring can improve economic stability.

Links relevant to the conversation

Lumo Coffee promotion

Lumo Coffee Discount: Visit Lumo Coffee (lumocoffee.com) and use code EXPLORED20 for a 20% discount until April 30, 2024.

Transcript: Is Uncle Sam Running a Ponzi Scheme with the National Debt? w/ Dr Dan Mitchell – EP235

N.B. This is a lightly edited version of a transcript originally created using the AI application otter.ai. It may not be 100 percent accurate, but should be pretty close. If you’d like to quote from it, please check the quoted segment in the recording.

Dan Mitchell  00:04

We had this wonderful opportunity back when we had a much stronger fiscal situation and we blew it. And it could very well be in 30 years. As you know, once we’ve hit that iceberg with our fiscal Titanic’s, you know, sort of the, on the tombstone of the American economy will be. It’s a shame that we had the Monica Lewinsky Bill Clinton scandal because it ruined our chance of saving the country.

Gene Tunny  00:37

Welcome to the economics explored podcast, a frank and fearless exploration of important economic issues. I’m your host gene Tunny. I’m a professional economist and former Australian Treasury official. The aim of this show is to help you better understand the big economic issues affecting all our lives. We do this by considering the theory evidence and by hearing a wide range of views. I’m delighted that you can join me for this episode, please check out the show notes for relevant information. Now on to the show. A lot of thanks for tuning into the show. In this episode, I’m delighted to speak once again with one of my favourite economics commentators Dr. Dan Mitchell, co founder and chairman of the Centre for freedom and prosperity. Dan was previously a senior fellow at the Cato Institute. And earlier in his career, he worked as an economist for a US senator and for the Senate Finance Committee. This episode I’m speaking with Dan about his new book, co authored with entrepreneurs Rubin titled The greatest Ponzi scheme on Earth, how the US can avoid economic collapse. It’s about a rapidly growing US federal debt. The US federal debt is over 120% of GDP currently, and according to the Congressional Budget Office, it will reach 181% of GDP in 2053. In this episode, Dan explains the difficult policy choices that will need to be made for the US to get its debt under control. This episode of economics explored is brought to you by Lumo coffee, which has three times the healthy antioxidants of regular coffee. It seriously healthy organic coffee Lumo offers a 20% discount for economics, explore listeners until the 30th of April 2024. Check out the show notes for details. As always, I’d be interested in what you think about what we discussed this episode. Are you concerned about the ever growing US federal debt? Also, please let me know any ideas you have for how I can improve the show. You can find my contact details in the show notes. Right? Oh, we’d better get into it. I hope you enjoy the episode. Dr. Dan Mitchell, welcome back on to the programme.

02:42

Glad to be with you, Jane.

Gene Tunny  02:44

Yes, it’s excellent. Dan, I’ve enjoyed reading your new book with your co author, Liz Rubin, the greatest Ponzi scheme on Earth,

02:55

how the US can avoid economic collapse. To start off with, could

Gene Tunny  03:02

you explain why do you compare the fiscal situation in the US to a Ponzi scheme, please? Well,

Dan Mitchell  03:09

a Ponzi scheme as your listeners and viewers may know or not know, is when you, in fact, get the sucker people into a game where they pay money. And they’re promised that they’ll get their money back because new people will always come into the game. So if you get the game early, you can wind up winning, but all Ponzi schemes ultimately fall apart. Because they’re your pyramid schemes where however you want to describe them, there just aren’t enough new suckers that join the game to keep it going. So the early people get out, and they make a profit. But the vast majority of people wind up losing their money. And when you look at the budgets, by the way, not just in the United States, but in many Western nations with demographics of ageing populations, and poorly designed entitlement programmes. When the US budget and the budget of a lot of other countries, we’re heading toward disaster because government is growing faster than the private sector. And when government grows faster than the private sector sooner or later, that’s going to lead to massive debt increases massive tax increases massive money printing to finance government spending is just a recipe in the long run for some sort of disaster, and then the United States. We’re like the Titanic sailing toward the iceberg. Except we can see the iceberg. We know what’s going to happen. We know it’s going to be bad news, but politicians, they don’t think past the next election cycle, or at least they don’t act like they do. And as a result, it gets worse every year because they keep adding more spending on top of all the spending already in the pipeline.

Gene Tunny  04:48

Yeah. Can we talk about that, please? Dan, is it true that the US it’s running it’s got a baked in budget deficit, hasn’t it? It’s got a structural budget deficit of several percentage points of GDP. And so that means your debt to GDP ratio is going up by several percentage points of GDP every year. And I’m not sure the exact figure, but are you at something like 100? And is it 130% of GDP or something of that order of magnitude at the moment in terms of debt to GDP, we

Dan Mitchell  05:18

have two measures. And this, this confuses a lot of people, we have gross debt as a share of GDP. And then we have public debt as a share of GDP. The public debt as a share of GDP, I think is the more relevant number, because that’s the calculation of how much money the government has borrowed from the private sector. The gross debt includes the money the government owes itself because we have with programmes like our social security system, which is our pension system in the US. When the government was collecting excess payroll tax revenues, the Social Security system would give those payroll tax revenues to the Treasury, the Treasury would issue government bonds, a special type of government bond and the Social Security system, but it was the government taking money out of one pocket and putting an IOU in the other pocket. It’s only a bookkeeping entry. So so a lot of people when they cite that higher number in the range of 130% of GDP, that’s the gross public debt, which is the real public debt, ie the debt held by the public, plus the the amount of money the government owes itself for these phoney trust funds.

Gene Tunny  06:29

Right, so So what is it roughly I mean, you have, I think, what’s good about your book as you you’re careful to you talk about the actual liabilities, there are some there are the ones that are owed to the bondholders. And then there are also these unfunded liabilities. So you talk about this broader range of liabilities as well, I like that, can you? Can you give us a picture of where the US is now and where it’s heading?

Dan Mitchell  06:55

Well, it’ll be a depressing story. As I already said, the most important thing to worry about is that government spending is growing faster than the private sector. And as long as those trend lines are upside down, where government is growing faster than private sector, that ultimately is a recipe, as I said, for massive tax increases, massive debt increases, and government printing money to finance its budget, Allah, Argentina, at least pre President Malay down there. Now, what accounts for our trouble? Why is government growing faster than their private sector? The main thing is the entitlements. And since we were just talking about public debt, government debt, let me try to explain three different calculations. That held by the public, as we already discussed, is the amount that governments borrowed from the private sector to gross public debt includes the money the government owes itself for the phoney trust funds and Social Security and things like that. But then the really scary number are the unfunded liabilities. And that’s just a measure of how much money the government has committed to pay for various entitlement programmes Social Security, Medicare, Medicaid, and since those programmes are the ones growing the fastest, and says the revenues, even though revenues are growing over time, you know, not only a nominal dollar, not only in inflation adjusted dollars, but even as a percentage GDP, the tax take in the United States is scheduled and projected to increase over the next several decades. The problem is government is projected to grow at a much, much faster rate. And these unfunded liabilities. And as you probably know, Jean, you know, a lot depends on what your projections are interest rates, discount rates, all these other things. But we’re talking potentially several 100 trillion dollars, depending again, what what assumptions you have in your model. And what it really boils down to is massive, long run fiscal imbalance in the United States, because government is simply growing much too fast and, and reuse my metaphor, we are heading for that iceberg. We’re in the Titanic. And it’s very frustrating that we have such short sighted politicians in both parties, by the way, where they just say, Oh, who cares? That’s, that’s a problem for someone in the future. Yeah.

Gene Tunny  09:17

And you talk about this concept of a doom loop. Are we is the US in that doom loop already? Or is that something that could happen in the future? If you

Dan Mitchell  09:27

were to ask me to make a guess? I would be on the pessimistic side. I just don’t think that our current political class has enough responsibility. My former George Mason University professor, the Nobel Prize winner, James Buchanan, we came up with the whole public choice school of economics, analysing what are the incentives facing politicians and bureaucrats, things like that. He and other public choice scholars will sometimes talk about the unwritten constitution And for a long time in the United States, there was this sort of expectation, even among politicians, well, we can’t really mess things up too badly. We have to sort of keep government under control. We can’t let debt spiral out of control. We can have massive, massive money printing or excessive taxation. And so that sort of kept things within check. Unfortunately, I just don’t think those constraints exist anymore. In some cases, I think it’s just pure shallow politics. I don’t care about the future. I’m going to buy votes today, try to accumulate power, make my committee more important, whatever their the incentives are, the politicians have. And in some cases, I think you have genuinely deluded people, especially on the left, who think, Oh, well, bigger government is good for the economy. You know, maybe they’re Keynesians, maybe they’re hardcore socialists, but I’m sure some of them are, are sincere in their beliefs, however diluted they are. But I think the main problem is, is that the politicians simply are so short sighted. They care more about their political careers than they do about the best interests of the country. Yeah,

Gene Tunny  11:07

I think I think you’re right there. Unfortunately, it seems to me, my impression is, is that politicians were more, there was more of a bipartisan consensus. I mean, now you don’t have either party that seems to be concerned about it. But back in the 90s, it seemed to be that there was more of a concerted effort by Congress on both sides of the aisle to get things under control. And then that helped Bill Clinton run some budget surpluses in the 90s. So yeah, even Joe Biden’s as a senator was, was very much in involved in these efforts. Am I reading that correctly? Dan?

Dan Mitchell  11:44

I think you’re basically Correct. You had, especially once the Republicans took over Congress in 1994. You know what sometimes it was called the Gingrich revolution, after being in the minority in Congress for What deal 40 years, the Republicans took the house, they took the Senate, it was a massive landslide win. And to give Bill Clinton credit, he didn’t try to fight it, he gave that famous State of the Union address where he said the era of big government is over, there’s over. And it wasn’t just rhetoric, going for a four year period, following the Republican takeover of Congress, government grew by an average in nominal terms of only 2.9% a year. And that was when we went from these massive $200 billion plus deficits. Now, of course, that seems small when we’re talking about reading today. But back then everyone was worried that was some threshold and you’ve crossed over it, you were being very irresponsible. Well, those big deficits turned into budget surpluses within a very short period of time, why government road grew at an average of 2.9% a year. And nominal GDP, of course, was growing much faster than that. And since revenue tends to track nominal GDP, that meant revenue was growing faster. So we had a bigger and bigger private sector, and relatively speaking, a smaller and smaller burden of government spending. Now, we got the budget surplus, but you know, when I think mattered, even more government spending as a share of GDP declined, because as Milton Friedman informed us many decades ago, the burden of government is not how much in taxes, it’s how much it spends. Because whether you you finance that government spending with borrowing with printing money, or with taxing, you’re diverting resources from the productive sector of the economy, so a lot of people in the US are very fixated on reading deficits, and that, Oh, that’s terrible. Well, they are bad. But government spending is the real problem. That’s what we need to get under control. And if we get government under control, make sure that the private sector is growing faster than the government, you’re gonna get rid of reading, you’re maybe not in one year, maybe not two years. And given the magnitude of the problem we face today, it might even take five years or 10 years. But so long as government spending is constrained, you’re eventually going to solve your problems of reading. And but the key thing to understand is government spending is the underlying problem. Red ink is simply a symptom of the problem.

Gene Tunny  14:14

Yeah, one of the strong points you make in the book is that the US Treasury itself, it’s issued warnings about this, hasn’t it? That this current fiscal path is unsustainable. So is this Janet Yellen is treasury. Does that mean that Janet Yellen, the Treasury Secretary knows this problem? And presumably she’s, I mean, you hope she’s telling, you know, Biden, and you know, the people in the West Wing about this. So where does the what’s going wrong? Is it in Congress? Is it the fact that it’s all just politically too hard that you’ve got these entitlements baked into the system? Well, what’s going on? What’s going wrong?

Dan Mitchell  14:52

I don’t know what Janet Yellen, the Treasury Secretary tells Joe Biden or for that matter, the Director of the Office of Management Budget, theoretically in charge of the spending side of budget, but whatever they’re telling him, Joe Biden’s budgets are terrible. He does have massive tax increases. And some people say, Oh, look, he’s serious about the deficit. He wants to raise taxes. But he’s always proposing massive spending increases. And of course, what do we know about tax increases, they never generate as much revenue as the politicians think because people change their behaviour. But also, whenever there’s an expectation of higher revenue in Washington, politicians can’t resist increasing spending. So Biden’s budgets were ever enacted. I would bet dollars to donuts that we would have more brand A we would have higher deficits, for those two reasons. So I don’t think you and again, is it Biden’s fault? Is it is it his appointees fault? Who knows who cares? The the key thing to understand is, he has terrible fiscal policy. He seems to be captured by sort of the Bernie Sanders Elizabeth Warren wing of the Democratic Party. And frankly, there really isn’t a bill clinton wing of the Democratic Party anymore. That’s that’s the problem. So, you know, Joe Biden, when he was a senator went along with Bill Clinton’s more free market economic agenda in the 1990s. But now, Joe Biden is doing the Elizabeth Warren Bernie Sanders agenda. And unfortunately, you know, Republicans have sort of lost that that old Tea Party zeal for fiscal responsibility and spending restraint. And that makes it very depressing for people like me, who work on fiscal policy in Washington.

Gene Tunny  16:35

Yes, yes. In terms of what can be done about it. So I had a guest on a couple of weeks ago, Michael Johnston is a in the in the finance industry. And he’s and he’s had a look at it. And you know, he’s we talked about the retirement age, we talked about the contributions, changes to the payroll tax contributions. We talked about, you know, different options for reforming Social Security. And you cover those in your book, many, I think, similar ones, but you’ve got a transition plan, which I think is really interesting, because there’s this recognition that the trust fund is exhausted to the or what happens is that when they run out of those IOUs, that the Treasury put in there, I mean, the cash went a long time ago. But when you get to a certain point, and then they have to cut benefits, don’t they? There’s a there’s a point in 2033, or whatever it is, but you’ve got a plan for improving that or getting out of that situation fixing up social security over I think it’s a 20 year period. Can you explain that plan, please, Dan,

Dan Mitchell  17:46

the problem we have with Social Security is that the spending and the programme is growing much faster than the revenues going into the programme. And as a result, this mythical trust fund is being depleted, the IOUs are being cashed in, which simply means the Treasury’s borrowing more money. But the trust fund, you know, as funny as it is, it’s still an important bookkeeping entry. And that’s going to run out in the early half of the first half of next decade. And then, technically, under the law, there’ll be an automatic cut and benefits for senior citizens of more than 20%. Now, will politicians allow that to happen? Probably not, you know, they could pass a lot tomorrow and add five zeros to every IOU in the trust fund. And on paper, that would solve the problem. But of course, it would only solved the problems by having Uncle Sam just issue hundreds and hundreds and hundreds of billions of dollars, and eventually trillions and trillions of dollars of new debt. So given the ageing of our population, and given the fact that Social Security is so poorly designed, in the book, less Reuben and I proposed to, in effect, do something similar to what you guys have in Australia, have a system of personal retirement accounts based on real savings. Now, you guys sort of just adopted it out of nothing. We have this giant unfunded liability and poorly designed Social Security system. And so our challenge is going to be entirely different. Because if we allow younger workers to start, in effect, shifting their payroll taxes into personal retirement accounts, how are we going to pay the benefits to current retirees, or to workers who are too old to benefit from a new system? And that’s what’s called the transition cost. And the transition costs, frankly, will be enormous. You’re talking 10s of trillions of dollars over the next 20 years. And some people say, Oh, my God, we can’t do that. 10s of trillions of dollars when we already have this giant amount of government debt. Well, here’s the here’s the most important thing to understand the unfunded liability. The cash flow deficit of The Social Security system over the next 75 years, and inflation adjusted dollars is more than $60 trillion. So here’s the choice, we have in the US two choices, to keep the current system going with a giant $60 trillion plus cash flow deficit, or transition to a system of personal retirement accounts, which $20 trillion or more of transition costs. Now, I don’t like having to make that choice. But if I’m going to have to make a choice, I’d rather have a $20 trillion problem to deal with than a $60 trillion problem to deal with. And then at the end of the day, wouldn’t it be great to have a retirement system based on private savings, rather than a government retirement system that’s untrustworthy, that’s based on taxes and debt. So I think Australia, not just Australia, Switzerland, Netherlands, Sweden, Chile, you know, there are several dozen countries around the world that now have much stronger and retirement systems that are better for national economies, but retirement systems that also are better for individual workers. So that’s a giant challenge for the United States. We almost did it, by the way, during the Clinton years. And that’s what’s so tragic. rebill Clinton was on board, he understood the issue, Republicans and Congress understood the issue. But then we got that whole impeachment thing, and Bill Clinton had to move to the left to shore up the Democratic base. And as a result, we had this wonderful opportunity back when we had a much stronger fiscal situation, and we blew it. And it could very well be in 30 years. As you know, once we’ve hit that iceberg with our fiscal Titanic’s sort of the, the tombstone of the American economy will be it’s a shame that we had the Monica Lewinsky Bill Clinton scandal because it ruined our chance of saving the country. Right? Yeah, yeah. Yeah, that’s

Gene Tunny  22:02

a that’s a good political observation there. Dan. I think that a lot of the maybe a lot of the craziness does date from from that episode. That was an extraordinary of a so now, what about Medicare? I mean, one of the other issues is Medicare and Medicaid, do you have recommendations for those programmes to

Dan Mitchell  22:25

the good news about Medicare and Medicaid is that those problems are much easier to deal with and Social Security. With Medicaid. That’s the easiest one of all because, and that, by the way, for your your listeners and viewers outside of the United States, Medicaid is the federal government’s programme, to provide health care to poor people. And what we should do to that programme is what we did under Bill Clinton with welfare reform in the 1990s. Simply take the programme, block, grant it and turn it over to the states. And then the states would then have full flexibility to innovate and experiment, figure out the best way and most cost efficient way of providing health care to low income people, and that work fantastically with welfare reform. We reduce poverty, we reduce child poverty, we increase labour force participation among low income people. So let’s learn from that success and fix the Medicaid programme. Wonderful, simple choice. We actually almost did it during the Trump years. I mean, Trump was very irresponsible in many areas on government spending. But Congress came within one vote in the Senate from making that reform is another one of these tragic things of history, that, that we didn’t take that opportunity. But maybe it can happen in the next four years, because that’s an issue where we’re, I think Trump is open to doing the right thing. Now let’s shift to Medicare. Now, Joe Biden has said no changes to Medicare, that’s irresponsible. Donald Trump has said no changes to Medicare, that’s fiscally irresponsible. So it’s very hard for me to be optimistic about anything happening on this programme in the next few years. But let’s explain what should be done. And again, for your overseas listeners and viewers. Medicare is the federal government’s programme to provide health care for old people, Medicaid, health care for poor people, Medicare, health care for old people. I’m on Medicare, because I’m 65. So you have to sign up. So I know I’m part of the problem now. But the simple way to solve that, and by the way, Republicans back during the Tea Party era, in the early part of last decade, they had budgets, the Paul Ryan budgets that fix both Medicare and Medicaid and what they did with Medicare at the end of that they looked at the Health Care programme for federal government workers for the Federal Employees Health Benefits programme. And in effect, what it does is it tells federal bureaucrats, here are your choices and health plans. You pick the one that that best serves you the federal gov reds can provide a certain amount of support to premium support. So we subsidise the plans, but you pick the plan that you want. Well, let’s do the same thing with senior citizens. Give everyone this sort of voucher if you want to call it that, and then let them pick from from a range of approved plans. And then of course, if you limit how fast the premium support grows, you could wind up saving trillions and trillions of dollars over time. Just like with the Medicaid block grant, you can save trillions and trillions of dollars over time, so long as you keep the growth of either the block grant or the premium support from growing slower than the private sector. So fixing Medicare and Medicaid shouldn’t be that difficult, not nearly as big of a fiscal challenge as fixing Social Security. But of course, it will be a political challenge, because we saw back when Paul Ryan was trying to fix these programmes. last decade, you had you had folks on the left running campaign commercials of a Paul Ryan look like pushing a grandmother off a cliff. It gives you an idea of the kind of silly demagoguery we get in US elections. But the good news is Republicans several years in a row during the Tea Party era, they were passing budgets that presumed Medicaid and Medicare reform. Now, Bill Clinton was in the White House, obviously, these programmes died in Congress because they couldn’t get any farther than that. But if Republicans can sort of rediscovered that Ronald Reagan, Tea Party type spirit of fiscal responsibility, I think there is a chance maybe not with Trump in the White House. But at some point, you know, I think there’ll be a Reagan type conservative in the White House. And those programmes can and should and must be fixed. We discuss that in the book we explain, you know, we don’t go into great details, we don’t want to bore just the average reader. The whole purpose of the book is to explain and common sense language with lots of facts, but not bearing people with jargon and stuff like that. Here is our problem. Here’s the direction we’re going that direction is going to be a disaster. But if we make these reforms, we can we can make America much more prosperous.

Gene Tunny  27:19

Okay, we’ll take a short break here for a word from our sponsor.

Female speaker  27:24

If you need to crunch the numbers, then get in touch with adept economics. We offer you Frank and fearless economic analysis and advice. We can help you with funding submissions, cost benefit analysis studies, and economic modelling of all sorts. Our head office is in Brisbane, Australia, but we work all over the world. You can get in touch via our website, www dot adapt economics.com.au. We’d love to hear from you.

Gene Tunny  27:53

Now back to the show. Okay, and what about defence, Stan? So there’s a you know, reasonably widespread view that I mean, the Pentagon waste money? I mean, I think that’s undeniable. It’s failed six or seven audits. There are concerns about unnecessary, costly military adventures abroad. 7 trillion or whatever. There’s all of these astronomical estimates for what the, you know, Iraq, Afghanistan, Syria has cost the US and will continue to cost in the future. Is there anything that should be done about defence in your view?

Dan Mitchell  28:34

I’m sure there must be hundreds of billions of dollars of waste, and the Pentagon, but we focused in the book, what are the long term drivers of our fiscal problems, and it’s, it’s not the defence budget, the defence budget has, has keeps coming down as a percentage of the budget over time. Or if you measure the defence budget as a share of GDP, it’s come down. Obviously, we don’t want to waste money anywhere, even if it’s not the driving force and driving problem in the budget. But defence is not the issue. Now. That doesn’t mean we should do costly nation building exercises in the Middle East. But on the other hand, I’m not enough defence foreign policy expert. But given what Russia is doing, and given China’s sabre rattling in the South China Sea and stuff like that, I’m not sure I would want to radically slashed the defence budget, I would probably want to reorganise it. So we’re more focused on being able to protect America’s national interest. But but that’s separate from I guess, a fiscal debate. Again, fiscal fiscally speaking, the defence budget is is just a tiny fraction of our problem. And that’s even part of the problem at all.

Gene Tunny  29:47

Right? Because it’s these, these entitlement programmes where you’ve got that fundamental problem of the spending ghetto, getting away from any revenue that’s coming into town, you know, to fund them. So yeah. And take that point. Right, and why isn’t higher? I mean, I think you make a good a good case for why this is a spending problem. It’s not a just a low tax problem. Can you explain why you wouldn’t want? The government has to address this fiscal gap through higher taxes? Please, Dan?

Dan Mitchell  30:22

Well, I guess there are two things that are important to understand. The Congressional Budget Office every year publishes a long run forecast. And by long run, they’re looking out 30 years, they published his long run forecast of the US economy. And in that document, the most recent one came out just last month, I think it was maybe two months ago. But it showed that revenues are above their long run average. Spending is also above the long run average. And if you look at the forecast, 30 years out, the revenue burden is going to climb to record levels, because mostly because of real bracket creep. In other words, as you know, even in a sluggish growth economy, you know, people are going to sort of their incomes are going to increase, they’re gonna go into higher tax brackets. So the government winds up getting bonus tax payments, with even modest levels of economic growth. So the tax burden is heading to be at an all time high. But because government spending is projected to grow much faster than the private sector, it means that, that we’re falling farther and farther behind. So just as a matter of pure math, our problem is more than 100%. on the spending side of the budget. Again, revenue is climbing as a share of GDP. But because spending is climbing much, much faster. Why on earth would we want to increase taxes on the American people for a problem that is more than 100%? on the spending side of the budget. But that’s just the math argument. Now, let’s look at what I call the public choice slash economic issue, which is that if you put taxes on the table, what are politicians going to do, they’re going to increase spending. And not only that, if they get the taxes throw, the economy’s gonna suffer. Now, I’m never one to say, Oh, you raised this tax or that tax, there’s going to be a recession, I worry more about if you raise this texture, that tax, the long run growth rate will decline. And even if it only declines a small amount, maybe two tenths of 1%, a year that has massive long run implications because of the wedge effect over time. And then, and I think that even left wing economists, the honest ones are going to admit that higher marginal tax rates on work saving and investing are not good for growth. So as GDP gets smaller and smaller over time, at least in terms of compared to some baseline projection, that means foregone tax revenue, because there’s less national income to tax. So what’s the bottom line, politicians will spend more money because of the higher taxes and the higher taxes won’t generate as much revenue? And you don’t want to know what the most powerful evidence for this is? I think I get the data for the, for the 15 countries of the old European Union, in other words, the core Western European countries that would be most analogous to the United States or, for that matter, Australia, relatively rich by world standards, Western oriented nations. And what did I show in the European Union, you go back and I did a five year average. So nobody could accuse me of cherry picking just one year that was favourable to my analysis. I did a five year average for the last half of the 1960s. And I looked at government spending as a share of GDP, taxes of the share of GDP, and government debt as a share of GDP, and taxes between the end of the 1960s. And the most recent five years, the tax burden in Western Europe increased by 10 percentage points of GDP. Now, politicians in Western Europe and these various countries Germany, France, Belgium, Netherlands, etc, etc. They said, Well, we have to raise taxes, because we have red ink, we have deficits and debt. So I said, Okay, taxes went up by an enormous amount as a share of GDP between the late 60s and today. What happened to government debt, they use this massive increase in the tax burden to lower government debt, no government debt during that period, doubled as a share of GDP. In other words, politicians spend every single penny of that new revenue plus some. So when I debate some of my left wing friends, I tell them, show me an example. Anywhere in the world, where we’re giving politicians more money to spend has resulted in better long run fiscal performance. It just doesn’t happen. By contrast, I’ve gone through the IMS World Economic Outlook Database, and I found not a lot unfortunately, but I found many examples of countries that for multi year periods had government spending growing at 2%? a year or less? And what do you find, in those cases when they’re spending restraint. And we talked about this, by the way, we have an entire chapter in the book, where I cite some of these good examples. When you have spending restraint. Deficits go down the burden of government spending, as a share of GDP goes down, you have success. Yeah, I couldn’t, we could add some blank pages in the book, and lift and title that chapter success stories of higher taxes, because there wouldn’t be anything to write.

Gene Tunny  35:32

Very good. And you saw it studies by OECD and IMF, I think that do establish that empirical link between taxes and growth and negative link. If you have a higher tax to GDP, you have a lower economic growth rate. If I’m if I remember correctly, you cite some of those studies. So I can put links in there.

Dan Mitchell  35:53

It is remarkable that the OECD and then the IMF, by and large are sort of, I don’t know whether you’d call them left leaning bureaucracies, but drug pushers controlled by government bureaucrats who respond to their political paymasters in Washington and Berlin and Brussels and Paris. And so you get a lot of bad advice from the IMF and the OECD. But both of those international bureaucracies have economics departments that do working papers and studies. And even though these studies don’t get a lot of attention, I look at them. And it’s remarkable how often those studies point to the fact that spending restraint, and low tax rates are good for growth, while at the same time to political appointees at the IMF and the OECD. They go around the world saying government should raise taxes and increase spending. So I’m not a fan of international bureaucracies. He has the leadership of the International bureaucracies. They respond to pressure from national capitals around the world. And unfortunately, when you have Joe Biden, and the US and your Sunak, in the United Kingdom, might as well be a Labour Party, Prime Minister, and then of course, he macarons No, good. Schultz. I mean, we just have so many bad left wing governments and the major countries of the world that you wind up with the OECD and the IMF responding to their pressure to give bad advice, even though many of the economists that work at those bureaucracies, publish papers that have findings that that good economists would agree with.

Gene Tunny  37:22

Yeah, yeah. Yeah, they’re not motivated by the politics. They just want to do the the analysis, crunch the numbers and come up with credible findings. So absolutely. Dan, before we wrap up, I’d like to play you a clip, which I think is it’s representative of all the the opposite view to yours. And, and in a way, it’s almost like when I listened to it yesterday, I thought is this Kyle Kolinsky actually talking about Dan, but I think he’s just thinking generally about other, you know, economists and what economists are not and what I think mainstream economists think about the dead. I don’t think this is necessarily a libertarian economist view. So I want to play this and then get your reactions to it because it’s, it’s quite a quite a fascinating clip.

Kyle Kulinski  38:11

Your line of attack against both Trump and Biden is the debt. That’s the first thing you list the existential issue of the debt. Okay, let’s be clear, guys, that is simply a right wing argument. That’s like the libertarian economics types, the Austrian economics types. The idea that, you know, the nation’s debt is you should conceptualise it the same as household debt. Like if you have household debt, you only have a choice, you kind of have to pay it off. Like you have to. It appears like RFK has no idea how the national debt functions, especially when you have a sovereign currency. He should read up not only on Keynesianism, but on modern monetary theory, because all this debt and deficit fear mongering, I just need to understand this. It’s the dumbest shit of all time. It’s just the dumbest shit of all time. Just just to give one example, Japan has had a lot of debt for a long time. And even their debt to GDP ratio was kind of out of whack. And a lot of like, right wing wall street types have been predicting forever, a debt crisis that’s going to hit Japan. And it never comes. They’ve been saying it since like the 1990s. That that’s gonna happen. It never comes. Why? Because they fundamentally misunderstand what the national debt is, what it means to run a deficit, how that impacts the economy. Here’s a fact that a lot of people don’t know. Did you know that public debts lead to private growth? Right. So from that perspective, you might even say in many instances, public debt is a good it’s just a good thing. Not it’s a bad thing. We got to fear it. You know, this is bad and wrong, and we need to reverse it and we need to Make sure we cut it. No. In some instances, it’s a good thing. Like there are very positive outcomes that come from public debt. And again, I don’t, I don’t think he understands it, that public debt means private surpluses. That is like, that’s the lifeblood, certainly of a capitalist economic system.

Gene Tunny  40:21

Right. So that was Carl Kolinsky, who’s a very prominent progressive commentator in the, the US and he was responding to something RFK Jr. said, he told Erin Burnett on CNN, regarding how he sees the dead as an accident, an existential threat to the US. And he’s worried that neither Biden nor Trump are actually that concerned about it, or will will do anything about it. So Dan, do you have any thoughts on I mean, that particular viewpoint, I’d be interested in your reactions to that because it is it does seem to be a common view among, among many people out there.

Dan Mitchell  41:00

But I never thought I would agree with RFK, Jr. on something, but he is right about Trump and Biden. They don’t care about that. But I would change the focus. My concern with Trump and Biden is that they don’t care about the growth of government. And as we’ve already talked about, Jean, that growth of government is the problem. The growth of debt is a symptom of the problem. Now, there’s no question that, that a lot of people who do fixate on the debt, have pointed to Japan and said, Oh, this, this is not going to end well. And, and I think those people are right, but it’s always a danger to imply that crisis will happen overnight. Now, having said that, let’s Ruben and I, at the start of our book, we give a little story. We say imagine that you’re Greek, and that you’re living in Greece in the mid 2000s. And everything seems great. You’re now part of the euro, your interest rates have come down, your economy is growing 4% a year. And sure there are some people complaining, well, wait, our demographics aren’t friendly, and our government debt is too high and government’s growing too fast. But you don’t care as a great citizen, because the government’s giving you lots of benefits. And it seems like the economy is just fine. And you think, oh, this person is just, you know, crying wolf. Well, guess what, within five years, your economies and one of the most massive, severe economic downturns that we’ve seen in the modern history of the Western world, and then, you know, their living standards dropped by 25%. In Greece, it was a horrible wrenching experience, because they got to the point where what happened were investors didn’t trust the Greek government. Now, we’re used to that with third world countries or developing countries, I guess we don’t use third world anymore. Why? Why has Argentina defaulted so many times because at least before President Malay, they’ve had all these Coronas governments that would spend money, borrow money, print, print money to finance their budgets. And then they got to a point where international investors said, I’m not gonna buy any bonds from that, from that government. That’s when you have a fiscal crisis, when investors no longer trust your government to pay back the bonds when they borrow money. Now, is Japan going to hit that? That that that crisis point? I think at some point, they probably will, because their demographics are really challenging. They have the entitlement problems, and government debt is more than 20% of GDP. And now, yes, they got the Japanese government has certain regulations, that sort of forces, a lot of private savings into buying government bonds. But at some point, you have to wonder they’re gonna run out of time. And I think the same thing will happen to the United States if we don’t get control of government spending. So I disagree with the gentleman whose clip that you played. I think that government debt is a troubling symptom of a bigger problem of government growing too fast. And I think Greece isn’t is a real world. Not that far ago, example of how that won’t end well. And yes, the US is the world’s reserve currency. We can print a bunch of money. But the mere fact that that guy was citing modern, modern monetary theory, the biggest crank theory that you could possibly imagine that you can sum up print your way to prosperity if that was true. Why isn’t Venezuela the most prosperous country on the planet? So I don’t know what that guy was smoking but that must be really fun.

Gene Tunny  44:40

Yeah, but look, it is. It is actually a an increasingly common view among particularly younger younger people. So I think it’s it’s interesting, he’s very influential on in those progressive circles in the state so that I get your reaction from that. Okay to that Okay, Dan, this has been terrific go. Yeah, I really enjoyed your book, I’m really gonna recommend it. I’ll put a link in the show notes. I learned a lot I learned about, you know, exactly what’s happening with Social Security in this days for the trust fund. That’s fascinating how it’s full of IOUs, how there’s going to be this, this critical point in in 2032, or 33. And I chatted about that with Michael Johnston as well, that will, hopefully for some type of action is not just some sort of, you know, putting in a couple of zeros, as you suggest that they could do, they could just say, Oh, look, all is good. We’ll just give you some, you know, pretend you’ve got more money in that trust fund. Let’s say they actually do something about that. And also liked you cite Switzerland as an exemplar of a of a, of a country that appears to be doing things really well. And in federal, the federalism there, the Federation could help because there’s the cantons compete with each other. They don’t want to have high taxes, they want to attract people. So I think that’s a good example. So yeah, definitely learned a lot from the book. Is there anything you’d like to say before we wrap this up, please, Dan?

Dan Mitchell  46:09

Well, of course, I recommend that people buy the book. I suspect, given that it’s a wonky topic, we’ll never sell enough that we get any royalties to speak of. So I want people to buy the book, not to not to put money in my pockets. But to understand what our problem is. Government is growing too fast. We have so many real world examples of countries that have done good things and bad things in the book. We have very accessible, easy to understand explanations of what’s wrong with our entitlement programmes, to solutions to fix those problems. And all I know is that I don’t want to be that Greek citizen in 2005, who 10 years later, was suffering through a deep, deep economic downturn because my politicians never got spending under control.

Gene Tunny  46:58

Yeah, yeah. Very good point. Okay, Dan Mitchell. This has been great. Thanks so much for appearing on the show. I’ve really enjoyed it.

Dan Mitchell  47:05

Well, thanks, Lucky. Thanks for having me on.

Gene Tunny  47:09

rato, thanks for listening to this episode of economics explored. If you have any questions, comments or suggestions, please get in touch. I’d love to hear from you. You can send me an email via contact at economics explore.com, or a voicemail via SpeakPipe. You can find the link in the show notes. If you’ve enjoyed the show, I’d be grateful if you could tell anyone you think would be interested about it. Word of mouth is one of the main ways that people learn about the show. Finally, if your podcasting app lets you then please write a review and leave a rating. Thanks for listening. I hope you can join me again next week.

47:56

Thank you for listening. We hope you enjoyed the episode. For more content like this or to begin your own podcasting journey. Head on over to obsidian dash productions.com

Credits

Thanks to Obsidian Productions for mixing the episode and to the show’s sponsor, Gene’s consultancy business, www.adepteconomics.com.au. Full transcripts are available a few days after the episode is first published at www.economicsexplored.com. Economics Explored is available via Apple PodcastsGoogle Podcast, and other podcasting platforms.

Categories
Podcast episode

What’s the Future for Charter Cities after the Honduras ZEDE controversy? w/ Jeffrey Mason, Charter Cities Institute  – EP234

In this episode, we delve into the controversy surrounding the Prospera charter city in Honduras, which has embraced libertarian principles and adopted Bitcoin as legal tender and a unit of account. The city is currently embroiled in a legal battle with the Honduran government. Gene asks Jeffrey Mason, from Charter Cities Institute, what it all means for the future of charter cities. Jeffrey provides some good examples of how charter cities still have a lot of potential, and he talks about projects CCI is involved in in Africa, particularly in Zanzibar. Tune in to gain insights into the intersection of governance, economics, and innovation in the context of charter cities.

Please contact us with any questions, comments and suggestions by emailing us at contact@economicsexplored.com or sending a voice message via https://www.speakpipe.com/economicsexplored

You can listen to the episode via the embedded player below or via podcasting apps including Google PodcastsApple Podcast and Spotify.

About this episode’s guest: Jeffrey Mason, Head of Research, Charter Cities Institute 

Jeffrey joined CCI as a Researcher in 2019. His research interests include urban economics, structural transformation, special economic zones, and technology ecosystems. He has worked on policy advisory projects in Nigeria, Tanzania, Zambia, and Honduras, among other countries. Prior to joining the Charter Cities Institute, Jeffrey worked as an MA Fellow at the Mercatus Center at George Mason University. He holds a BA in economics from the University of Maryland and an MA in economics from George Mason University. His writing has been featured in publications including City Journal, Works in Progress, Investment Monitor, Quartz Africa, and The American Mind.

What’s covered in EP234

  • Introduction. (0:00)
  • Honduran ZEDEs: zones for employment and economic development. (4:12)
  • Honduran ZEDEs and impacts on local communities. (9:41)
  • Investor-state dispute settlement mechanisms. (15:15)
  • Charter cities and their potential to improve governance and economic growth. (20:37)
  • Charter cities and urban development in Zanzibar. (26:15)
  • Affordable housing development in Zanzibar, Tanzania. (30:56)
  • Urban development and new city projects. (39:27)

Takeaways

  1. The controversy surrounding Prospera in Honduras highlights the risks and uncertainties involved in charter city projects.
  2. The concept of charter cities is evolving, with a growing emphasis on affordability, local engagement, and sustainable development to ensure their long-term success.
  3. Legal and political stability, along with government partnerships, are crucial for the success of charter cities, as demonstrated by the contrasting experiences of Prospera and the Zanzibar project, Fumba Town, that Charter Cities Institute is involved in.

Links relevant to the conversation

Lumo Coffee promotion

Lumo Coffee Discount: Visit Lumo Coffee (lumocoffee.com) and use code EXPLORED20 for a 20% discount until April 30, 2024.

Transcript: What’s the Future for Charter Cities after the Honduras ZEDE controversy? w/ Jeffrey Mason, Charter Cities Institute  – EP234

N.B. This is a lightly edited version of a transcript originally created using the AI application otter.ai. It may not be 100 percent accurate, but should be pretty close. If you’d like to quote from it, please check the quoted segment in the recording.

Jeff Mason  00:03

When you’re not adding in that governance component, right, it’s essentially it’s a real estate project. And that’s, you know, that’s all well and fine. But if you’re going to be doing a large scale, something that is truly city scale that’s going to be home to 10s, or hundreds of 1000s, or, or maybe even millions. And when that the grandest scale, it actually makes a lot of sense to pair that type of development with some sort of effort to improve governance.

Gene Tunny  00:35

Welcome to the economics explored podcast, a frank and fearless exploration of important economic issues. I’m your host gene Tunny. I’m a professional economist and former Australian Treasury official. The aim of this show is to help you better understand the big economic issues affecting all our lives. We do this by considering the theory evidence and by hearing a wide range of views. I’m delighted that you can join me for this episode, please check out the show notes for relevant information. Now on to the show. Hello, thanks for tuning into the show. One story that’s caught my attention recently is the controversy over the Prospera charter city in Honduras. It was inspired by libertarian principles and is adopted Bitcoin as legal tender and as a unit of account, but it’s in a big legal dispute with the current Honduran government. I was alerted to this by a report from Ryan Grim at the intercept on juris ratchets up battle with crypto libertarian investors, rejects World Bank caught me talked about this story on his counterpoints YouTube show. It’s a crazy story and I wanted to talk with someone knowledgeable about it. So I reached out to the charter cities Institute. I’ve previously spoken with the head of CCI Curtis Lockhart, and I’m grateful that he recommended I speak with his colleague Jeffrey Mason. Jeff is Head of Research at the charter cities Institute and he really helped clarify the issues for me. Is the Honduran charter city an exceptional case? Or is there a fundamental problem with the charter city model? Jeff helped me figure out what’s going on. And he reminded me that the charter cities Institute is doing things differently. And he talks about a fascinating development on Zanzibar that it’s involved with. There are some more details on CCI as approach to charter cities in the episode that I recorded with Curtis lockout two years ago. So I’ll put a link to that in the show notes, so you can check it out if you’re interested. This episode of economics explored is brought to you by Lumo coffee, which is three times the healthy antioxidants of regular coffee. It’s seriously healthy, organic coffee, where my coffee offers a 20% discount for economics explore listeners until the 30th of April 2020. For details are in the show notes. Right, I would better get into it. I hope you enjoy the episode. Jeffrey Mason from charter cities Institute, welcome to the programme.

Jeff Mason  03:06

Adrian, thanks for having me.

Gene Tunny  03:08

It’s a pleasure. It’s good to reconnect with the charter cities Institute because I had Curtis Lockhart on the show a couple of years ago to talk about charter cities. And it’s certainly been of of interest to me for quite a while that the whole idea of I mean, initially they’ll talk there was talk about special economic zones. And there’s this concept of charter cities came about. And I was reminded of it recently because this has been really crazy news story in Honduras about these so called crypto libertarian investors who have been suing the Honduran government for removing the legislative underpinnings of, of I think it’s Prospera, is it the charter city? That’s on an island in Honduras? And yeah, it’s just as really bizarre story. Are you older? What’s your take? Jeffrey, on what actually went wrong in Honduras?

Jeff Mason  04:12

Sure. It’s yeah, it’s a little a little messy, a little complicated. So maybe a little bit of backstory is probably in order. Some of your listeners may know this story, be familiar with with prosper, and some of the other day some, some may not. So back in the late 2000, around 2009 ish. Paul Romer, who had who was sort of the original guy who came up with the idea of charter cities, he connected with some folks in the Honduran government who had sort of independently been interested in some similar ideas. And they came together passed a law in Honduras that would have essentially created charter cities. That law was repealed because of some some constitutional concerns and then later a new law that rectified some of those concerns was was put through due to some sort of disputes Rome or departed. And then there was sort of some some constitutional disputes about Supreme Court rulings on that law and the previous public government that did come to power and pushed out the other one. Right. It’s it’s it’s kind of messy, but the law as of like 2012 2013. authorising Zetas zones for economic development and employment are in place. A few years went by with not much happening. The government hadn’t hadn’t really taken action to sort of appoint the necessary people to the oversight body. And then I believe 2019 What would become prosperous? Was was established as the first of what is now three Zetas. So prosper, as as some folks may know, it’s on the island of Roatan on the Caribbean side of Honduras. And it’s being developed as this jurisdiction sort of focused on emerging technologies, biomedical innovation, crypto and financial services, and has some really interesting and really novel approaches to governance, in terms of how folks who choose to live or do business there, can sort of select how they’re given options about how they’re regulated. And it’s a really sort of fascinating project, just sort of looking at pushing the frontier of governance. There’s a second set A, that folks, some folks may be familiar with it, it’s not quite as high profile called ciudad and what is on so this one is on the mainland, near the cities of Jalama, in San Pedro Sula, kind of in Honduras is main manufacturing region. So this one is sort of focused on creating very affordable housing, and good jobs in light industry, logistics, manufacturing, that sort of thing. And then there’s a third in the south of the country that’s focused on agriculture, agro processing, greenhouse agriculture, that sort of thing. And so in the last few years, the government’s change change parties, and the government came in was was very, very opposed to the that regime, and had been critical of it of it for years. And so when they came into power, you know, Goal, goal number one for them was was to rollback because that is. And so what they ended up doing was, they eventually pass a repeal of the xFA law. But for it to sort of be fully completed, it needed to be not just passed, but also ratified. And within the sort of legislative calendar of when the initial repeal went through. The repeal was never ratified. So we ended up in this weird sort of legal limbo, where the government is trying to repeal the law, but it’s not quite repealed. And even though the way they’re going about it, is being argued by prosper and others, that it’s in violation of some of these different trade treaties and other things that would have essentially locked the law in place. Even if you wanted to go ahead with the repeal, there would be this sort of much longer, sort of off ramp period and certain sort of investor rights guaranteed and this sort of thing. And so now prosper is suing the government of Honduras and international arbitration for damages. Or they’ve either secured or, or have pledged over $100 million in investment. So that’s that’s obviously quite a big deal. That’s sort of been disrupted. And so now prosper is seeking damages from the Honduran governments. And then earlier this year, as that has sort of developed, the government of Honduras has now said they are going to pull out of the investor state dispute settlement process that’s run by the Royal Bank. So so quite quite a messy tumultuous couple of years, but but the Zetas as they exist now, you know, under quite some some hardship, obviously, for the for the time being, they are continuing, right.

Gene Tunny  09:33

So the zeros themselves are continuing, is that the actual zone so they’re still operational? Right. Okay.

Jeff Mason  09:39

They’re still they’re still doing business. Right. Okay. So

Gene Tunny  09:41

there are a couple of things you’re interested in, following up here. So you’ve got this change of government, and is it the case that it will assist you president is it Castro and was it she just the shoes of the left so as she objected into the Zed A’s because it’s against her government’s general economic philosophy? Or is it because of concerns about impacts on indigenous people? I recall that the United Nations or I saw that the United Nations had some things to say about potential impacts on indigenous communities. Do you know what the what was the problem that the government had with the Zed A’s? Sure.

Jeff Mason  10:23

So there’s, there’s a couple pieces to it. One, I think it is, is partly political, and sort of a matter of philosophy and right, how they, how they feel about free markets and those kinds of things. The concerns about indigenous groups have been raised since the 70s, first came into existence. But to my knowledge, nothing in terms of those groups, or their land or anything like that has has ever actually been sort of touched by by any other three days in any way. And then it also just goes back, I think, to the essentially coup in 2009, that pushed out that party’s previous presidents and sort of long standing issues with the president who who wasn’t charged who had originally champion this that a regime who, right ended up being extradited to the US related to drug trafficking. So there’s, there’s a, there’s a political there’s, there’s a, you know, philosophical difference. And then there’s also some of the politics of it as well. Right.

Gene Tunny  11:32

And so from the government’s perspective, so if I’m sitting in the finance ministry, in Honduras, what am I seeing, am I seeing we’ve got this special economic zone, or Zed A, and we’ve got these foreign coal corporations operating there. And they’re generating income, but we’re not able to tax them, or are there any subsidies? What’s the deal? What the financial arrangements are? What how does it? You know, what’s the what’s the finance ministry seen in Honduras?

Jeff Mason  12:04

Sure. So in that regard, it’s it’s there’s there is a it’s a fairly disconnected system in the sense that these entities are kind of able to do what they want. And in terms of of generating revenue, I think there are there are some some guidelines about about, you know, taxes and that sort of thing. But But generally, they’re they’re kind of able to do what they want. In terms of policy, and there’s not much in the way of it’s not like maybe sort of your what you might think of traditionally with an SEC, where maybe the industrial zone collects some sort of revenues, and they’re sort of a stream of, of transfers. Back to the government. I think the in the case of this, that is I think the sort of more macro level impact is is just more about the economic effect that they can bring to the regions that are located and that’ll have some, some knock on effects. Right.

Gene Tunny  13:04

Okay. But, I mean, so they’ve, they’re pulled out the underpinning, or they’ve ended the legislative support for these days. So they don’t want this to get in, continue. So they want to regulate these areas as if they’re part of Honduras. So they don’t see to them. They don’t think these this Zedd a or these days creating the economic benefits that were originally suggested for them. Do you have any views on that? I mean, is it? How has that? How has prospera performed? Has it lived up to expectations? Sure.

Jeff Mason  13:41

So in terms of prosper? I know there’s I don’t know how much of that right 100 million investment has been fully invested. Right. I know, they actually there are buildings and then properties under construction, there are a number of companies that are registered, operated, doing business there, I think most of those are sort of in the in the FinTech space, or the biotech space. And they, I don’t know, exact numbers of residents, but there is, you know, an active active community there. I know with Verizon, for example. I think especially colleagues were there in the past month, there’s upwards of maybe 100 200 families or people living there something like that. So some employment, some people living there. And I know there’s like I said, the greenhouse and that type of thing, those types of operations and the other and from what I understand locals who are working there have been quite defensive about it. In the sense of, you know, please these are these are good jobs we didn’t have before don’t don’t end this for us.

Gene Tunny  14:49

Yeah, okay. It’s an interesting little development this prosphora so it’s adopted Bitcoin as a unit of account as a currency and the investors and apparently some of them are connected with Peter Thiel. So one of the PayPal founders and a very famous man, very major player in in US business. And they’re suing Honduran, the Honduran government for 11 billion. But now Honduras has pulled out of that world bank tribunal. And I mean, given that 11 billion if I, if I’ve done the numbers, right, that’s about a third of the GDP of Honduras. You could imagine why they would I mean, it’s a it’s a massive, a massive lawsuit. What’s your take on the on the merits of the case? Do you have any thoughts, Jeffery, on whether they, they’re, you know, they have a case to sue Honduras? I mean, I’ve been legally and ethically morally?

Jeff Mason  15:55

Sure. So, you know, disclaimer, not not not an attorney or trade attorney, anything like that. But from some briefs and things that I’ve read, you know, I do think they have some kind of standing. There are some clauses in the original law, talking to talk about what sort of an off ramp procedure could look like, of not being less than 10 years. And then beyond that, right, the the the main, the main treaties that there’s there’s a Kuwait based treaty, that Honduras was party to that that’s part of their legal argument. And there’s also another one called CAFTA. Dr. Which is, since I’m from Central American countries, Dominican Republic, some others that to do with investor protections. So, you know, without without being, you know, a lawyer who focuses on these areas, I would, I would think they do. Does that mean, the full, you know, 11 billion is right, is that justified? I don’t I don’t I don’t have enough expertise in that domain to say, I get the sense that I think would have been probably best for all involved is some kind of negotiated settlements, for for some kind of some sort of agreements, what that could exactly be something that maybe allows this phase to continue in some form, but but allows the government say, you know, we’ve, we’ve rolled this back in some way, you know, I don’t know exactly what that could look like. And now it’s there in Honduras leaving to the arbitration house at the World Bank. I really actually, I’m actually not sure I’ve tried to find this. See, with some articles, I have found an article that actually says, like, what happens to the lawsuit now? So I’m not I’m not actually sure what happens next. I’m sure anybody is.

Gene Tunny  17:52

No, no. I mean, it’s it’s a bold move what they’ve done it. I mean, it’s consistent there is this growing concern worldwide about these investor state? dispute or settlement in dispute mechanisms. So you know, as part of that, that broader movement is pull out, and I see that they’ve had 80 or So economists sign a letter in support, and I’ll have to try and dig that up and see who they are. Yeah, it’s just, this is something I’ve just found out about the last few days. This is, this is quite a crazy story. And then I remember the conversation I had with Curtis, which makes me wonder, like, is this a I guess, you know, being in the charter cities Institute and promoting charter cities? Is this something that is a cause of concern? Does this set your agenda back in terms of providing charter cities?

Jeff Mason  18:48

So I don’t, I don’t really view it as a setback for CCI. And some of the projects were working with. I think Honduras is a useful cautionary tale for these projects. In that it shows I think, the importance of having legal and political stability, if your legal regime that allows a charter city or something like a charter city, is is you know, is only an election away from being repealed at anytime. Right. That’s a pretty that’s a pretty shaky foundation. And I think another A second important lesson is that for these types of projects to succeed, I don’t think it has to be the case that a project necessarily needs to involve the government’s right, I think you could have a fully, fully private project. That’s, that’s great and successful. But I think one of the ways to ensure sort of longer term stability and government buy in is actively partnering with with government in some way and whether that’s the sort of formal public private partnership agreement or for Ruby, it may be something less formal, but The government is still involved in some way. And a lot of the projects that we’re working with, but most of which are in Africa that the vast majority of CCIs work is in Sub Saharan Africa. A lot of those projects in one form or another, are actively working with the government. And so I’m, you know, forget to put put the financials and those kind of things aside for a second, just from a legal regime, legal stability standpoint, I’m much more optimistic about those than I am about, you know, the kind of structure that was built in, in Honduras.

Gene Tunny  20:33

Rod, yeah, we might not ask you about those in a minute. Could you just remind us, please, Jeff, what, what is the difference? So what is the special sauce of the charter city versus what we think of as or when we think of as special economic zones or free trade zones, free ports, etc?

Jeff Mason  20:54

Sure, so there’s a couple pieces. So one, is that the city component matters. So we’re talking about building new cities from from scratch, that can take a number of forms. So some some projects that we’ve seen or observed are sort of what you can describe as a satellite city. You know, there’s somewhere within within the growth path of an existing city. Others are a little bit more true Greenfield. But the idea is given the pace of urbanisation, in Sub Saharan Africa, and places like India, and others, as well, just the sheer number of people who are moving to cities, every year, year on year, adds up really quickly. And so it’s hard for existing cities and their, their economies, their governments to manage that. And so we think there’s, you know, there’s, there’s, there’s a value actual value in capturing some of that urbanisation in new cities, which are better, better equipped to handle rapid expansion. So that’s, that’s the city piece. And then the charter piece, is the idea kind of drawing on this tradition from special economic zones. That, right, if you could just, you know, snap your finger, and, okay, all our institutions work great, our policy is perfect across the whole country. Right, you would do that and or there would be, you know, 15% growth, and everything would be great. But national level reforms are and improving governance, or, you know, they’re, they’re difficult things to do. And so, one of the strategies that special economic zones sort of paved the way with is that you can devolve some level of authority to special jurisdiction over a limited geographic area, we’re okay, we’re willing to relax certain rules or allow certain policies to be determined locally, within this area. And right that that’s kind of the story of the Chinese as the Z’s that pioneer their growth. But zones in some form or another have been tried all over the world. And most are, you know, a legal regime. That’s things like tax incentives, customs clearances, one stop shops, you know, blight or regulatory touch these these kinds of things. But you can take that a step further, and say, Well, look, if you know, let’s, let’s concentrate in this one area, and say, maybe it’s not just here’s a prescribed list of privileges you get for doing business in the zone. But instead, let’s think about empowering that jurisdiction to figure out what policies work best. From the ground under this is really the sort of Chinese story, it wasn’t just right, Beijing said, Okay, we’re gonna have some economic zones, and here’s what they can do. But it was local officials on the ground in figuring out what worked. And right China’s a unique time and he in a unique place, where we think those lessons are broadly applicable. And when we talk to policymakers, most seems to find a pretty intuitive that, yeah, we’ve been doing social economic zones in one form or another to varying degrees of success or failure. But I think I think they appreciate the logic of, okay, we’ve done you know, SCC is generation 1.0. That’s an industrial park. Why shouldn’t we pair that with deeper governance reforms and with, with housing, with with with mixed use, with retail commercial uses, not not just industry. And the thing is, a lot of these new city projects are happening with or without that governance component. When you don’t, when you’re not adding in that governance component, right. It’s essentially it’s a real estate project. And that’s, you know, that’s all well and fine. But if you’re going to be doing us large scale, something that is truly city scale that’s going to be home to 10s, or hundreds of 1000s or maybe even millions, even at the ground. Under scale, it actually makes a lot of sense to pair that type of development with with some sort of effort to improve governance. And so while a lot of the projects are, you know, you might get a push point towards an ideal, okay, here’s, here’s what the ideal charter city could look like. And it might have authority over, you know, these these 15 things. Right, in practice, most of the projects that we are either actively working with or know of, are trying to get authority over certain things, or maybe scale over time. Okay, well, we’ll start with revising the economic zone law to include a few more things. And, you know, we can we can try to revise that and continually revise that and, and scale it up and change those those regulations over time. So we’re seeing a push now to, you know, when zoning laws are being reformed, pushing them in the direction of, you know, recognise that there, there’s an urban component here, and pushing the city projects in the direction of, you know, okay, there’s governance is actually important for the success of this project. And so we’re trying to impress that the importance of that synthesis on on governments and and the projects that we we interact with raw

Gene Tunny  26:13

add, okay. Yeah, I mean, it’s great idea. I mean, I think it’s, it could promote experiments in design of cities, different policy settings, which is great. What do you mean by governance? Exactly, you’re talking about, we want to make sure it’s democratic, is transparent. There’s accountability, there’s no corruption? Is that the sort of thing you’re talking about? So

Jeff Mason  26:36

yeah, I think part of it is the sort of governance in terms of the day to day functioning, how well does does you know a particular officer or ministry? How well does that actually function at executing its mission? And then I think there’s also the actual literal policy dimension of what what is the policy? What would what a more optimal policy look like?

Gene Tunny  27:02

Okay, we’ll take a short break here for a word from our sponsor.

Female speaker  27:08

If you need to crunch the numbers, then get in touch with adept economics. We offer you Frank and fearless economic analysis and advice. We can help you with funding submissions, cost benefit analysis, studies, and economic modelling of all sorts. Our head office is in Brisbane, Australia, but we work all over the world. You can get in touch via our website, www dot adapt economics.com.au. We’d love to hear from you.

Gene Tunny  27:37

Now back to the show. Yes, to sort of wrap this up. What are some of the charter cities or the the examples of this in practice around the world that that CCI or you yourself are involved in?

Jeff Mason  27:57

Sure. So the the project that we’re spending most of our time on right now, at CCI, is located in Zanzibar. Tanzania, so there’s a project there called Simba town. So this is a new development. It’s it’s being created by a developer called CPS, sort of south of what’s called Stone Town. It’s kind of the main main main city in Zanzibar. So we were introduced to them a few years ago, there started out and started out as a residential development, they’ve they built about 600 700 units. But they’re looking to expand their the jurisdiction the area under under their control to build this out into something that’s more like a city. And so we’re working with them on plans for the expansion of from the town. And that includes bringing the African School of Economics, which is sort of one of the premier African universities, was founded by one of TCAS board members, Leonard Washington, he says he’s a Princeton Professor of Economics, found that in his State of Guinean, and so they’re looking to expand out of West Africa, they have a couple campuses, and in between Cote d’Ivoire, and Nigeria, and they want to expand to East Africa. And so we’re working with the photon and with ASC to bring them and their first East African campus to Zanzibar. So helping get that set up curriculum development. We’re working on establishing an African urban lab there, which is supposed to be sort of a research and teaching hospital, if you will, for present and future urban practitioners and, and policymakers in Africa and trying to bring the skills and the people needed to sort of build a real hub for talent in East Africa, independently of ASC, IIT, Madras, sort of India’s MIT also set up a campus Just down the road from from Buster, there’s sort of real potential here to build a hub of of talented, talented people and build out an ecosystem in technology and services will also bring the investment. Investment needed in other areas like tourism, blue economy, industry, light industry, manufacturing these these kinds of things. Right. And so we’re working, working with them, and also with the the investment promotion authority there. Tomba is currently in sec, it’s one of these sort of fairly basic regimes. And so we’re looking at ways in which FUBA town can be in terms of of its of its legal powers can be scaled up over time to create an actual proper municipal government, that this that’s something in directionally, like a charter city, and then scale that up over time.

Gene Tunny  30:56

Right. And at what stage is the development? It sounds like there’s some development there already. Do you know the population? Is there a business centre of CBD? Yeah,

Jeff Mason  31:06

so it’s it’s a date, they’ve completed about 600 units, some of which are occupied, some of which are for sale, as well as some some restaurants, shops, office space, that kind of thing. But some of our staff have have relocated there, as well. So I think it’s an A lot, a lot of what’s been built so far is residential. In the next phase, I think a lot of that, including the ASE campus will will be more of that. Office commercial retail type space to support the expansion. Right.

Gene Tunny  31:44

And you know, has it been pitched dad? Is it? Is it being pitched it? Is it primarily of local or regional interest? Or is it being pitched to? I don’t know crypto bros or digital nomads worldwide? I don’t know. But I know that this is something that does appeal to the the the libertarians, the people who who are excited about crypto, I wasn’t using that pejoratively. I was just using that as a term that seems to be the popular term now. So yeah, they’re getting interest from foreign investors from major corporations. Do you have any idea who’s interested in this? Sure.

Jeff Mason  32:26

So I actually just had a conversation for CCI zone podcasts with the head of the architecture firm responsible for a lot of what’s being built and filmed when we talked about part of the strategy. So initially, a lot of the what’s being built is at a price point that’s more for wealthy Tanzanians. And then folks abroad are interested. But they want to use that investment to then build as part of this expansion, much more affordable, much more affordable housing, so that it becomes viable for the local population to buy in. And right, you can’t really actually expand one of these types of projects to to any kind of meaningful scale, if you’re not targeting locals, and making it affordable for locals and creating jobs that are accessible to locals. So obviously, the focus is multifaceted. But they’re very keen on figuring out, you know, what can we do in terms of creating, actually creating, you know, a proper mortgage market, these kind of things doesn’t really exist in a meaningful way. They’re, how can we create the financial tools, also from a construction engineering materials side, but looking at all facets of what can we do to drive drive the price point of housing down, and some of our partners on other city projects have done a really great job elsewhere of figuring out how to do that one of our partners in Malawi called Small Farm cities, they’ve basically been able to drive the house, the price, the price point for new housing down to where someone who’s making a family that’s making 7500 US dollars a month can afford a decent home and actually have a mortgage that they can afford that’s titled it’s it’s it’s it’s it’s Douse them with some property rights, they actually own it. It’s not in formal, like most housing in Africa. So there’s a lot of people working on this question of how do you how do you bring affordability to these projects? And I think that’s because I think it’s important, especially because that’s one of the criticisms and often rightfully so, that gets levied. At a lot of these a lot of these projects, right? There’s just these, you know, glossy shiny renderings and you know, that’s all well and good, but there’s no actuals and a lot of these projects there’s there’s no real viable strategy behind Creating a functional economy that makes sense. And in that location, folks, I think of, you know, a Colin was going to do a city where the currency was going to be a coin. And right, yeah, sure you can have whatever opinions you want about that. At I think it was Senegal, but Right, that’s that’s not what that’s not what the average person in Senegal needs or can really take advantage of. So there’s a real deliberate effort here to try to solve this problem. Yeah,

Gene Tunny  35:34

yeah. That what you mentioned about Malawi is, is interesting. Do you know that off the top of your head, what the name of that development is?

Jeff Mason  35:42

Yeah, so it’s a company called Small Farm city, small farm, and it’s, and it’s run by one of CCI advisors, John Van and Whoville so they have a, their first community was was for about 100 people, and sort of focused on greenhouse agriculture, fish farming, that kind of thing. And now they’re looking to expand. They have, they’re starting construction on development for 1000 plus people adjacent to a new titanium mine that’s opening. And they’re going to continue with some of that greenhouse that agriculture. But they also want to start operating in some of the input industries input sectors that’ll feed into that, that mining business as well, in a way that’s modular and scalable so that they can go from, you know, 1000 100 person starter to this 1000. Person city started that they’re working on to give it 10,000 and higher as they grow. Yeah,

Gene Tunny  36:37

that’s impressive that that unit cost you mentioned for housing. That’s extraordinary. We need that in Australia. I mean, we’ve got a housing crisis. We need it in DC. I mentioned you do. Okay. Although there are a couple other things. Yeah. This Boombah towns fascinating. And Zanzibar is an island. So it’s a, you know, got a storied history. It’s got a really rich history. What currency are they using? Do you know, in Colombia town?

Jeff Mason  37:09

I think just that the Tanzanian shilling raw there, they have a lot of it’s actually a pretty unique jurisdiction for this type of project in that the government of Zanzibar has a pretty significant, not totally but a significant degree of autonomy within the broader union. So in that regard, it’s actually a kind of almost ideal location from from a legal regime point of view to pilot one of these projects. Gotcha.

Gene Tunny  37:34

And what about the tax, right? So if I go, so if I go to a former town, and I, I pay less tax than if I’m elsewhere, on Zanzibar, or elsewhere in Tanzania? So

Jeff Mason  37:47

I think under the current zoning regime, I think it would just be the standard income tax, I don’t think, if I remember correctly, income taxes isn’t part of that. As it currently exists, it’s kind of an industrial park type model. So you would just be paying regular at the moment, regular Zanzibari. And intensity and taxes, Rod, okay.

Gene Tunny  38:09

But there are other benefits that so in your view, there are other benefits that would make this attractive to investors and to people to locate there other than taxes? Yeah, so

Jeff Mason  38:20

Well, I think on on the point about taxes and governance, I think that that’s part of what we’re working on over the last couple of years months is going to the Investment Promotion Authority, and to the government and saying, you know, you have, you know, this this, this, this law that governs Economic Zones, here are some changes that you think could be think could make this much stronger regime, and here’s how it could be paired with the investment that’s being made in from the town. And so things, you know, a starting point could be things like visas, taxes, sort of functions of municipal government, these these sorts of things. And then presumably, over time, you know, if a government, you know, is agreeable, right, that you could scale that up to, you know, other different regulatory domains, that kind of thing. But yeah, taxes for all these projects, things like taxes, local municipal services, visas, business registration, these sort of very bedrock issues are a good place to start for a sort of iterative, legal regime that changes over time

Gene Tunny  39:27

raw. And in your view. You mentioned this before you think that this is a there’s a stable government or there’s a or you can trust the the legal system there because I mean, one of the risks, of course, and you alluded to this before is that, you know, policies can change and, and particularly in if you’ve got foreign investment, and it’s very easy for local demagogues to you know, accuse the foreign investors of exploitation and then we have expert appropriation we have governments taking over the foreign investment. I mean, that’s happened throughout history. It’s just such a it’s it’s a recurring thing. So yeah, but but in your view is this this is a project where that risk is pretty minimal.

Jeff Mason  40:16

Yeah, that’s that’s something that we’re, we’re particularly concerned about. And I think folks in government there can look around in the neighbourhood. Kenya has a number of new city projects, folks may have heard of Tatu city. It’s the flagship projects of Endeavour, which is Africa’s largest urban developer, built on the outskirts of Nairobi. And so there, there’s every other week, they’re making a new invest new announcement about some some new firm that’s, that’s investing there. So I think there’s positive examples in the neighbourhood. To point to as well,

Gene Tunny  40:54

terrific, well, Jeff has been fascinating. I’ve learned a lot. I’m going to look into this small farms, cities and also into the, in the former town, and yeah, learn a bit more about it. Here, particularly how they’re constructing housing. So cheap. I mean, a part of it’s, of course, going to be labour costs, but there’s probably some other things that they’re doing much more efficiently relative to practices elsewhere. So I’m definitely going to look at that. Anything else before we wrap up?

Jeff Mason  41:28

Thanks for having me on. And yeah, I encourage folks to check out and check out these projects. What they’re doing is fascinating. And just to learn more about the sort of broader charter cities in new cities ecosystem, there’s a lot of really dynamic, interesting projects that often fly under the radar that we’re trying to share more about. Today, please take take some time to explore. Absolutely.

Gene Tunny  41:51

And definitely check out shadow cities Institute’s work, I’ll put a link in the show notes, and you’ve got a podcast up Jeff, your charter cities Institute’s got a podcast.

Jeff Mason  42:00

Yeah, we do. Try to we provide weekly, with entrepreneurs, scholars, other folks who are working broadly on issues of city’s economic development, and the like. And also just briefly mentioned, in the last year, we launched a project called the new cities map. So this has every masterplan city in the world built since 1945, mapped with with detailed information about each entry. So if you want to learn more about charter cities and new city projects, that might be a great place for folks to start grind.

Gene Tunny  42:36

I’m gonna have to check that out. That sounds interesting. Yeah, definitely. Because we’ve got, well, one of the big ones in in well, I guess it’s in our region, although it’s still, you know, seven hour or eight hour flight away is in Indonesia. They’re building a new capital city and Oh, I forgot, is it is it on Borneo? Or maybe I got the island wrong. But yeah, building. Yeah,

Jeff Mason  43:00

I think I think you’re right. Yeah, it’s, yeah, that

Gene Tunny  43:03

looks pretty extraordinary. So yeah, I’ll definitely check out the new cities map. Right. Oh, very good. Jeffrey Mason from charter cities institute. Thanks so much for your time. I really enjoyed the conversation. And yeah, I really learned a lot. So yeah, again, thanks and keep up the good work. Thanks, you. Appreciate ya rato thanks for listening to this episode of economics explored. If you have any questions, comments or suggestions, please get in touch. I’d love to hear from you. You can send me an email via contact at economics explore.com Or a voicemail via SpeakPipe. You can find the link in the show notes. If you’ve enjoyed the show, I’d be grateful if you could tell anyone you think would be interested about it. Word of mouth is one of the main ways that people learn about the show. Finally, if your podcasting outlets you then please write a review and leave a rating. Thanks for listening. I hope you can join me again next week.

44:10

Thank you for listening. We hope you enjoyed the episode. For more content like this or to begin your own podcasting journey. Head on over to obsidian-productions.com

Credits

Thanks to Obsidian Productions for mixing the episode and to the show’s sponsor, Gene’s consultancy business www.adepteconomics.com.au. Full transcripts are available a few days after the episode is first published at www.economicsexplored.com. Economics Explored is available via Apple PodcastsGoogle Podcast, and other podcasting platforms.

Categories
Podcast episode

America’s Retirement Crisis: The Pressing Need to Address Social Security’s Financial Woes – EP233

Michael Johnston, CFA of WealthChannel and show host Gene Tunny dissect the pressing issues facing the US Social Security system. Amid predictions of future insolvency, they discuss the demographic trends, financial realities, and policy adjustments needed to safeguard retirement incomes for generations to come.

Please get in touch with us with any questions, comments and suggestions by emailing us at contact@economicsexplored.com or sending a voice message via https://www.speakpipe.com/economicsexplored

You can listen to the episode via the embedded player below or via podcasting apps including Google PodcastsApple Podcast and Spotify.

About this episode’s guest: Michael Johnston, CFA

Michael Johnston, CFA is a financial industry veteran with a passion for improving outcomes for retail investors.

Following stints in corporate finance and investment banking, Michael founded ETF Database (ETFdb) and grew it into the largest independent media property covering exchange-traded funds (ETFs). Under Michael’s leadership, the company achieved a commanding position within the ETF industry and played a key role in the “low cost revolution” that saw hundreds of billions of dollars flow from expensive mutual funds to low cost ETFs.

ETFdb is now a part of TSX Group, a publicly-traded financial services company that operates the Toronto Stock Exchange.

Michael co-founded WealthChannel with a mission of helping investors achieve financial independence by radically simplifying retirement planning and investing. Michael is responsible for WealthChannel’s content and education initiatives, including its flagship WealthChannel Academy.

Michael graduated from the University of Notre Dame with a degree in finance, and now resides in Oregon with his wife and son. He is active in his community as a member of the Board of Directors of the Lane Regional Air Protection Agency (LRAPA) and a volunteer at Hosea Youth Services.

What’s covered in EP233

  • [00:02:59] Sustainability of Social Security.
  • [00:03:52] Retirement crisis in America.
  • [00:09:43] Americans living longer.
  • [00:13:25] Social Security trust fund depletion.
  • [00:17:38] Social Security sustainability.
  • [00:18:59] Social Security Funding Solutions.
  • [00:24:36] Frankenstein policy solutions.
  • [00:27:50] Immigration and Social Security.
  • [00:30:46] Retirement age and social security.
  • [00:35:54] Retirement savings statistics.
  • [00:38:19] Retirement and financial literacy.
  • [00:41:26] Retirement savings options in the States.
  • [00:45:02] Social Security explained.
  • [00:50:26] Social Security and retirement accounts.

Takeaways

  1. Social Security Sustainability: The Social Security program in the US faces sustainability challenges due to changing demographics and financial dynamics.
  2. Retirement Crisis: There is a retirement crisis in the US, with nearly half of Americans having no retirement savings and relying heavily on Social Security for income in retirement.
  3. Potential Solutions: Various solutions were discussed, including raising the retirement age, adjusting cost-of-living adjustments, and increasing taxes to shore up the system.
  4. Individual Retirement Accounts: The US offers tax-effective retirement savings options like 401(k)s and Roth IRAs, but many Americans are not effectively using these tools.

Comparison with Other Countries: The discussion highlighted differences in retirement systems between the US and countries like Australia, where superannuation accounts play a significant role in retirement planning.

Links relevant to the conversation

Lumo Coffee promotion

Lumo Coffee Discount: Visit Lumo Coffee (lumocoffee.com) and use code EXPLORED20 for a 20% discount until April 30, 2024.

Transcript: America’s Retirement Crisis: The Pressing Need to Address Social Security’s Financial Woes – EP233

N.B. This is a lightly edited version of a transcript originally created using the AI application otter.ai. It may not be 100 percent accurate, but should be pretty close. If you’d like to quote from it, please check the quoted segment in the recording.

Michael Johnston  00:04

It seems as if the entire system is going to collapse, it’s still gonna be you know, it’s still gonna be generating. Like I said, 2033 will be the best year ever in terms of inflows into Social Security. The problem is that the outflows are also going to be at their their highest level ever.

Gene Tunny  00:24

Welcome to the economics explored podcast, a frank and fearless exploration of important economic issues. I’m your host gene Tunny. I’m a professional economist and former Australian Treasury official. The aim of this show is to help you better understand the big economic issues affecting all our lives. We do this by considering the theory evidence and by hearing a wide range of views. I’m delighted that you can join me for this episode, please check out the show notes for relevant information. Now on to the show. Hello, thanks for tuning into the show. My guest this episode is Michael Johnston, who has a strong track record and corporate finance and investment banking. Michael co founder at ETF database and latent wealth channel. At wealth channel he has dedicated himself to demystifying Retirement Planning and Investment. In this episode, we dive deep into the intricacies of the US retirement income system, focusing on the Social Security programmes sustainability challenges. Michael sheds light on the pressing issues confronting this critical component of American retirement planning, and explores potential pathways to ensure its viability for future generations. This episode of Economics Explored is brought to you by Lumo coffee, which has three times the healthy antioxidants of regular coffee Lumo coffee offers a 20% discount for economics explored listeners until the 30th of April 2020. For details are in the shownotes, you check out Lumo seriously healthy organic coffee at Lumocoffee.com. Righto, we’d better get into it. I hope you enjoy the episode. Michael Johnson from wealth channel, welcome to the programme. Hey, great

Michael Johnston  02:08

to be with you.

Gene Tunny  02:09

Excellent. Michael, looking forward to chatting with you today. I know that you’ve been doing a lot of thinking about the retirement income system in the US, and particularly the Social Security system. So I mean, we’re hearing all sorts of concerns about sustainability of that scheme. What it all, you know what the implications are? So, to start off with, I’d like to ask, what do you see as the the big issue with Social Security in the US? What’s the state of the retirement income system?

Michael Johnston  02:48

Yeah, great question. So to jump right into it, the state of it is it will not exist in its current form, and 10 years, it cannot. And that’s, that’s not a political statement. It’s just a mathematical one, like the way that the numbers work. And I’m sure we’re gonna dive into this. It cannot exist, the way that it’s existed for the last 40 or 50 years, something’s got to change. And something pretty significant has to change, because the math of it just just no longer works. And we can dive into why why it no longer works. And this is a big issue, because here in the US, I mean, we have we have a retirement crisis, people don’t have enough money for retirement. So Social Security becomes a big piece of that. And it’s I think it’s similar around the world to varying degrees, what extent this is a crisis. But here in the US, you know, depending on which numbers you use, in which year in which survey, it’s close to half of folks have no money saved for retirement, they just have nothing saved. Wrong. And that’s, you know, I don’t need to explain why that’s bad. But as folks, you know, sometimes retirement isn’t isn’t voluntary, you something becomes you get an injury, you lose your mental acuity, you can no longer work. So I mean, obviously, that’s, that’s, you know, in my mind, it’s a crisis. It’s a crisis that no one’s talking about is that no one’s prepared for retirement anymore.

Gene Tunny  04:05

So that means that half of Americans retiring, yeah, they’re going to be solely reliant on the Social Security check from, from the US government. Yeah,

Michael Johnston  04:16

that’s right. It’s Social Security. And this is why it’s so important is because they don’t have any retirement savings of their own, I should have, I should have qualified that they didn’t have retirement savings of their own or they don’t have nearly enough. So when when they do retire, for whatever reason, and at whatever age, they are, to your point there for a lot of folks, Social Security is a primary or the primary source of income in retirement. And it’s kind of a rule of thumb. You know, I always tell folks, you know, it’s not it’s not designed to replace your pre retirement income. It is designed to replace a portion of it, but it’s typically 25 to 35% of your pre retirement income that it’s designed to replace. So it’s a big piece, you know, and a lot of folks You know, even folks who have been doing their own saving, who have been doing all the right things, a lot of those folks are still counting on Social Security to be a big piece of their retirement puzzle. So, so that’s why this is why this is so critical here in the US is because it’s this, it’s a huge component. It’s a huge part of most people’s retirement plans. For some people, it’s the only part of it essentially. So to hear that it’s in jeopardy here that it’s it’s not on sound, financial footing or something needs to change. It’s going to impact literally hundreds of millions of people. And it’s their, you know, their livelihood, the way that a lot of them are going to put food on the table in what should be their golden years. Yeah.

Gene Tunny  05:37

And so how does it work? So you make, is it FICA contributions through your lifetime? Is everyone covered by it? How does it actually work in practice? Yeah, so

Michael Johnston  05:49

essentially, what happens is, every American has, for each paycheck, there’s there’s deductions from their paychecks, so they have their gross pay what they make before any deductions, one of the deductions is something called FICA, the Federal Insurance Contributions Act. Long story short, every American has 6.2% of their gross wages withheld as as a Social Security tax. And then their employer matches that their employer chips in another 6.2%. So 12.4% of your gross wages is put into Social Security on your behalf each year. And then once you hit a just kind of some, some nuances, and then some complex formulas and some options, so essentially, you pay into it during your working years. And then you have the option starting at age 62, you can push it back as late as age 70. If you want the formula switches and you start withdrawing from the system. And again, there’s a formula for what you can expect to get each month, it’s based on how much you put in. So the more you make, the more you put in, the more you can expect to receive, there is a what I call a progressive formula applied, meaning that essentially, the less you make, the greater percentage of your income is going to be covered. But yeah, at a high level, you pay into it during your working years. And then somewhere between age 62 and 70, the tables turn and you start pulling out from the system. And for a long time, this was great, because there were more more money flowing into the system, more money flowing into Social Security in the form of these payroll taxes, the FICA, payroll tax that you mentioned, there’s more money flowing in from that than there was going out to beneficiaries. So essentially, for the last several decades, we’ve had this surplus, and we built up this nice rainy day fund, what I like to call it this rainy day fund. But now the rainy day has come. And it’s going to be around for a while, unfortunately. So the tables have kind of turned here. And unfortunately, now the outflows are starting to outpace the inflows by by quite a bit, actually.

Gene Tunny  07:53

And that’s because the we had the big baby boomer cohort after the war, and they made a lot of contributions, but now they’re going to be relying on Social Security. So I mean, what happens? So if you don’t work? I mean, it’s, I guess most people will work to some extent, over their lifetime, but there will be some who, who have limited work history, or won’t or there’ll be in? I don’t know, you know, gig work or informal work. So are they covered as well, or they’re not covered?

Michael Johnston  08:29

Yeah, it’s, it’s a great question. So kind of to two parts of that. So if you don’t, where there is a minimum work requirement, you said, you have to work for 40 quarters, or for 10 years, you have to pay into it to be eligible. But that is that essentially has to be any above the table form of work. So if you’re doing gig work, you’re still paying into this. If you’re self employed, you’re still paying into this, you’re just paying the employee and the employer piece of it. So yes, there is a minimum requirement that you or your spouse has to work for, has to work for 10 quarters to be eligible. But you know, even if you’re self employed, or it’s gig work, or it’s it’s hourly work, you’re still paying into it. It’s regardless of your income level. It’s kind of different from our income tax system here. So so it’s, you know, it affects the vast majority of people, the vast majority of people are eligible for Social Security. They’ve done the minimum requirements that met the work requirements paid into it enough, worked long enough to be eligible for these benefits. And then I just want to go back quickly, quickly, gene is something you mentioned about, well, what’s what’s kind of happened here, like why have these tables turned? And there’s a couple things and one of them’s one of them is a great thing is that in America, people are living longer like they are around much of the world and that’s fantastic. Right? The life expectancy has has gone up quite a bit over the last 50 years more so for women and for men, but for both women are living a lot longer men are living quite a bit longer. And that’s that’s wonderful, right but From a fiscal perspective, that means that they’re collecting benefits for longer, you know, five years of life expectancy means another 60 monthly payments of Social Security. So that kind of threw a wrench into some of the plans. And then as you mentioned, people having fewer kids back in the 1960s, the average woman here was having something like 3.6 Kids, essentially fallen in half. And that’s just a massive, massive decline. And I know that similar things are happening around the world, some places more acutely than in America, some places less acutely, but similar issues playing out all over the place. Yeah,

Gene Tunny  10:34

yeah, exactly. So just thinking about this. So this dates back to FDR, doesn’t it to the days of the New Deal, and they set up a trust fund to to fund this, the Social Security benefits? I mean, I guess, you know, maybe there was some modelling done back in the 30s. Whenever they said it, set it up the actuarial modelling you need, but I mean, the issue is the issue that there’s an act of Congress, which sets out the entitlements, to Social Security, what you’ll get paid, but that doesn’t bear a close connection with, you know, the actual financial health of this game. Is that the issue?

Michael Johnston  11:15

Yeah, so the, I mean, this year, as of this programme, kind of, it kind of stands alone, and it has one source of income. It’s this, this payroll tax, that we talked about this FICA, the 6.2%, that the employee pays and the 6.2% that the employer pays. So it has essentially one source of income. And that source of income is dependent, essentially, on how many people are working, how many people are entering the workforce and staying in the workforce? So it’s, you know, there’s not, we can talk about this a little bit more, there’s a few levers you can pull there, but it’s essentially very dependent on how many people are working, and how much are they paying into the system. And that has been, I think, under it’s been less than what was initially projected, or was kind of projected a long time ago, for the reasons, for one of the reasons we talked about starting in, you know, in the mid 1980s, like in the mid 1980s, the birth rate had fallen quite a bit because similar to now inflation was really high interest rates were really high, it was not a great time to be having kids from a financial perspective. And so the birth rate had fallen, and now you fast forward. From there 2030 years, there weren’t enough babies born 20 years ago that are now entering that are now entering into the workforce. So, you know, that’s the issue is that there’s there’s not enough. But essentially, it’s kind of coming at it from both sides. There’s there’s more beneficiaries than were anticipated, because people are living longer. And I want to emphasise again, that’s a great thing. And on the other side of it, there’s not enough people who are now just coming into the workforce who are able to essentially pay into the system through this payroll tax. So that’s the issue is that those those two things again, for a long time, it was kind of the reverse, there was more money coming in and there was going out. And unfortunately, now, now it’s it’s flipped.

Gene Tunny  13:05

Yeah. And do you know, the and what are the projections? So like, it’s got a there’s a balance, and you’re saying that the outflows are exceeding the the inflows and so therefore the balance is going to be running down? Do you know what the roughly what the current balance is? And when it’s projected to get to? to zero?

Michael Johnston  13:24

Yeah, so it’s, you know, it’s been for the last 4050 years, there’s been, like I said, this the surplus, and we’ve done all the right things, right, we set it into this trust fund into this rainy day fund. Because that’s, that’s what you should do in that situation is exactly what you should do. So let’s see, I’m pulling up the reserves here. And it’s almost peaked out at almost $3 trillion. We had in this rainy day fund that was built up over the course of 4050 years of these these surpluses, the problem is now this has just flipped within the last couple of years. And we’re depleting that that $3 trillion at a pretty incredible pace. So it’s going to run out somewhere around 2033 2034, based on the current projections, so less than a decade. So I mean, you could call that good news or bad news, right? We kind of see this calming theory, we’ve got time to do something about it. It’s not going to happen tomorrow or next year. We’ve got time. But it’s pretty incredible that, again, just the rate at which this has been depleted, considering that it was built up over many, many decades. And this just slipped by the way within the last couple of years was the first time we had more money going out than coming in. But it’s it’s hundreds of billions of dollars a year that it’s going to be about 150 billion this year that we deplete, and that number is only going to go up so we’ve got this massive rainy day fund, but unfortunately, it’s just been depleted very, very quickly.

Gene Tunny  14:51

Yeah. And Michael would you know what’s, what would actually happen is it if it did run out of money with the Treasury So you have to inject funds into it? Or would, or would it just be? Oh, well, we’ll just got to make do with what we’ve got. I mean, do you have any thoughts on what? what would actually happen in that case? If it didn’t have enough money?

Michael Johnston  15:13

Yeah, it’s, it’s a great, it’s a great question. So there’s, there’s kind of a couple of ways to, to answer that question. I guess I’m not actually sure gene statutorily, or, or, you know, mechanically, what would happen if, if nothing else changed, and we hit that point. So, you know, a lot of people have this misconception that Social Security is going bankrupt, and it’s not going to be around, you’re not going to get anything from it. So that’s partially true. But it’s actually this, it’s this trust fund, more specifically, that is going bankrupt. So in 2033, I said that this trust fund is going to run out of money in 2033, Social Security is gonna have more money than ever before coming in. The problem is, it’s also going to have more money than going out. Yeah, right. Yeah. So this this trust fund right now that we’re dipping into, that’s only covering a portion of the benefits, the lion’s share of the benefits are still coming in each year from these payroll taxes. So that’s a misconception that a lot of people have a lot of really smart people have, you know, part of it’s due to these these fear mongering headlines, you see, Social Security is going bankrupt. Yeah. Can I get your benefits anymore? So So yes, it’s, it’s, it’s certainly not on financial flooding, like I said, it’s not going to exist in its current form a decade from now something needs to change, but it’s not as if it’s, it’s not as if the entire system is going to collapse, it’s still gonna be you know, it’s still gonna be generating, like I said, 2033 will be the best year ever, in terms of inflows into Social Security. The problem is that the outflows are also going to be are also going to be at their their highest level ever. So. So as far as what would happen, well, like something’s gotta give, right, we’ve got to either get more money into the system, or we’ve got to cut benefits and stop spending less essentially, the only expenses is benefit payments to retirees. So there’s actually there’s a lot of different levers that that could be pulled there, at a high level, you’ve either got to raise taxes and bring in more money, or you cut the cut the benefit payments, but it wouldn’t be cutting it by 100%. It would be cutting it by 10 to 20%, essentially. But that’s again, I don’t want to minimise that that’s a big deal for a lot of people who have been counting on this, and they’ve been paying in each month each week, whatever it is, and kind of counting on having this in their retirement all of a sudden tell them actually we’re going to cut it by 20%. Put a lot of people on a pretty tough situation. Yeah,

Gene Tunny  17:38

yeah. I mean, it sounds. Yeah, politically. I mean, it sounds like it’d be very difficult to do that. And I know that this is an issue in the it’s been an issue in the political debates. And one of the I think, saga and Jerry made this point on the breaking points channel, he said that, you know, this was one of the reasons that Trump was popular with a lot of people in middle America, because in 2016, he came out and said, I actually support social security, and I won’t cut those benefits. I think it’d be very challenging to do that. Would you ever feel for how much the contributions would have to increase Michael to actually make put it on a sustainable footing?

Michael Johnston  18:17

Yeah, it’s a it’s a great question. So yeah, I think that Well, first of all, you’re absolutely right, that this is a couple of ways to look at this, that if you want to, if you want to look at his glass half full, there’s a lot of ways to fix this, right? There’s actually kind of a lot of levers you can pull, and we’ll talk more about those. The bad news is they’re all terrible options, like they’re going to they’re going to really anger, one group of people or another. Like there’s no good options here. There’s no easy fix. And politicians generally like to stay away from from problems that have no easy fix, it’s kind of guaranteed to piss off someone in one way or another. They like to stay away from those for as long as possible. So I’d expect this Ken to kind of get to kind of get kicked down the road. Now towards kind of more specifically answer your second question there. If we were to say, you know, if we were to say, Okay, we can’t cut benefits, that’s, that’s off the table. And I tend to think that’s the case because that would upset retirees who are counting on this. And in the US one thing retirees do pretty consistently, one thing they’re pretty good at is they show up on election day. And the candidate who says, Hey, I’m cutting your benefits by 20%. Like, I just don’t think that’s practically viably an option. I don’t know maybe I can be proven wrong. I don’t have a great track record of predicting political outcomes. But that just sounds like you generally don’t get elected here. And I think in most places by kind of angry and or upsetting the retirees. So that kind of puts you to the other side of the equation. Well, if we’re if we’re not going to cut benefits, if we’re not going to slash benefits, how much do we have to increase taxes? So the estimates that I’ve seen are I’d have to go About 12.4%. So again, right now that’s 6.2% coming from employees, their employers match that. So you get to 12.4. I’ve seen estimates that if we increase that to 16%, so presumably eight and eight, that would shore this up for 75 years or so. Now, that’s I think that’s, that’s a big ask to to tell people in this current environment, when when inflation has already taken a huge bite out of their paycheck, you know, hey, by the way, we’re going to take another, we’re going to take another 2% out of your paycheck, and by the way, employers, your payroll cost just went out by it’s a lot more than 2%. Because it’s, it’s, you know, instead of paying 6%, they’re paying, they’re paying 8% here. So, I mean, that’s a tough sell to right. So you kind of say, retirees, I’m not going to cut your Social Security, that’s one way of hearing that message. The other way is, well, the only other option then is to increase taxes. So right to kind of to two bad options there, at least in my mind, those are our two bad options that I think would be difficult sells politically to different groups of people for different reasons. But but still tough sells politically. Yeah.

Gene Tunny  21:11

And so these contribution taxes are these payroll taxes, they’re the same, regardless of the person’s income, is that right? And in terms of the rate, there’s no, there’s not a progressive rate at all?

Michael Johnston  21:24

Correct. It’s not a progressive rate. So so it kind of starts at your first dollar and it goes up. So there is actually kind of the opposite of that there is a cap on it. So I think for for this year, it changes each year, I believe that only your first it’s about $168,000, you pay this 6.2%. And then after that, it drops to zero. So only the first bout $168,000 of income is subject to the Social Security taxes. So I think you’ve touched on here, you’ve kind of got the two extreme options, you raise taxes to 16%, you slash benefits by 20%. Those are like the two easy extreme options. And then you get into kind of all these little things you can do around the edges that kind of nibble away at this. And you just you just touched on one of them with that last question. That’s one of the things you can do, you can say, okay, it’s no longer only your first $168,000 Look, bump that up, it’s the first $250,000 Or it’s the first 200,000 Or you know, you can move that up and down, you take the first million dollars in social in, in your, your income is going to be subject to Social Security taxes, and you kind of start nibbling away a little bit at the edges. It’s not quite as big of a lever to pull as just saying, we’re going to increase the tax rate to 16%. But I don’t know, I think personally, my opinion here. I think that’s a lot more palatable politically to say we’re going to make because it kind of targets high earners, right. So we’re going to say, we’re going to raise this this limit from 168 to 250. It’s going to bring in a little bit more money, like yes, it’s a tax increase. But it’s it’s only really affecting people who make more than $168,000 a year. So then you kind of start getting into these, like I said, these little things that they kind of chip away at the problem. They don’t they don’t fix it in one fell swoop. But you kind of start to nibble away at it. Yeah,

Gene Tunny  23:16

I’m wondering, I’m wondering, too, is whether it’s a bit technical. I could I might, I can look it up later. I’m just wondering, has that 100? And was 168,000. Has that been indexed to inflation? Or does it get regularly adjusted for inflation? It

Michael Johnston  23:31

is, yeah, it’s been indexed for inflation. So it is it is going up, you know, which I think makes it a little bit harder to it’d be easier to sell if it had gone up 20 years, right. And it was at this level that was last set and 9090 or something, but it has gone up, which I think makes it you know, a little bit of a harder sell. But I still think that’s probably one of the least one of the least controversial ways to do this. Or it’s going to upset the the fewest number of people here. And I think there’s some other options too. And maybe we can talk about the like, I think there’s other ways that you kind of, I call it you kind of Frankenstein together a solution. You don’t you don’t take this drastic action of slashing benefits or this really visible significant tax hike. But you can kind of I think string together a few of these things that kind of maybe start having that effect.

Gene Tunny  24:19

Yeah, yeah. Well, I mean, I think in a lot of the, the policy outcomes you see, or the you know, the attempted solutions are Frankenstein solutions in a way. So yeah, I’d be interested in your thoughts on that marketplace.

Michael Johnston  24:35

Yeah, so I think you know, one of the things you can do is you can increase the retirement age. So right now in the US, we say that the full retirement age is 67 years old. So people are living longer. I mean, you could say, well, you’re not going to start getting your benefits at 67. Now we’re going to bump that up to 68 or 69 or 70. And we’ve actually done this before like the the starting age for Social Security used to be 65. And then it went up to 66. And now we’re kind of gradually phasing it up to 67. So, you know, that’s, that’s one of those things that again, kind of kind of nibbling around the edges. And it means that you kind of this is on the other side of the equation. Now, on the benefit side of the equation, that means, well, next year is justice, security’s not gonna have to pay out to 67 year old, you got to wait till you’re 68 6970. I think that that kind of chips away at it a little bit, you could also tinker with. So to your point, you asked about indexing for inflation. So Social Security benefits go up each year, they get adjusted a cola adjustment, a cost of living adjustment, so those benefits go up each year to account for inflation. So you can tinker with that a little bit. And that’s effective, like, it’s the same thing as cutting the benefit, like you’re effectively cutting the benefit, right, because you’re gonna have less of a cost of living adjustments. So it’s it, but I think it’s my point, I guess is I think it’s more palatable. Even if the the bottom line effect is the exact same, you’re effectively cutting benefits to say, we’re going to rein in those cost of living adjustments every year, we’re going to do them a little bit less than the general rate of inflation, and we’re gonna change the methodology of how we calculate those. So we’re gonna lower we’re going to rein in our benefit payments or outflows a little bit, but in a way that maybe isn’t quite so offensive, politically raw, stringing together some of these and you kind of start to have, I think you start to get to shoring up this programme, or at least kicking the can a little bit further down the road. You know, another option and to just get into, like a political lightning or out here is another another lever level here is immigration, right. Like, if you need more people to pay into the system, one way to do that is to bring in to loosen the immigration restrictions and say, Let’s have let’s have a lot more people coming into the country who are going to work, who are going to pay into Social Security. And that kind of offsets the fact that people are having so few kids 2025 years ago. So, you know, again, I don’t think any of these is this is the fix on its own. And there’s there’s issues with all of these things that I’ve proposed here. But you know, it’s kind of done in moderation, you get to start putting stringing together, something that moves the needle.

Gene Tunny  27:26

Yeah, yes. I was just thinking about that, Michael, I mean, immigration, I guess the issue is that, you know, that could help you maybe for 20 or 30 years within the immigrants themselves retire. So if they’re not having, you know, if their fertility rates not much higher than the existing population, then yeah, that that may not be it’s

Michael Johnston  27:48

a great point, right, like, absolutely. You would. And I think that’s, you know, that’s kind of a problem with all of these solutions is, I don’t know that any of them kind of get to the structural issues here. There are ways to, to kick the can down the road a little bit further. And I think that’s kind of an interesting conversation as well, if we’re going to tweak this, do we tweak this towards an off ramp? Like, do we start steering this towards that call this essentially a failed experiment? And say, Well, if we’re going to tweak it, let’s tweak it in a direction that starts to kind of wine this thing down and eventually get us get us off of this? Or do we kind of double down on it and make it more entrenched? And, you know, I have, what kind of my preference would be to go towards the the former of those, I think that’s extremely unlikely. Again, I think these these are all pretty politically unpopular decisions. So I think we’re more likely to double down on this than to kind of, if I were steering the ship, I would kind of steer us off of this, I’d say, pick the intentions were good, but that the math of it just just just no longer works, right? Wrong.

Gene Tunny  28:55

Yeah. Just don’t go ahead. And

Michael Johnston  28:59

I say that because I kind of think it’s an interesting thought experiment of if this were optional, right. Like, that’s the thing. And maybe I should have mentioned that the beginning like this is mandatory, you have to do this. It’s essentially a forced retirement programme. But it’s a forced retirement programme that has pretty bad returns, like the effective return, like, like I’ve paid in hundreds of 1000s of dollars, or my employers have into Social Security, and I’m affected like, I’ve run the numbers, I’m effectively earning a 2% return on that. If you look at the numbers of the money, I’m going to pay in between age 21 and 67. And then what I’m going to get out between 67 and whenever I die, like the numbers are not great. It’s essentially like a 2% return on investment during a period where the stock market has returned eight nine 10% a year. So it’s it’s it’s not it’s mandatory, but unfortunately, like the results are just not good the way that it was set up. So in a perfect world, people would be setting aside this money on their own but you know, of course, that’s That’s not easy for other reasons to think that people are going to, to kind of magically change their behaviour and start planning on their own for retirement. So I hope we’re not depressing people out there too much Jean, I keep saying there’s no good answers here. Right. And this is a messy situation and sticky. But I think it’s fascinating to look at kind of how we’ve gotten here, what went wrong, and, and to kind of explore these different reasons why, why there is no good reason and what, you know, what becomes most acceptable and kind of the least bad option out there. Yeah, but no one was hoping for a super uplifting, rah rah conversation here.

Gene Tunny  30:36

Yeah, I think the the issue the problem is in the states is that is the politics around it on the retirement age. So I’m just thinking. I mean, there’s one option, I mean, sure, you can raise the retirement age. But what about could you grandfather, the recipient, so draw a line in the sand and say, Look, if you’re, for those people who haven’t turned 18 yet, or people who were born in, you know, in 2005, or whatever, you’re going to get much less benefits from Social Security is just going to be a safety net, and we’re going to push you into this new scheme, we’re going to have individual retirement accounts, compulsory individual retirement accounts. Could something like that work? Yeah, I

Michael Johnston  31:24

think I think it could, like you’ve got to make, you’ve ultimately kind of got to make, you’ve got to make the numbers work. And, but but I think like that is, that is what I would prefer, we steer towards a steer towards a way where we kind of, we kind of get off of this, and it’s going to upset, you know, it’s going to upset, it’s gonna upset someone, right, you’re gonna have like you said, you’re gonna have to draw a line in the sand somewhere. And there’s gonna be a lot of people who are just on kind of the wrong side of that line in the sand, who who are maybe going to, you know, do worse than that 2% number I mentioned. But yes, I think that you, I think that you could do that, I think we should do that. Honestly, I think we should steer more towards kind of these individual retirement accounts, instead of just throwing all this money into into one bucket. And then kind of dishing it out of that one bucket. Yeah, I think you know, the devils in the details on that. But I think that that’s, I think that would honestly be the responsible thing to do.

Gene Tunny  32:23

Okay, we’ll take a short break here for a word from our sponsor.

Female speaker  32:29

If you need to crunch the numbers, then get in touch with Adept Economics. We offer you Frank and fearless economic analysis and advice, we can help you with funding submissions, cost benefit analysis, studies, and economic modelling of all sorts. Our head office is in Brisbane, Australia, but we work all over the world, you can get in touch via our website, http://www.adepteconomics.com.au. We’d love to hear from you.

Gene Tunny  32:58

Now back to the show. Gonna ask on this retirement age to i One concern that people have is that we’ll look lifting the retirement age, that’s, that’s fine for professionals. For, you know, it’s but what about for manual workers who, you know, they really look forward to retirement and, you know, manual work is challenging as you get older. I mean, what, what happens if someone can’t I don’t know enough about the US Social Security system. But what happens if someone you know, they’re in the late 50s or early 60s, and then they really can’t work for medical reasons, they feel they can’t work in a manual job. Is there any coverage for them?

Michael Johnston  33:48

So there’s, there’s a couple of parts of this system that I think are designed? And I think do I’ve been kind of beating up on the system a little bit, but there’s some, I think, some some good parts of it, too. So one of them is we’ve kind of been talking about people who retire voluntarily for the most part of this conversation. Social Security does also the other people who get to security are those younger than retirement age, who had some sort of disability. So there’s, you know, there’s a process for verifying that and for applying for those benefits. So that’s a part of this programme. It’s a pretty small part of it. But But yes, that that that does exist. And then kind of the other nice, I guess, flexibility that’s built into this system right now is so at age, by default, your full retirement age is 67. That’s when you’re going to start receiving your benefits. You can say, You know what, I’d like to start benefits at 62. That’s the earliest you can do it, and you’ll get a smaller benefit payment. But if if for whatever reason, whether you want to or you’re you’re forced to, you can say I’m gonna start at 62 I don’t want to wait till 67. I’ll take my smaller amount, and I’m going to start getting it earlier. And you’re able to do that. And I think for the reasons that you mentioned that type But flexibility is important. And you can go the other way too, you can say, I’m going to, I don’t need to start at 67, I can rely on my personal savings or I’m still working. I’m going to wait till 70. And to incentivize that behaviour, the Social Security Administration will give you a little a little bump then. So instead of, you know, getting it’s effectively for each year, you delay receiving benefits, your benefit increases by 8%. So, if you said, I’m going to push it back from 67 to 70, voluntarily, they’ll say, Great, thank you for waiting to start receiving benefits, you get an extra 24% Bonus, essentially. And then the reverse the math is a little bit different. But essentially, if you want to bump it forward by by five years, you’ll get only 70% of the benefit you would have gotten otherwise. But you get to start it earlier. And actuarially, these numbers kind of all work out pretty similarly to the amount you expect to receive. Between when you over your lifetimes. Yeah,

Gene Tunny  35:54

I’m quite stunned by the number that we started at that we started the conversation with this 50% of Americans don’t have any retirement savings, I guess, what do we know if there actually is probably it’s bad, it’d be bad, even if you looked at added at a household level to because that’s individuals, but you’re going to have some people who are you know that you’re in a couple. So maybe one partner doesn’t have any savings, but the other partner is, has reasonable savings. But that probably doesn’t help the number too much. I’m just trying to wrap my head around what it all means. So it means that it

Michael Johnston  36:34

means well, so I think I think there’s kind of a couple of reasons for this. Like, how did this happen. So if you go back a generation or two generations, like my grandfather worked his entire career at General Electric. And when he retired, he got a pension, he got a guaranteed what’s called a defined benefit plan. So there’s a formula for calculating it, he worked there, let’s say you worked there for 40 years, and for every year, he got 2% of his salary. So he retired and he got a check every month from General Electric, even though he was no longer working there. And that used to be the norm here in America is that these pensions were what funded a lot of people’s retirement plans. And those have gone away. Like, at least in the States, the number of so called defined benefit contribution plans where you get a check each month from your employer in retirement, there’s still some, it’s mostly public sector employees, it’s cops and firefighters and teachers, some university employees will still have those defined benefit pension plans. But for the most part, those have gone away. And, and I think the idea was was well, you know, if employees, the individuals will step up, and the employers will fund these another way, but like nothing’s really stepped in to fill that gap. So it used to be fine to not save money for retirement because your employer was effectively doing it for you, and you are going to continue to get a paycheck from them after you retired. And that’s, that’s, that’s not the case anymore. And then I think just you know, culturally, like just to call it what it is, or to give my opinion on it, we’ve got a very consumer focused culture here, people spend money, they don’t have a lot of they spend money on status symbols that they don’t really need. You know, there’s a lot of of not great financial literacy and financial behaviour that goes on. We still don’t teach financial literacy in most schools here. And I think it’s a, you know, that’s a cultural problem. Like, I think that this is solvable, but it involves understanding the concept of, of spending more than you make, and compound interest and the, you know, the, the stigma of having debt, it requires understanding all these things and making it kind of a part of our culture, which unfortunately, right now, it’s very, very focused on, on spending and on the status symbol. So and I think there’s there’s similar issues around the globe, probably, to different extents. Yeah.

Gene Tunny  39:04

I mean, just as an outside observer, one thing that I think is, you know, does make it difficult for some people in the US is that you don’t have a well, you’ve got Medicare and Medicaid, but you don’t have a single payer or public health care system the same as we do in Australia or in in other OECD economies. And because I know that so many people in the looses the impression I get from the media that a lot of people in the US, they lose their savings, they get driven into bankruptcy because of medical debt. I mean, I don’t know if you’ve got any thoughts on that. But that just seems to me is something that is, you know, makes the situation in the US more difficult than in other countries.

Michael Johnston  39:47

Yeah, I think I think there’s a couple of things. I think there are plenty of those. I’ll call them acute instances where someone unfortunately has a significant injury and they kind of one off In this acute instance, they acquire a bunch of medical data, they have kind of massive one off costs. But then I think there’s a lot of kind of death by 1000 cuts to our cost of health care. And that in the States has gone up here. It’s way outpaced the cost of inflation just over the last 20 years, the cost of health care has skyrocketed. So even if you don’t have this acute event where you have an unfortunate accident or disease that requires huge outlays, I mean, you’re kind of like I said, you’re getting you’re getting paper cut to death, right, just with the the metric the premiums that you have to pay and kind of all these things that that add up. You’re absolutely right. It’s both those those kind of acute instances as well as healthcare in general, just counting for a big portion of a budgets here of household budgets.

Gene Tunny  40:48

Yeah, that’s we probably can’t tackle health care as well as social security day, unfortunately, it’s it is a big issue. I’ll have to cover it again on the show, because I know it’s a huge, a huge challenge there. Like, I want to ask you about it again, on this low level of savings. Or it’s extraordinary, because from my understanding, there are good tax effective retirement savings options available in the states aren’t there, I had a guest on who was talking about the 401, Ks and Roth, IRAs, the individual retirement accounts,

Michael Johnston  41:26

ya know, those are two incredibly powerful vehicles that allow you to essentially defer and eliminate a lot of taxes. So yes, and it’s a great question. And I think that these were introduced in kind of response to a lot of corporate employers cutting pensions with the idea was, okay, well, if pensions are going away, let’s give Americans these tools so that they can invest in a tax efficient manner, they can shield a lot of their significant portion of their assets and their income. And, you know, the trade off is the way that these accounts work at a very high level is you can defer, you can defer your income tax and instead put the money into this tax advantaged account. And you can shield it from from dividend and capital gains taxes. In the meantime, the trade off is you can’t just pull out money, if you want to go to if you want to go to a basketball game, or you want to go gamble, if you want to buy a sports car, you can’t just pull the money out, you’ve got to keep it in there. In most cases, it’s until just before age 60, age 59 and a half. So the idea here is let’s incentivize good behaviour, let’s give you these great tax advantages, if you invest in this account that you cannot touch until you’re 59 and a half. And you’re going to therefore kind of remove the temptation to blow this all on on something frivolous and something unnecessary. And we’re going to force good behaviour. So yes, those tools are there. And that’s part of the frustrating part of the frustration here is that they’re not being utilised to the extent that they should be I think part of it is folks are are unaware of them, it still requires level of discipline, even if you even if you are aware of them. It’s not that you know, it’s not that exciting right now to to put money in your 401 K when the alternative is you go buy something flashy that you don’t really need. So kind of comes down to delaying gratification. But yes, absolutely. These tools are available. And I You’re preaching to the choir, that more folks should use them and kind of take ownership here.

Gene Tunny  43:26

Yeah, I mean, what we do in Australia is we have I guess, we’ve got an age pension, which is, is funded out a consolidated revenue, and it’s not linked to what you contribute at all. It’s just available depending on eligibility, you get to a certain age, there’s an asset test to for, for assets other than the family home. But otherwise, it’s you know, it’s different. And then we also we brought in individual retirement accounts, I think that’s how you what you’d call them in, in the states the the superannuation, and that’s, you know, that there’s a huge pool of super assets as that’s been built up. Now there are, there’s a big debate about whether we should let people withdraw from that to get a deposit for a home. I think that’s probably a good idea. And then there’s, you know, concern concerns, maybe we’re paying too much into it, maybe the unions have got too much control of the funds. There’s all those sort of issues, but broadly, I think it sounds like, you know, relative to where the states is, I mean, we’re probably in a better position here. But everything’s, you know, it’s not all doom and gloom. Like I think you were saying, Well, this is a depressing conversation. I’m not, I think it’s actually quite, it’s been good for me, because it’s given me a good appreciation of what those levers are, that could be changed and because one of the things that that you often hear is that it’s called a Ponzi scheme. What do you think? and give that characterization. Well,

Michael Johnston  45:01

I would say that a Ponzi scheme is is fraudulent, right? It’s, it’s illegal. It’s inherently fraudulent. And for anyone listening who’s not familiar, essentially it means so let’s say Jean invest his money with an asset manager. And then I invest behind him. And this asset manager pays him out with some of my money. So essentially, it’s a fraudulent way to inflate returns. And Gene says, holy cow, this manager did a great job for me, I got a 50% return in just two years, I’m gonna go tell all my friends, and essentially relies on your it’s not actual games, you’re kind of paying them out with other people’s money. It’s fraudulent, it’s very clearly illegal. There’s nothing about Social Security that at least to my knowledge has been fraudulent or illegal or anything shady like that. It’s incredibly transparent. It’s working exactly like it was designed to there’s no kind of shady cooking the books things that are that are going on. So now, having said all that, essentially, is, you know, it’s not totally baseless claim, because it relies on kind of the same mechanism that a Ponzi scheme does. It relies on new people coming into the system. In this case, they’re, you know, new employees entering into the workforce. If they were all go away. We have no money to kind of pay out the retiree. So the mechanism is the same. But I want to make I think it’s important distinction that, you know, there’s while there are some similarities, there’s, you know, I’m certainly not I don’t think anyone’s accusing Social Security of being fraudulent or deceptive in any way. It was maybe just kind of poorly designed, I guess you could certainly accuse it of being that but to my knowledge, at least there’s there’s no serious accusations of any any kind of fraud or any misdoing in that way. Yeah.

Gene Tunny  46:51

And a point that Ryan Grim on counterpoints, which is part of that breaking points network he made the other day because they look at this issue quite a bit. From time to time, he was saying, well, let’s never missed a payment in over 80 years or something, whereas a Ponzi scheme probably would have been that times that would have collapsed. So it’s just a matter of Yeah, to me, it looks like it’s a matter of getting those benefit levels, right. Maybe they do need to be adjustments, increasing the retirement age, looking at the rate of contributions, but again, the politics that are difficult, just seems to me that there seem to be more focused on this or or there seem to be more practical policy work going on to try to resolve this in the 90s. And, and up until maybe, I don’t know, 10 years ago, I think was Paul Ryan, looking at some stage. But even Joe Biden, Joe Biden, when he was in the Senate was looking at this is Is there anything actually going on behind the scenes that you know, have to fix this?

Michael Johnston  47:55

Yeah, it’s it’s a great question. I’ll be honest, I don’t know how serious or how advanced you know, a lot of times in the states here, we you kind of have the the idea that that people are working on things, but it’s effectively a campaign mechanism to kind of talk about it at a very high level. I don’t know the extent to which there are, you know, aides behind the scenes, sharpening pencils and running calculations and kind of actually trying to find a viable path forward here. I think that it is, I don’t think we’re at that point, I think that this will continue to get this Ken will continue to get kicked down the road. Like I said, we’re still you know, we want to look at glass half full. And some good news here. We have time here, right? We have time to fix this. We’ve got a decade still. So I think that there are more pressing issues. And this is going to be fixing this is going to be a thankless job, because it’s going to upset guaranteed to upset someone, there’s no easy way to do this. And I think that thankless jobs that don’t need to be solved tomorrow, tend to get tend to get pushed down the road, probably quite a bit, which is unfortunate, because that’s uncertainty for investors, right? Like not knowing. In theory, the more warning you have, and the more clarity you have, the more time you have to react to this, to change your behaviour and to kind of come up with a solution. But to the extent that you’re kind of left guessing into the last minute how this is going to play out is you know that that ultimately hurts the investors. But I think that’s what’s going to happen here. Yeah.

Gene Tunny  49:28

Well, it’s a very important issue, because as part of the whole, I mean, you need to get Social Security fixed up. And then there’s a broader budget challenge. There are concerns about, you know, growing federal debt and what that means, whether that’s sustainable or not, and what that means to the global economy if there’s a fiscal crisis in the US, so I mean, that would have huge ramifications. So it’s something that I’m looking at very closely. Michael, is there anything else on this on this issue that We haven’t covered that you think would be good to, to inject into the conversation before we wrap up? Yeah,

Michael Johnston  50:06

I think I think we’ve kind of covered it here, we’ve kind of been pretty, we’ve been pretty wide ranging here. The one thing I was I was just thinking is we kind of talked about this, this Frankenstein solution where no one thinks the lover moves the needle, but you kind of stitch together enough of them and you start to get there. I think another thing that I’ve seen discussed, is you remove the tax benefits from some of these things like our IRA, or Individual Retirement arrangement, our 401 K plan, I’ve seen that discussed, as well as that’s another way to raise some incremental revenue for the system here is a, you’re no longer gonna get the tax benefits from contributing to a 401k from contributing to an IRA. And we’re gonna funnel that money towards social security instead, it’s a little bit, you know, robbing Peter to pay Paul like to kind of write trying to solve the retirement crisis and saying, Well, we’re going to penalise this type of retirement account to bail out this type of retirement account. But it’s, you know, it’s more it’s kind of more politically palatable, maybe so, you know, I guess in closing, I would say, I hope that this is one of those issues. It’s widely misunderstood. And, you know, I hope that we could kind of have an honest discussion about the merits here, or the merits of the system, where it’s working, where it’s not the pros and cons of the different approaches. I know, that’s incredibly naive, I can kind of feel people rolling their eyes at me saying, you know, this guy thinks we’re gonna have an intelligent conversation about this heated issue. So I know that it’s gonna, it’s going to be political. And it’s going to be a major point of all the campaigns probably for the next several years, but in my heart of hearts, I’ll hold out hope that we can have a an adult conversation and, and fix this sooner than sooner rather than later and come up with a compromise. Yeah,

Gene Tunny  51:54

yeah, I hope so too. Okay, Michael, before we go, your wealth channel, wealth channel Academy, your pitch is becoming or your tagline becoming a millionaire, is easy. And I’ll put a link in the show notes to your site, you say there’s seven basic concepts to understand. So I think, are there any? Is there anything you’d like to say about, you know, what you’re doing with wealth channel that? Yeah,

Michael Johnston  52:25

they Thank you, Dan, I just, I guess, I just like to say, we encourage people to take ownership take ownership of your financial future. So you are not dependent on Social Security, take advantage of these 401 K’s these HSAs IRAs. And, you know, assume you’re gonna get nothing and from from Social Security and take ownership of your financial future. It sounds complicated, it’s really not that complicated once you dive into it. So I’m kind of on a mission to simplify this process for people help them feel more confident with this process of planning for retirement, understand what’s actually going on what they actually need. So, and this is, you know, a great illustration of why so that you hope Social Security will be there, and the full amount you’re expecting, but if it’s not, you’re covered anyways. Right? Yep.

Gene Tunny  53:09

And so if you start saving at a young enough age, and I mean, the math of compound interest shows it’s you know, the earlier you start, the better, and you get so much benefit from starting in your, in your 20s as soon as you’re getting a good or even earlier, or getting a good salary saving, or any sort of salary saving a bit a little bit, or as much as you can, and then that just builds up and compounds over time. And you could be in a situation is it right, where, you know, if you get you could get some social security, but the majority of your income will be from those those assets earnings from those assets. That’s right.

Michael Johnston  53:44

That’s right. It’s you know, there’s, there’s a path for a lot of people to retire with a million dollars in your 401k or a million dollars in your IRA. And exactly what you just said Albert Einstein said that compounding returns are the eighth wonder of the world and he was a pretty smart guy. So good advice to follow. Start, start early. start young and do what you can. Very

Gene Tunny  54:05

good. Okay. Michael Johnson from the from wealth channel. Thanks so much for the conversation. I really enjoyed it.

Michael Johnston  54:12

I did as well. Pleasure to be with you.

Gene Tunny  54:15

rato thanks for listening to this episode of economics explored. If you have any questions, comments or suggestions, please get in touch. I’d love to hear from you. You can send me an email via contact at economics explore.com Or a voicemail via SpeakPipe. You can find the link in the show notes. If you’ve enjoyed the show, I’d be grateful if you could tell anyone you think would be interested about it. Word of mouth is one of the main ways that people learn about the show. Finally, if your podcasting app lets you then please write a review and leave a rating. Thanks for listening. I hope you can join me again next week.

55:02

Thank you for listening we hope you enjoyed the episode for more content like this or to begin your own podcasting journey head on over to obsidian-productions.com

Categories
Podcast episode

Unlocking the Financial Black Box: Transforming Business Efficiency w/ Andrew Walker – EP232

This episode explores the crucial role of efficient financial management in driving business performance and productivity. Guest Andrew Walker, a seasoned financial consultant, shares his extensive experience advising businesses on utilizing data for improved cash flow and strategic decisions. Walker emphasizes the transformation from traditional bookkeeping to strategic financial planning as businesses scale.

Please get in touch with us with any questions, comments and suggestions by emailing us at contact@economicsexplored.com or sending a voice message via https://www.speakpipe.com/economicsexplored

You can listen to the episode via the embedded player below or via podcasting apps including Google PodcastsApple Podcast and Spotify.

About this episode’s guest: Andrew Walker, CEO, Improcus 

Andrew, with over 30 years of executive management and accounting experience, across global and local markets, brings a depth of experience and credibility built across the manufacturing, retail, franchise, construction and transport sectors. Whether as CEO or on the shop floor, Andrew understands the challenges and demands of business. Andrew has an intuitive understanding of business in both financial and functional areas. His work experience includes:

  • CEO of Improcus, a South East Queensland business improvement consultants company/business and has worked with 100 companies in 10 years with an aggregate annual turnover of $1.0b CEO of AAF Industries Plc, a London stock exchange listed company specialising in design, manufacture and installation of modular buildings in Europe. The Group also included a laboratory furniture manufacturing business and a scaffolding division.
  • CFO BTR Dunlop Ltd, listed on the Johannesburg Stock Exchange, responsible for all South African operations and the Financial Controller for Africa reporting to BTR PLc. Turnover R1.0billion
  • Divisional Finance Director of Dorbyl Automotive Components consisting of 16 divisions supplying various automotive components to OEM’s.
  • Financial Controller for the Aberdare Power Group, the largest manufacturer of power cables in South Africa

What’s covered in EP232

  • Introduction (0:00)
  • Streamlining business processes to improve cash flow. (4:15)
  • Automating business processes for efficiency and growth. (9:19)
  • Improving business performance through financial analysis. (13:54)
  • Financial management and growth in a business. (18:30)
  • Financial management and business growth. (23:55)
  • When businesses need a CFO or financial controller. (28:52)
  • Private equity, AI, and business trends. (32:09)
  • Business software and data analysis. (36:22)
  • Business productivity, taxes, and insolvency. (42:37)
  • Financial reporting and cash flow management in businesses. (46:54)

Takeaways

  1. The Peter Principle in Finance: Promotion beyond competence in finance roles can critically hinder a business’s growth. It’s crucial to elevate financial management capabilities as the business scales.
  2. Automation and Efficiency: Leveraging modern software and automating processes can significantly reduce time and errors in financial reporting, enabling quicker strategic decisions.
  3. Strategic Role of Chief Financial Officers: A CFO’s role transcends traditional bookkeeping, focusing on external growth opportunities, mergers, acquisitions, and stakeholder management. Understanding when to transition from a bookkeeper to a CFO is key for business evolution.
  4. Data Utilization for Decision Making: Effective use of data, including forecasting and performance analysis, is essential for driving strategic business decisions and identifying areas for improvement.
  5. Cash Flow Management: Proactive cash flow forecasting and management are critical for navigating financial challenges and seizing opportunities, underscoring the importance of a competent finance department.

Abbreviations used in the show

  • ATO – Australian Taxation Office
  • BOM – Bill of materials
  • CFO – Chief financial officer
  • CV – constant velocity, as in CV joint
  • DIFOT – Delivery in full on time
  • ERP – Enterprise resource planning
  • GST – Goods and Services Tax
  • IPO – Initial public offering
  • PAYG – Pay as you go

Transcript: Unlocking the Financial Black Box: Transforming Business Efficiency w/ Andrew Walker – EP232

N.B. This is a lightly edited version of a transcript originally created using the AI application otter.ai. It may not be 100 percent accurate, but should be pretty close. If you’d like to quote from it, please check the quoted segment in the recording.

Andrew Walker  00:04

I come across businesses, where the bookkeeper who started out with the original owner is now the CFO. And that’s the real old Peter principle that applies to finance departments as well. So, and when you have a person that has been promoted past the level of competency, what happens is they then start employing incompetent people below them.

Gene Tunny  00:33

Welcome to the Economics Explored podcast, a frank and fearless exploration of important economic issues. I’m your host Gene Tunny. I’m a professional economist and former Australian Treasury official. The aim of this show is to help you better understand the big economic issues affecting all our lives. We do this by considering the theory evidence and by hearing a wide range of views. I’m delighted that you can join me for this episode, please check out the show notes for relevant information. Now on to the show. Hello, thanks for tuning into the show. This episode of Economics Explored explores business performance and productivity with our special guest Andrew Walker, a financial consultant who works with businesses to improve efficiency and profitability. Andrew has over 30 years of executive management and accounting experience across global and local markets. He’s advised major companies in the manufacturing retail franchise construction and transport sectors. In this episode, among other insights, Andrew talks about how businesses could better utilise data to improve cash flow and drive strategic decision making. This episode of Economics Explored is brought to you by Lumo coffee Lumo is seriously healthy organic coffee. Lab tests have confirmed that Luma coffee has tripled the amount of healthy antioxidants and poly phenols than regular coffee. Health benefits from these poly phenols include a lower risk of heart disease, anti inflammatory effects, and improved mental and physical performance. Lumo coffee would like to offer economics expert listeners at 20% discount off all coffees for a limited time only until the 30th of April 2024. Go to Lumo coffee.com. And at the checkout, use the code explored 20 That’s all uppercase, X floored and the number to zero for a discount on all Lumo coffee valid until April 3020 20. For that code again explored 20 Check out the show notes for further details. Right. Oh, we’d better get into it. I hope you enjoy my conversation with Andrew Walker. Andrew Walker, thanks for joining me on the programme. Yeah. Good to see you again. Gene. Yes. Excellent to see you, Andrew. So I’ve been along to some of your breakfast. You’re very good at organising people. And you’ve got a really good group here in Brisbane, of business people, people with experience in the practicalities of running businesses and growing businesses. And I’m keen to pick your brain today regarding business performance and business productivity, because as economists we drone on all the time about efficiency and productivity, making a penny Dewar pounds work as my grandfather used to say something very critical, not critical, but a joke about economists. So I’m interested in your reflections as someone who who does work with businesses and advises businesses. What is it that other barriers to high performance? What is it that’s limiting the efficiency? The productivity of businesses, please? Yeah,

Andrew Walker  03:49

well, Gene, I think one of the there’s there’s a number but let’s start off and talk about some of the key ones that I deal with from a financial perspective. For example, inefficient processes. You know, outdated, convoluted processes can slow down the operations, waste, valuable time and resources, inefficient workflows also, and redundant tasks and excessive bureaucracy can contribute to decreased efficiency, and some of these sorts of things. For example, if you remember back in the day of mainframe sales, IBM had a salesperson of business development and design team, a credit approval team, and they were taken up to six months to turn a potential quote into an order. And they actually changed the whole process and made the salesperson, the responsible person to make sure it went through all the departments efficiently, and they reduced the time substantially. So I did some work with a franchisor on his sales process for bringing in franchisees and they were taking exactly the same thing six months around actually trying to vet the people, get them in, talk to them. And if you’ve got good franchisees if They’ve got the money, they want to take the opportunity, they can’t wait six months for somebody to decide whether they’re going to come in. And so we went through a workflow process, identified the issues, and actually cut that right down to one month to get the activity of signing up more franchisees a lot quicker than waiting six months to go through the whole process.

Gene Tunny  05:18

Right? What what sort of business was it that were broadly what industry was

Andrew Walker  05:22

it? I it was in the, in the industry in motor vehicles?

Gene Tunny  05:26

Right. Gotcha. Okay. Right.

Andrew Walker  05:29

You know, and other processes. For example, when we talk about processes, people immediately think about a manufacturing process in an organisation. They are lots of other processes that are actually embedded in the business. For example, I did some work with a large scaffolding business a couple of years ago. And the important thing there was their debtors were, you know, way above what they should be, and we brought them down from I think it was 65 days to I think, 45 days, there was an inflow of $1.6 million in the small business now. That’s, people think, Oh, well, what do you do, but you’ve got to examine the whole process from taking a new a new customer on what’s their credit limit, what’s the process of resolving credit notes quickly and efficiently. And so that you remove all the reasons for them not to not pay the business. And so having identified the process made people accountable within the organisation we were able to bring, the data stays down. And that helped in the sale of the business, because what was happening is we were setting the business up for sale. And the working capital average, when you sell a small business always catches people, because they think that debtors are are going to continue at that high level. And when you bring them down in a sale process, you actually have created an average working capital higher than what you should have. And therefore you’ll end up having to chip money in at the end after the when the deal is done.

Gene Tunny  06:56

Could you just go over that? Again. I’m just trying to make sure I understand that book. So I think you’ve identified a critical issue for any business, which is the cash flow. I mean, cash is king, and a lot of businesses get into trouble because they can’t manage their cash. And you had an example where did you say debtors days? So the people who owe your business money? Was it 60 days or something

Andrew Walker  07:21

like that 60 days, and we had to bring it down to 45 days to bring it in terms. And so if you when you start negotiating the sale of your business, especially with the purchase, I will lock in a date. Yeah. And in order. And through that process, I look at the last 12 months. What is the average working capital? Yeah, and when the actual transaction happened six months later, they use the average working capital. And when you hand over the keys to the business, they then calculate what the working capital is on the day and apply amid the metric to the average working capital of the previous 12 months. And if the working capital is lower than the average 12 months, the seller has to put the money into. So before you sell a business, you’ve got to make sure your balance sheet is actually well organised. The debtors are clear the creditors are always paid in terms that you can have a really good quality working capital base.

Gene Tunny  08:18

Yeah, so you’re gonna get all that lined up. So with the 60 days, on average, they were taking 60 days to pay. Right? So this business wasn’t chasing the invoices up is that right? That they weren’t managing their invoices properly? Well,

Andrew Walker  08:33

there was a lot of issues in there. Because first of all, getting the right customers, okay, don’t take on customers who are probably dodgy. So part of the whole process is, make sure you’ve got good customers. Yeah, make sure they understand your processes, and your terms of trade. And if they have credit notes, it’s important to get those credit notes processed quickly, because that becomes a reason for non payment. Right? What

Gene Tunny  08:57

What do you mean by that? Can

Andrew Walker  08:58

you explain what you mean by if I have the business $100,000 And I’ve got $3,000 I’m queering and questioning because the service didn’t happen or the product wasn’t supplied, or it’s a bad quality product. I use that as a reason not to pay the full 100,000 Yeah, so you know, it’s about processing those credit notes really quickly.

Gene Tunny  09:19

Gotcha. Okay, yeah, sorting, sorting out those issues. And so

Andrew Walker  09:23

another another sort of area is lack of automate automation, in a in a business. And once again, we straightaway think of the factory with robotics and welding and that, but also in the whole financial process, automating all the different systems to produce the financial management report to the end of the month is important. And I had a client this goes back a good few years, and their finance team took 30 days to produce the management reports of the previous month. And it was just out of control. And it was spreadsheets upon spreadsheets upon spreadsheets reconciling, reconciling reconciling and and when you When you when I laid it out on the boardroom table, because the owner didn’t believe this was this was a 30 30 million is probably a 30 40 million business now. I laid everything out on the boardroom table and said, right, you reconsider your team reconciles the spreadsheet to that spreadsheet. And I said, this is a waste of time, I said, let’s just let’s invest in some software changes. And the software changes, push the data from the ERP system straight into the financial system, they were able to produce the reports within three days, which is where you get to real world class standards. Okay,

Gene Tunny  10:33

so just for those of us who aren’t familiar with the lingo, ERP stands for enterprise

Andrew Walker  10:38

resource planning. So it’s the whole, it’s the engine room of the business. So you’d have a financial system. And then you have the engine room. So if it’s a manufacturing business, it’s the bill of materials, it’s the labour, it’s the planning, all of those things around that create the activities, which then create a financial transaction that gets pushed into the financial systems in the business

Gene Tunny  11:01

by their software packages, or applications you’d recommend for this sort of thing? Well, no, it’s

Andrew Walker  11:05

about understand well, what I found in a lot of businesses that are getting involved in is the inefficiency is they’ve bought really good packages, right? The implementation has only a 20% delay, okay. And so it’s about understanding, yeah, people have done and then actually increasing the implementation of those packages up to the right level. And so in this instance, it was using the existing ERP system, changing the report writing, creating the link straight into the financial things. So there was no reconciliations and wasting time, they had a saving because we then were able to let the Financial Controller Go, which was $100,000, salary, wasting time doing all these requests, because that was they were they weren’t adding any value in the business. Yeah, in a perpetual income 100,000 a year, that’s a million dollars in 10 years that you’ve saved by simple small automation within a business. Yeah.

Gene Tunny  12:00

And this is, I mean, this is across the economy, right? This is what I think’s interesting about this, because as economists, we we tend to assume competition, competitive markets, weeds out the inefficient operators. And to an extent that’s true, right? I mean, that’s, that’s obviously true. You do have the situation where there are many businesses that just aren’t living up to their potential. They’re, like 10 or 20% off what their potential is. I don’t know if it’s that high. But for many it could be I mean, there are there a lot of there’s still a lot of inefficiency in business out there.

Andrew Walker  12:30

You know, I was dealing with a fast moving consumer goods business, and they were, they were processing different kinds of sources, which the order would come on a Wednesday, it would be cooked Wednesday night, it would be processed Thursday, it would be on a track Thursday night, into suddenly for the shelves for the weekend shopping. They they Dafydd delivery in full on time was was around 76%. And and you know, that whole process, they had implemented SAP, yeah, but they’ve never taken it into the production area. The production painting was sticky notes or post it notes stuck on production planners wore a telephone note, you know, telephone call and email, open the door, the wind blows, we’ve lost a few levels of

Gene Tunny  13:17

production cafe, right? Yeah,

Andrew Walker  13:19

exactly. And so what happened was, you know, I’ve, I’ve pushed this all out, and we then moved as SAP implementation into the production process. And that then opened it up. And after two months of working with the team there, I’ve got it up to 99%. Three months in a row, we achieved 99% The effort, and we also moved the business away from product centric, to customer centric at the same time, which customer centric had more margins than product centric, because product centric was high volume, this just get hot volume into this.

Gene Tunny  13:53

It’s gonna ask you about this die fight. I haven’t actually heard that expression, or haven’t heard it spelled as or set as die fight. It’s a good one. I understand what what you’re talking about. I mean, that’s 76% that’s, that’s terrible.

Andrew Walker  14:07

There’s more. So what happens is you lose then shelf space in the supermarket, because you’re not there on time. So you, you you get removed from the eye level shopper wants to pick off the comfortable level and you say your shelf space then moves down to the bottom shelf, because other people have got in front of you in terms of your your your space allocation within in the supermarkets and boutique.

Gene Tunny  14:29

Sorry, the supermarkets in the TV boutique shops selling the sources in APA Gotcha. Are they met other benchmarks for what all of these metrics? So you’re, you’re a former or you’ve got experiences as a chief financial officer, is that right? That’s correct. Yeah. And are there benchmarks or commonly accepted benchmark standards for what those data days should be for what die fight should be that sort of thing. Like when you go into a business that you Are you saying, like, based on my experience or based on industry benchmarks, you’ve got to be hitting these key metrics. I think

Andrew Walker  15:08

every business, you’ve got to actually look at it and understand it. You can’t just have a, there’s not a standard, there’s a standard bent benchmark, let’s say 45 days for dead end. But if half of your sales are cash, yeah, then it’s not 45 days, it’s probably 20 days. So when I walk into a business, and I start reviewing it through my model for real improvement, I have a look at that and say, Well, if 50% of your sales are cash, we exclude that out of the calculation. Otherwise, you look pretty good, because you might be reporting 30 days. And if the benchmarks 45, but you’ve got cash at 50% It’s actually misleading. So yeah, and our fight with that fight is about delivery in full on time. Yeah. 100%. Yeah. There’s no question that’s, that’s a standard you need to achieve. And so there are lots of different ratios. And the one has to just examine the business and identify, what are the key ratios and drivers that drive profit in the business?

Gene Tunny  16:06

What was his model for real improvement that you’re talking you’re talking about?

Andrew Walker  16:10

Okay, so I’ve I’ve developed some software offers a German platform, and the software is called jeddaks. And so that actually brings the financial information in. And I’ve developed a one pager that shows how to improve the business by making high level strategic decisions in the business, if I reduced it as days by X days, if I reduce stock by y days, and I put creditors out by another two days, what is the cash impact, but that is using all the historical information. And then I do the same on the profit and loss in terms of sales price increase, volume increase, expense increase, and then that’s all hinged around the DuPont, you’ll probably know the DuPont analysis, going back to the 60s, right created the return on capital employed. And then on top of that, I’ve then introduced cash flow to that to the point analysis, because now when he developed it was about return on investment return on capital employed. Today, it’s all about cash, cash is king, as you said earlier, so I’ve got this model for real improvement, which also helps then link corporate strategy to the financials. And then you develop that if you say you’re going to increase your your turnover by 10%, you then have to drive that in the rest of my modelling down to which product, which customer, what price, what product, what channel, and that then makes people within the organisation at the coalface accountable to the corporate strategy. So that’s the one of the big things that are found. We are very good at vision mission and fluffy stuff. But when it comes in to managing the actual coalface, it gets a bit difficult because it gets blurred. So my model for real improvement then looks at and says, that customer that price in that month on those products goes up by 5%. And that’s how you achieve it. And if you’re not achieving it, then people become answerable on that monthly management sort of review process. Right, which is what happens sometimes in businesses is the turnover goes up 10% For something totally different reasons. The core strategy is never dealt with. But we all pat ourselves on the back saying, Oh, we we achieving our corporate strategy, when in fact, we haven’t addressed the items that was identified at the strategic sort of review. Right,

Gene Tunny  18:30

gotcha. And how do you make sure that the people at the coalface are doing the things that need to be done to hit the targets? I mean, I do go and talk to them. You have dev workshop with them how to,

Andrew Walker  18:43

okay, so I’ve been, I’ve been working with a group of highly intellectual individuals in a business, I like to keep them the name out of the podcasts. And they were very focused around delivering their professional skills to their clients. Yeah, with no concept of profit. And there was just one high level p&l, then actually, and the profit had come down over a number of years. And you know, it was on a reduction, and I got involved to help them. And one of the things I did is turn it on its head and said, Well, hold on. You’ve got regions here, let’s let’s put in regional profit and loss statements, and then make the regional managers accountable. And then in this modelling of mine, I then took it down to how many hours are each of the people going to be working? What is the efficiency? What is the sale rate, what is their cost rate? And so now we’ve got this model that they can actually change every month in terms of this person is going to be off for three weeks or take him outside adjust the turnover. And this modelling then creates the three way financials, cash flow, balance sheet and p&l. And so that date in every, every month we review it and have a look at what’s happening within the business and make adjustments to look at the full We have forecast, as a result of I think, as a result to bring in that to play in the organisation, together with focusing around improving the efficiency of the computer system they’ve got they’ve got a cracking system, but they weren’t even touching the surface in terms of the capabilities of that software. I think the this year if it all goes to plan, we would have trebled the previous year’s operating profit.

Gene Tunny  20:25

Wow. Right. And that’s by giving people a better understanding of, of what actually contributes to the bottom line, what the

Andrew Walker  20:36

there’s an understanding hours rates, cost, expenses, margins, selling price to customers, all those things come into play when you’re having those discussions. Gotcha. Okay.

Gene Tunny  20:47

Are there any other barriers? We’ve been talking about barriers to to higher performance?

Andrew Walker  20:53

Yeah, I think, you know, I’ve got an interesting one. And this is, this is where the company starts out very small, the owner brings in the bookkeeper. And as the business grows, he doesn’t look at the finance department, and let it grow with the business and bringing the right financial level skill. So I come across businesses, where the bookkeeper who started out with the original owner is now the CFO. And that’s the real old Peter Principle and applies to finance departments as well. So and when you have a person that has been promoted past the level of competency, what happens is they then start employing incompetent people below them. And because they can’t afford to do the work because of the level of competency, and this always becomes manual and then and so I have this thing, we all know E because mc squared is speed of light, I say the Peter Principle of competency plussing competencies in competency cube, which is the speed to insolvency. And so and I’ve seen this before, we’re the bookkeeper, you know, rises to that position. So as a business is growing, it’s not a barrier, but it’s been able to recognise that as your business grows, you need to introduce different levels of people within the organisation. So you’d start out with a bookkeeper, maybe you then have the tax accountant to a point sometimes people hold on too long to the tax accountants, as the business is growing. And then you go to a financial controller, or Phantom, CFO, Lakhmi, or who then when it gets big enough, you need a real CFO and people don’t understand what a CFO is, versus a financial controller either, you know, CFOs, external mergers, acquisitions, stakeholder management, etc. And you’ve got to be ready to grow at that level before you start bringing CFOs into your business

Gene Tunny  22:46

for CFOs. You’re you’re about creating possibilities. We’re not just being a bookkeeper. But what are the risks? I mean, you can expand on that, but what are the risks of just having the person who started out as your bookkeeper become? Your effective, you know, become the CFO of as your business expands from being a small business to having, you know, millions or 10s of millions or hundreds of millions in revenue? What are the risks? What can go wrong?

Andrew Walker  23:10

Well, I think that the risks are, that person doesn’t actually grow with the business and start looking at the risk profile. You know, if we talk about a bookkeeper does the accounting the day to day bookkeeping of the business, but as you start growing, you start getting increasing your debtors? What about credit limits? What about the risk profile? What about your insurance? What about the systems as your business is growing? You know, a good CFO strike financial controller will be in the business, he’ll have the accounting work working really well. And a good solid bookkeeper is a person who consistently does the same thing all the time, at a high level of quality. And a good CFO will be across the business looking at systems and processes and thinking outside the box. Yeah, I think that’s the difference, I think. And I say this, and I’ve come up the finance route, so I can be critical of my own professional. Good Financial Controller doesn’t necessarily make a good, a good CFO, in the in the different financial controllers, inwardly focused, producing management reports, running the business. From that point of view, a CFO is looking externally outside the business risk profile opportunity to grow. Yeah.

Gene Tunny  24:22

So on these risks, I’m just so where the businesses get into trouble. I mean, they can I mean, some are just there are some that are going to be unviable. But there are many businesses that that actually end up. You know, they end up basically having to wind up because they mismanaged their cash or that if

Andrew Walker  24:41

you talk to any or most liquidators administrators and you say to them, what is the first impression you have when you walk into one of these distressed businesses? And they’ll tell you 80 to 90% of the time, the finance accounting departments in a mess, right, yeah. And that’s where you then have a bookkeeper who He’s become the CFO doesn’t understand the risks involved in running a much bigger business because their, their, their, their processes around transactional, yeah, processing, invoices credit, all those sorts of things and not looking at the bigger risk. And that’s that’s the real issue with regard to you know, these distressed companies, the accounts are in a mess. So you don’t know your product profitability, your customer profitability, where your market growth are, what’s your gross margin? What’s your breakeven, all those critical things that good? Finance controller Cummins CFO?

Gene Tunny  25:37

Net? Right. Yeah. So you could be losing money? Yeah, you’ve got you haven’t got your you’re not? You’re not selling in the right areas? You haven’t got your pricing, right. You’re not making enough money? Yeah, so yeah. Okay.

Andrew Walker  25:52

And so that comes to to what I call the financial blackbox. Yeah. So before you take off in there are playing on your journey of building this business, know what’s in the in the black box. And that’s around understanding what the financial department does, and how they can add value in your business. A lot of finance departments are seen as an overhead, an extension of the ATO to do the best and the GST and the PAYG, etc. But the finance department in a good business provides really quality information to help people make good decisions around what they do in in their business.

Gene Tunny  26:32

Okay, we’ll take a short break here for a word from our sponsor.

Female speaker  26:37

If you need to crunch the numbers, then get in touch with Adept Economics. We offer you Frank and fearless economic analysis and advice, we can help you with funding submissions, cost benefit analysis, studies, and economic modelling of all sorts. Our head office is in Brisbane, Australia, but we work all over the world, you can get in touch via our website, http://www.adepteconomics.com.au. We’d love to hear from you.

Gene Tunny  27:06

Now back to the show. What are they doing? You’re doing modelling of, of, you know, what different scenarios? Are you thinking about shocks that could hit the business, what sort of works been done in

Andrew Walker  27:21

terms of just a normal. So the way I approach when I look at businesses and I’ve I’ve asked to come in and help, they could be distressed, or they could be growing exceptionally and need some support. The first port of call is the financial system, the financial systems have to be sound and producing accurate quality, timely numbers. And once you’ve got that in place, then you will identify then I start mixing in products, customers, margins, and the non financial elements and merge them together to get some kind of value reporting around. How do you improve the business? Once you’ve got that you can then start doing your ratio analysis and saying, where’s the gaps? Yeah. And then once you’ve got the gaps, and with my modelling, for real improvement, you can then say, what if? What if I put the prices up? And the volume goes down by percent? Or what happens if I put the the volumes up and prices up? What’s the impact, and that then gives you cash flow. But also having identified the gaps. I talked about the p to the power of four, which looks at the process, the process mapping the productivity of the people in that process, the proficiency of those people doing the processes, and then the profit and how the profit is generated. And that that then wraps into a good action plan to help the business go through its problems of getting back to normal profitability again. Yeah,

Gene Tunny  28:52

this is great. So you’re crunching the numbers. I like that. Yeah, because a lot of businesses I mean, they’re, you know, they’ve got founders and the founders, obviously doing something, right. Because they managed to, to grow from just being a micro business and they’re starting to, you know, they’re getting sales and they’re taking on employees, and they’re doing what works for them. But in your experience, you think all on their growth on on their journey through those like I often look at that I watch Dave Ramsey stuff. I don’t agree with everything he says, but I think he’s got some good points. I like his framework for the different stages of the business and how they, they start off with being a mum and dad business. So we get his actual terminology. But you know, the idea is you want to go through these different stages of being a trailblazer and then end up at at legacy and all of that. And I’m just thinking there, I mean, we we’re in the journey of being a business should should, should a business owner be thinking of getting a CFO or going you know, moving in If you’re having a bookkeeper or just having an accountant who helps them out with tax,

Andrew Walker  30:03

yeah, so I think I think it’s an that’s not a simple answer that if I hit this turnover, people have this perception I’m doing 20 million, I need to see it depends on a number of things in the business, you know, if you have a very simple business, which is purely trading, urbanna sell, and it’s a simple transaction, do you really need a CFO in your business, because you’re going to bring the CFO in, he’s not going to actually add the value you want. And invariably, he’s going to get bored. And you’ve wasted the the investment of recruiting somebody who then moves on very shortly afterwards, because it’s a simple business. But when you start getting into, for example, manufacturing, and you’ve got bombs, and you’ve got, you know, having to back flush your bombs in terms of understanding what’s happened in the business, then you should be looking for a financial controller in terms of getting into the nuts and bolts of reporting activities in the factory, the number of tonnes, the tonnes use the scrap, what does that bomb, say? Are we producing more scrap than what the bombs? Do? We need to adjust that that affects our price? What about the process of steel Steel’s gone from it? You know, it went up 25% Down again in the last couple of years. And if you didn’t have somebody on the numbers there, you could have lost a lot of money in an organisation.

Gene Tunny  31:19

What was what were you saying bombs? Will you believe material are sorry?

Andrew Walker  31:25

We’re not going to blog, anything but

Gene Tunny  31:29

materials, materials that

Andrew Walker  31:30

you know, and that’s important. And and then when you in again, back to understanding that the lifecycle of a business Yeah, is there is a point when you’ve established yourself, you’ve got a good business, you’ve got a good product, you know, everything’s good, the culture is good. And you want to now do the big the big expansion, that’s when you start thinking, I need a CFO, if I’m going to IPO it, you know, listed or stake other stakeholders in or I want to exit Yeah, you know, that’s when you need them the CFO. So and it’s not around turnover or number of people, it’s around the type of business and how you operate within that business. Yeah.

Gene Tunny  32:09

As someone who works with a lot of businesses. Do you have any thoughts on this whole, you know, the private equity, sort of, you know, that industry, because I’ve had, well, I’ve had a guest on previously who’s over in Rhode Island. And what he does is he’s looking around for smaller businesses that he can come in, and he can take over and then and then sell at a later date improve things. So I’m just wondering, do you have any, do you have any thoughts on that? I mean, like, there’s a lot of, you know, there’s a lot of negativity out there about private equity, there are people sceptical over there are people who accuse private equity investors have been vultures. Any thoughts on private equity at all? Andrew, I

Andrew Walker  32:57

think I think back everything, this is a spectrum of private equity companies. And if I could define it in the, at one end of the scale, they probably private equity, who want to buy a good business, and they can offer their investors a better return. So they don’t actually do anything, they try and buy low, and then they provide a bigger return. So if you, if you’re in high net worth individual, and you’ve got a couple of million, you want to check in with some of your mates, you can buy business, and you’ll probably get a better return than you would with the banks. But there’s obviously risk with that. So you get private equity that fill that space, and then manage the company. And sometimes you do find, you know, private equities, they have it for three or four years, and then they flick it on to another private equity, and it just keeps rolling around in terms of, but what they’re doing is giving their their investors a better return than what they would have got elsewhere. So that’s the one scale. Yeah, he got to the other scale, you get the private equity, who are looking for the roller. So for example, there have been a few good ones like that the vets the greed, CrossFit story, where they went around and rounded up all the small private vets and brought them into a single group got purchasing power, and helped them with their business, streamline their processes, and then IPO that and made a lot of money out of it. So you get to two scales and like everything, there’s good accountants, but I in my presentations, I have the good, the ugly, what’s the good, the bad and the ugly? And in that spectrum, you know, it’s the it’s a wide spectrum of people out there all looking to make some money and it’s how they do it.

Gene Tunny  34:40

Yeah, gotcha. Okay. Okay. Now, what are the big business trends you’re seeing at the moment? Andrew, do you have any thoughts on AI, for example, how that’s impacting Oh,

Andrew Walker  34:52

that’s, uh, I think in my area, I think we’ve got a long way to go. You know, everybody’s got this buzzword and we can all look up chat, GP or PIO, and get a big download of a whole lot of stuff. And I think we smart. But I think in the finance world, we’ve got this great opportunity to actually develop AI. But it’s going to take, you have to teach AI to produce what you want, for example, so analysing businesses, financial businesses, and then using AI, to, to benchmark that business against the local industry, in terms of what’s out there. And the National, and maybe the international share prices, exchange rates, all those things could have a big impact as your business is growing to use AI to, to give you some kind of understanding on what to do within your business. But I think we saw a long way before we get to that. I mean, AI is getting implemented in a lot of the software to be able to do that now and the software that I’m using jet ox, they’ve got a module on AI. And so you know, we, the, the corporate performance models are really starting to introduce that. But I think we slow way off. But it’s going to be like steel, steel, steel belt tires versus Canvas, you know, what’s ever going to happen. And when they crossed, it was almost exponentially he went to steel belt. So I think there’s going to be a point where AI will just really take off. Yeah, so what’s jet ox again, that jet ox is the software I use to do that I’ve used to develop my modelling. So it’s a big corporate performance management software, right, that big corporations are using in terms of producing this new way financials, their dashboards, because it can drill into different systems, financial, non financial, the ERP systems, and pull that data in and then create dashboards for for managers and team leaders and supervisors to see where they’re going. But then it also links it to the financial, so then you can start pulling your financial in and have really good quality ratios around using non financial data and financial data and creating activities around how do I improve the

Gene Tunny  37:07

business? Gotcha. Now this, hopefully, you can answer this, I think you can answer this question because it’s something I’ve always wondered. And I’ve sort of vaguely a sort of a vague understanding of what SAP or SAP is that system, what is it and how does it relate to the jet ox? Okay,

Andrew Walker  37:24

so, yeah, that’s, that’s an interesting question, because it blows open a hole. Right? In terms of, if we start on the other end of the scale, you’ve got my OB, and you’ve got zero and all these packages. And they produce financial results. And then what they’ve done is they’ve linked other applications or apps to create other kinds of things around the financials, the payroll, or CRM packages, Customer Relationship Management packages. And that’s it. It’s a very small thing. S AP is right at the top where they try and do all of that for you in one package. Right? Which makes it really expensive. Yeah, because then you also almost are actually customising the software to suit your business. Yes. And the business has changed. I think in Australia, there’s a lot of small to medium sized businesses and SAP are now coming up with as it was, I don’t know how long it’s been out. But it’s a PB one, which is for smaller businesses. Because I’ve seen there’s an opportunity in the market. But you know, all the software you finding, they can’t cater for everything, you’d have a really good software package that looks after an engineering shop is a cut up so they’d have the nesting of how you cut your, your laser cutter to not only one big sheet of steel, you’d want to nest all the products on once you get maximum use of the steel. And all so that’s been designed by a really intelligent engineer understanding that business Yeah, but he has no idea of financials or raw customer relationship. So then you have these add ons. Yeah, where’s SAP tries to do everything in one raw. Okay, so jet oxen sits on top of those, that software not not SAP, where you’ve got an ERP system, you’ve got Salesforce manager, you’ve got a financial package with sage or BB or QuickBooks or NetSuite, whatever it is, and you can draw it and he’s competing in, in the space of Power BI, which I don’t really write in terms of raw of widget oxes because jeddaks is right up there with some of the top players.

Gene Tunny  39:43

Okay, I’m gonna have to look at jedoch so I haven’t come across it before.

Andrew Walker  39:47

It’s new in Australia. Yeah, um, practice. One of the gold partners of Jeddaks

Gene Tunny  39:53

Oh, great. Yeah. Okay. Yeah, definitely have to check it out. I think what what you’re This discussion is highlighting to me just how challenging it is really, if you’re in a corporation, you’re in a business or any, you know, even an SME, just how challenging it is getting across all of the data or the financial and performance information within your business. And that’s why you need to have those systems and you need someone like yourself or, or a team that can actually drive it and make sure all the data are sort of, you’re getting the data you need, and is producing those reports that are necessary to make the decision so you can move in time to take advantage of the opportunities

Andrew Walker  40:35

that are in that it’s very interesting, because there’s so much data coming at us new skill, in my view, is is how to interpret that data quickly. Yeah, and get it in a succinct format to make decisions. Yeah, and now you get in every way you look, whatever you’re doing, there’s a data recording. When you’re shopping at Coles or woollies, or you know, all that’s happening all the time. And so those suppliers, and those manufacturers and producers are getting all that data and there’s a there’s an opportunity or not an opportunity. But it’s it’s a problem, because you can end up with data overload. Ron and organisation. So you’ve got to have the skill to be saying, what data do I need out of all this data? And how do I best presented to understand what’s happening in a trend? Or and then make decisions on it? Yeah, and just coming back to your previous question, genius, you have all these systems. And what I believe is, you’ve got to create the electronic thread through your business. And that that thread takes every single system and it weaves its way through. And once you get this electronic thread, you’re actually creating a competitive advantage that nobody can steal. If you make a product, people will take the product, they’ll reengineer it, they’ll ship it to an offshore country, and have it manufactured and come in and smash your costs to your selling price and, and take your market. But if you’re a business, and you’ve got an electronic pipeline, that links your front end of the business, the customer end right down to cash in the bank, the inquiry all the way through to cash in the bank. And if you if you work on getting that really efficient, what it does is nobody can steal it, they can steal people out of your organisation, but that could actually creates a really good culture. And it also then what it does, it makes your systems efficient. So you can put more volume through that swelling the belly. Andrew, do you have any? And

Gene Tunny  42:37

I know this is almost an impossible question to answer. But do you have any feeling for what you know what percentage improvement across industries we could get from? You know, just sorting this sort of stuff out? Right? For, you know, among, among businesses out there? Because it sounds like, look, there are a lot of the sounds, it sounds like there’s potentially a lot of inefficiency or a lot of bad processes that that need to be fixed up across businesses in even in advanced economies, such as Australia. I mean, obviously, we’re, we’re probably far ahead of businesses and some other countries, but what’s the what’s Do you have a general feel for that?

Andrew Walker  43:16

Ah, I think in the businesses operating with small to medium, you know, Bologna, 100 million turnover. Every business, I walk into this opportunity, every single and but the problem is, is people don’t recognise that the owners believe the business they’ve created, they’ve developed it, and you’ve got to have a catastrophic event to happen for them to say, I need help. And that’s, you know, where were you then get the introduction into going into these businesses, and then creating the opportunity? I think, in every single business I’ve worked in over the last 1617 years in Australia, I’ve created increased wealth for for the owners, what percentage and how does that relate from, from your point of view of the macro environment? I couldn’t I wouldn’t even ever guess at a time. That’s

Gene Tunny  44:06

okay. It’s one of those very difficult questions to answer. I’ll have to look to the economic literature and see if anyone’s tried to quantify that that recently, because there are all sorts of studies of, of, you know, how far firms are from the world’s best practice, or you know, what they call the efficiency frontier? Yep. So I might go back and look at that literature and see what that says, but just just chatting with you. It occurs to me too. I mean, yeah, there could be some real productivity gains that we could make in our economy. And that gets me thinking. And, you know, if you’re thinking productivity, you probably shouldn’t then government, but is there is there anything government should be doing? Are there any policy levers that should be that could be pulled or changes in In tax or regulatory settings, do you have any thoughts on that? You’ve gotten

Andrew Walker  45:04

into the big macro worlds? Yeah, in terms of taxes and reducing taxes. And, and that’s those are all very complex discussions to bring down into something simple. I think, you know, I said to most of my clients say always bitching about paying too much tax. Yeah, I say to them, You know what, the more tax you paint means you’re more successful. So let’s get away from, you know, worrying about that to focus on your business, and drive your business rather than worrying about tax and regulations and things like that. Yeah,

Gene Tunny  45:35

I think that’s a really good point. Now, just going back to our discussion of the risks, and one of the risks is, you’re not you’re not managing your cash, well, you’re not actually accounting properly for the fact you will owe tax in the future. And so so many businesses get into into trouble like that. And now the ATO our tax, our Australian Taxation Office, they’re chasing our businesses, and they’ve been pretty hard headed. Yeah, really aggressive about it. And then that’s what’s driving up the insolvencies to an extent here,

Andrew Walker  46:06

I think that’s a bit of a lag from the COVID era that people businesses that should have gone, gone to the wall then survived through job keeper, those sorts of things. And but I think we now seen that and we also seen the person insolvency starting to come through they also up a lot higher compared to the previous year. Yeah, I think that’s a hangover from the COVID days. Yeah. But you know, I mean, if you look at what why did why businesses, why did they go insolvent or be put into administration? And I would say, 80 to 90% of the time, it’s management, it’s bad management in the organisation, you’re going to have catastrophic events, major data fails on you. But as management, you would have seen it, it’s a large data. How did you do the risks? What risks did you take? Did you take insurance on it? So? Yeah, I think that yeah, in terms of, of businesses, and risks, and cash, if you’re running your business well, and you can see the margins and you’re getting monthly reporting happening, that is where you actually drive the business. But if you have a bookkeeper who’s been doing the work and is now in that elevated position, they don’t understand the importance of of producing results three or four days after month in and out of interest from Alan Jackson and and if you know Alan Jackson, he used to sit on the reserve, the Australian Reserve Bank, O ra going back, I don’t know 2025 years ago, when I was going through the BTR thing I had to ask the comptroller for Africa for Dunlop, and three days off the mantained i to produce to London, a set of turnover and operating profits for the Dunlop business in Africa. Yeah, in seven days, I had to produce a set of financials three way with the reconciliation waterfall analysis. And by day 10 We were in the boardroom was Alan Jackson and he wasn’t a con man. He was a real driver. He took the business from, I think about 700 million to $3.4 billion and increased operating profit from I think 14% of sales up to 16%. So he drove that business but one of the real principles on that was monthly financial reporting as quickly as possible and if you didn’t get it I tell you the phone was red hot. Yeah,

Gene Tunny  48:25

so just what was the abbreviation BTR a

Andrew Walker  48:29

Bter? BT and Alex I think Australia as BT in the UK, the listing was BT RPL and yeah, so um, Dunlop. They had a lot of businesses. The African element was, was all around the Dunlop products Slazenger, golf balls, cricket pads, rubber conveyors and all that sort of thing. We used to call it blood tears and repression. And Alan Jackson was, yeah, Alan

Gene Tunny  48:56

Jackson was the CEO to look at look it up. And that it was that an operating profit? Increase? You’re talking about like it sounded. There was hugely impressive. Do you know how that roughly what he did? I mean, it was at all he went on acquisitions.

Andrew Walker  49:11

Right. And he grew the business through acquisitions. But then there was a very strong once I’ve taken over a business, I had a very clear plan. Yeah, this is what’s going to happen. That done the due diligence properly, okay, people that needed to go left on the day, they had the team that were taking over stepping in. And then I had the financial performance, the last three years driven to their standard, and you were expected by the next month to be reporting in their level and they reviewed him and he’s his CFO, Kathleen O’Donovan. Yeah, they used to just keep going around the world. All the locations, so we, we, we’d seem Tinder is regularly or every month in and they would be going through our financials because they had standard throughout the world. So yeah, say the financials in a When I was running the Zimbabwean business we had, we had, we had a coffin business in Zimbabwe, it was prospering because of the, the Isaac. But we had a set of financials, which would have been the same as a company in Coventry, producing CV joints. And that’s how they drive the business. And that’s why finance departments and good financial people in your organisation are important to take it to the next level.

Gene Tunny  50:26

Yeah, it sounds like they were very hands on. You said they were travelling and visiting the businesses. Yeah. Yeah. That’s fascinating. Yeah, not to have to look, look more into that. Anything else we’ve we’ve missed Andrew. I mean, I’ve enjoyed learning about all of this. And it’s, it’s made me think more about the the, you know, the importance of understanding your what is driving profitability, and really getting across that. And then all of the data, the the number crunching that needs to be done, and

Andrew Walker  50:57

let’s come in, as I’ve just said, every month, you’ve got to be reviewing that every month, because people they get one month, and then it just wanes, going to have that, that, that good discipline, and routine happening in your business to then take action to make sure you you’re taking the action in a timely manner. The other thing I think, is, what I found is a lot of businesses don’t actually look at cash flow. And then try and project it forward and come across a lot of financial people, it’s too hard to forecast your cash. Well, no, you do the best you’ve got with the current information. And then you keep tweaking it. And every time you’re doing that you’re getting better at it. And I always say to my clients, when I come on board with them, let’s get the cash flow, three months, six months ahead. So we can know in three or four months time we’re going to hit a problem. Yeah, you can deal with it now. Other discount your products, get cash in or, or have a chat to the ATO and try and extend your terms of payment or whatever, or talk to the landlord. There’s lots of ways to manage your cash and that seems to be lacking. Yeah.

Gene Tunny  52:01

I mean, I do that myself in my business. Just because I’ve learned what one I’ve learned from experience, it’s important to do it and, and to we also did it in in government in Treasury because we needed to make sure that the the Australian Government had enough money, like day to day in the, in the official public account, the Reserve Bank, so the the team at the Australian Office of Financial Management used to do a detailed daily cash forecast for the Australian Government. And yeah, they, you know, they managed to do it. And, you know, the Australian Government is being hit by all sorts of shocks all the time. So, yeah, I think the Australian government can do it, your own small business can do it. That’s a lot less complicated than the Australian Government. I’m

Andrew Walker  52:45

sure it is. But yeah, but that’s a key element of of understanding your business. And that’s from the finance department.

Gene Tunny  52:51

Yeah, absolutely. Okay, Andrew, this has been terrific. Any anything? We’ve missed anything else you’d like to add?

Andrew Walker  52:57

Um, no, not really. I think I mean, there’s a lot of topics we could feel like talking down going down different elements of this. But yeah, and I think for business now is, you know, if we look at it, look at your finance department. And I’ve been doing some, some presentations to different groups around the blank box, opening the financial blank. And I get, I get the CEOs that come to the thing, the presentation to score the finance departments in two different ways that gut feel, yeah. And then score on performance around management accounts. How long do they take? Budgeting, forecasting? zero based budget? All those things? Yeah. And I think I’ve probably, I’ve just I’ve had present, I’ve done presentations to probably about, it must be in excess of a billion dollars of companies all added up an annual turnover. And, you know, What surprises me is it’s 50%, the satisfaction ratio of the CEO, and his finance department is a 50% level. That is, that is frightening.

Gene Tunny  54:06

Yeah, at the moment that the current labour for you

Andrew Walker  54:09

Yeah. And then I go through the whole process with them. And then, and then are related back. How much are you paying these people? Yeah, and you only have 50%. And it’s funny, I said to the one guy said, If you bought if you bought your fancy Maserati, yeah. And then any came was one wheel, how would you feel about it? So, you know, you’ve rented your finance department at 50% value producing the car with two wheels, you know, and so, and I think that’s where I have a problem. It’s my own profession, you know, but I think there’s a really there’s no real standard in in in how financial departments should perform. You look at it manufacturing, they have to produce the product with quality, service with quality or the report with quality. When it comes to the finance department. The scale of a printout out of the system, which is used is used There’s a chocolate via God to a proper set of financials. It is just so broad and a lot of CEOs don’t actually understand it. And so I spent a lot of time on doing presentations to make people aware. What should a good financial department deliver? Okay,

Gene Tunny  55:15

I want to put some links into if there are any presentations you’ve got in the public domain, Andrew, I can put links to them. And I’ll also put a glossary and we’ve covered some yeah, there’s some interesting new terms the the delivery in full on time the die fight. I love that. I’m going to start using that. And the bomb the vom the bill of materials. That’s a good one, too. Very good. Okay. Henry Walker. Thanks so much for your time. I really enjoyed the conversation.

Andrew Walker  55:44

Yeah, that was good to be a gene and always happy to come back and maybe explore a sliver of dollars because there’s a lot of detail in this. Absolutely.

Gene Tunny  55:52

I think I think we might have to do that. So Andrew again, thanks so much. Yeah, thank you, Rod. Oh, thanks for listening to this episode of Economics Explored. If you have any questions, comments or suggestions, please get in touch. I’d love to hear from you. You can send me an email via contact@economicsexplored.com Or a voicemail via SpeakPipe. You can find the link in the show notes. If you’ve enjoyed the show, I’d be grateful if you could tell anyone you think would be interested about it. Word of mouth is one of the main ways that people learn about the show. Finally, if you’re podcasting outlets you then please write a review and leave a rating. Thanks for listening. I hope you can join me again next week.

56:46

Thank you for listening. We hope you enjoyed the episode. For more content like this or to begin your own podcasting journey. Head on over to obsidian-productions.com

Credits

Thanks to Obsidian Productions for mixing the episode and to the show’s sponsor, Gene’s consultancy business www.adepteconomics.com.au. Full transcripts are available a few days after the episode is first published at www.economicsexplored.com. Economics Explored is available via Apple PodcastsGoogle Podcast, and other podcasting platforms.

Categories
Podcast episode

Alternative Investments & Investable Mega-Trends w/ Ben Fraser, Aspen Funds – EP231

Ben Fraser, Managing Director of Aspen Funds, argues “there’s a huge opportunity to get into fossil fuel production.” He discusses macro-driven alternative investments, investable megatrends, including the disruption to energy markets as advanced economies decarbonise, and the outlook for the US economy, particularly inflation. Disclaimer: this episode presents general information only and is not financial or investment advice. 

Please get in touch with us with any questions, comments and suggestions by emailing us at contact@economicsexplored.com or sending a voice message via https://www.speakpipe.com/economicsexplored

You can listen to the episode via the embedded player below or via podcasting apps including Google PodcastsApple Podcast and Spotify.

About this episode’s guest: Ben Fraser 

Ben Fraser is the Chief Investment Officer at Aspen Funds, where he combines his analytical nature with a passion for delivering outstanding client service and strong returns through out-of-the-box investments. With a professional background that spans over a decade, Ben has become an expert in the field of investment management and has worked for several reputable financial institutions.

Ben is the co-host of the Invest Like a Billionaire podcast, where he joins his father, Robert, co-founder and CFO of Aspen Funds, along with co-founder Jim Maffuccio, to discuss economic trends and best practices for alternative investing.

Prior to joining Aspen, Ben served as a Commercial Lender at First Business Bank, one of the top SBA lenders in the nation. There, he specialized in government-backed loan originations, specifically SBA and USDA loans. Before that, he worked as a Commercial Credit Underwriter for Crossfirst Bank, where he personally underwrote over $125MM in C&I and CRE loans across various industries.

Ben also has experience working in the asset management industry, having served as a key member of the team at Tortoise Capital Advisors. At Tortoise, he helped grow institutional managed accounts from ~$3BN AUM to ~$7BN AUM.

Ben holds an MBA from Azusa Pacific University and a Bachelor of Science in Finance from the University of Kansas, where he graduated magna cum laude. Ben’s commitment to excellence and his ability to deliver strong returns for clients make him an invaluable asset to the Aspen Funds team.

What’s covered in EP231

  • 00:00:04 – Global Energy from Fossil Fuels (excerpt from interview)
  • 00:00:33 – Introduction to Economics Explored Podcast
  • 00:01:06 – Guest Introduction: Ben Fraser of Aspen Funds
  • 00:02:08 – Aspen Funds’ Investment Focus
  • 00:05:17 – Accredited Investors and Investment Opportunities
  • 00:06:04 – Expanding Accredited Investor Definitions
  • 00:08:47 – Alternative Investments and Client Strategy
  • 00:11:29 – Investable Megatrends for the Next Decade
  • 00:13:03 – Inflation and Energy Market Outlook
  • 00:15:37 – Private Credit in Real Estate
  • 00:20:37 – Commercial Real Estate Market Dynamics
  • 00:23:42 – Energy Investments and Fossil Fuel Outlook
  • 00:29:10 – OPEC’s Influence on Oil Prices
  • 00:31:28 – Gold, Bitcoin, and Investment Hedges
  • 00:35:09 – US Fiscal Policy and Debt Concerns
  • 00:38:40 – Closing Remarks

Takeaways

  1. Macro-Driven Alternative Investments: Aspen Funds focuses on macro-driven alternative investments, which involve understanding long-term economic trends to identify investment opportunities.
  2. Investable Megatrends: Aspen Funds has identified investable megatrends for the next decade, including higher inflation for longer and an energy crisis due to a transition to green energy.
  3. Opportunities in Real Estate: Aspen Funds sees opportunities in private credit within the real estate market, particularly in the midsection of the capital stack, where risk can be reduced while achieving good returns.
  4. Energy Market Insights: Ben Fraser discusses the impact of transitioning to green energy on fossil fuel production, highlighting potential supply shortages and investment opportunities in fossil fuel production.
  5. Views on Gold and Bitcoin: Ben Fraser comments on gold and Bitcoin as alternative investments, acknowledging their role as hedges against fiat currency but cautioning against heavy allocations due to the risks involved.

Links relevant to the conversation

Aspen Funds

Invest Like a Billionaire Podcast 

Transcript: Alternative Investments & Investable Mega-Trends w/ Ben Fraser, Aspen Funds – EP231

N.B. This is a lightly edited version of a transcript originally created using the AI application otter.ai. It may not be 100 percent accurate, but should be pretty close. If you’d like to quote from it, please check the quoted segment in the recording.

Ben Fraser  00:04

Right now about I think it’s 83% of all of our global energy needs come from fossil fuels. And that’s usually pretty shocking number for people to hear. They think we’re way farther along. Right. You mentioned nucular, which I’m a huge proponent of, but that only makes up I think it’s less than 5% of total global energy needs.

Gene Tunny  00:33

Welcome to the economics explored podcast, a frank and fearless exploration of important economic issues. I’m your host gene Tunny. I’m a professional economist and former Australian Treasury official. The aim of this show is to help you better understand the big economic issues affecting all our lives. We do this by considering the theory evidence and by hearing a wide range of views. I’m delighted that you can join me for this episode, please check out the show notes for relevant information. Now on to the show. Hello, thanks for tuning in to the show. This episode, we’re joined by Ben Fraser, Managing Director and Chief Investment Officer of aspen funds, which offers alternative investment opportunities for accredited investors that concentrates on real estate credit and energy markets. In this episode, Ben explains what he means by macro driven alternative investments. Ben and I discuss what he sees as investable mega trends. And we also talk about the outlook for interest rates in the US economy. Among other things, venture is some great insights into what’s coming up in energy markets as advanced economies decarbonize right, oh, we’d better get into it. I hope you enjoy my conversation with Ben Fraser of aspen funds. Then Fraser from Aspen fans, welcome to the programme.

Ben Fraser  01:50

Hey, thanks for having me, Jean.

Gene Tunny  01:52

Oh, it’s good to have you on Ben. And I’ve been listening to episodes of your invest like a billionaire podcast that you do with your father. So good work on that. And I’ve got a couple of questions coming from that, to start with grass. Q, what’s the what’s the pitch of aspen fans? Like, based on what I’ve seen, you’re focused on macro driven alternative investments. What do you mean by that, then?

Ben Fraser  02:21

Yeah, well, great question. And, you know, it really kind of ties in both to our podcast platform as well as what we do on the investment side. But the podcast invests like a billionaire is really intended to educate, you know, what I call the everyday millionaire strategies and tactics that the ultra wealthy are using, and have been using for many, many decades in growing and preserving their wealth. And usually, the biggest difference for what we find from the ultra wealthy calm institutional investors, family offices, the endowments, and pensions, relative to say the retail or the everyday millionaire, is the allocation to alternative investments, and specifically private alternatives. And that usually is comprised of the private equity, hedge funds and real estate really being one of the bigger ones. And so what we’ve found is there’s a huge gap of knowledge for the retail investors in understanding how to invest these asset classes. That’s really kind of what we we focus on. But then comes the question of, well, where do I invest, because there’s a myriad of opportunities to invest in kind of the alternative space. So then we use our framework that we tagged, you know, macro driven alternative investments, and really comes from the experience a lot from my father’s background, which we could talk a little bit about this, this driven kind of focus here of our economic themes. But really, the whole idea behind the tides are different than the waves, right? We can understand that there’s economic tides that are you know, seismic level shifts that happen usually over a slow period of time like these, these tectonic plates that are shifting, right. And we don’t really necessarily does nothing big are kind of boring, you kind of see it happening. But those create the the tailwinds the rising tide that lifts all boats that position you if you’re as an investor in pay attention to these, and a way to outperform because of where you’re positioned. And so what we usually kind of use that phrase for macro driven is we’re looking at it top down approach, we’re looking at what are the long term economic trends that are creating opportunities that then we can take advantage of as investors and outperform over a period of time from a allocation perspective, not just a individual investment perspective? Rod

Gene Tunny  04:58

Okay. So, your, your clients, the people who invest with you, you’re focused on accredited investors, is that right? So that’s a segment of the market where people have a particular level of income or level of net worth, is that correct? Right?

Ben Fraser  05:16

Yeah. So you’re in the US, we have a definition called accredited investors. And that’s basically driven by the SEC that says, you have to meet some minimum requirements to be able to invest in a lot of these types of deals. And so it’s really kind of driven from the regulation side of it, though, we do try to educate people that aren’t quite there, you know, the not quite yet accredited, because there are opportunities, and we actually believe the expansion of that definition will continue to go downstream. Because some of the changes they’ve made to the rules for accreditation have actually been expansionary to include more people over the past decade. And so we’re hopeful that they continue to make it more accessible for people. Yeah,

Gene Tunny  06:04

yeah, I’m interested in that, because I’ve been listening to Tony Robbins, his latest book, The Holy Grail of investing. And I mean, he has a case talking about the value of alternative investments. And he’s saying that a lot of people are locked out of them. Because of they don’t meet this accredited investor threshold. And I think he mentioned that there is or there was an act of Congress last year that is requiring the SEC to now bring in a test whereby you can establish your credentials as an accredited investor, if you pass the test to do you know where that’s up to you? Is that something you’re following, then? Absolutely, yeah,

Ben Fraser  06:46

that’s, that’s a pretty big deal. That’s kind of what I was referring to is, you know, from, from our standpoint, having a certain number financially, whether the income you make or the net worth you have is is an okay proxy to establish? Are you sophisticated enough to invest in something as gentle if you have to make a good amount of money and you have a lot of money? You know, theoretically, you’re, you’re, you’re smart enough to make these decisions. But what about the people that have studied this as a career and they’re maybe earlier in their career, and they want to make inroads into the alternative space, they’re trying to expand it based on knowledge, not just purely based on financial status. And so I don’t know the exact status of over that sat, it seems to me from what I’ve read recently, that that is either in play currently or about to be in play as an option. So it still requires a test, right. And there’s, you know, something you have to pass, I don’t think it’s terribly difficult, but it is an extra layer. But by doing that, you can, theoretically become accredited just through passing a test. Now, they’ve also included, they did this couple of years back where they, if you worked for a provider of alternative investments and operator or sponsor, after one year anniversary, you become what’s called a knowledgeable employee, to where you now have access to invest as an accredited investor into these types of investments that are being offered by your firm. And so, you know, I’ve told young people and love people that work for me, you know, I’m encouraging them to hit that one year mark, as to, hey, you’re now credited. So, you know, we’re going to try and wait minimums, or we can and make it easier for you to participate in a way that it’s comfortable for you at this point. But yeah, there’s definitely a cool trend for that. And we’re hoping that it continues, because there’s definitely some pretty big advantages when investing in alternatives. Right

Gene Tunny  08:47

now, I mean, the alternative investments so they can bring higher returns, obviously, there’s higher risk associated with that. Well, how does it work? I mean, if I come to you, so say, I’m a high net worth individual and I come to you and invest the funds, I come to Aspen funds, do we sit down? Or do you work out a portfolio? Do you say, you work out there’s this allocation, alternative investments is this much in domestic equities, this much international this much fixed income? How does that work? Ben?

Ben Fraser  09:18

Yeah, you know, it’s probably a little bit different than what you’re describing sounds more like meeting with a financial advisor. And, you know, to be clear, we’re not financial advisors. We don’t ever anticipate being that and I think there’s a role for a financial adviser, though, I do think a lot of the big shops they just kind of create echo chambers that don’t really know what they’re talking about and they just spout here’s the three things you should do. And honestly, isn’t that helpful, but we actually work with a lot of investment advisors that understand the importance of alternatives in a portfolio and actually are pretty big feeder system for us to help their clients allocate to what we’re working on. But you know, Working with us, it’s it’s a little bit different in the sense of, we have a few different opportunities, right, and we try to present here’s the characteristics of both the risk and the reward of each set of opportunities. Here’s the reason why we like you, I believe it. But ultimately, it’s up to you to decide what fits your investment profile, what fits the status of where you’re at, in your career, and your areas, spectrum and all those kinds of things, then, you know, we can help provide information, but we actually legally cannot give advice because we’re not advisors. So it’s really more of a here’s, here’s all the options, you get to pick and choose what what works best for you. And I always recommend, right finding an advisor that likes alternatives can be actually a great resource because they can help you not only on the portfolio allocation standpoint, a lot of times they can help you on the tax implications, and the basic financial planning of say, a budget and those kind of things. Estate planning, asset protection, a lot of broader topics that are important, but way outside the scope of what I’m an expert in, right.

Gene Tunny  11:06

Okay, gotcha. On your website on the Aspen funds website, which I’ll link to, in the show notes, or might have been on your podcast website, you’ve got the there’s a webinar about investable mega trends for the next decade. Could you tell us so what are some of those mega trends that you’re looking out for?

Ben Fraser  11:29

Yeah, so it kind of stems back from our approach of finding the best opportunities. And, you know, what’s, what’s different about us and maybe other operators, or sponsors of investment offerings is we’re not a hammer and everything is a nail, right? Well we try to do is identify where are the opportunities first, right, without any dog in the fight without us forcing a square peg into a round hole. And then we’ll actually create the strategies, build the teams, and put together these kind of investor friendly structures. And in terms to put together an offer that fits is supported by by these trends. So for us, it really comes down to where do we really believe the opportunity is because that sets the, the, you know, the next levels of dominoes to determine what how we present offerings for investors. And so, our research, we kind of consolidated into what we call an investable megatrends for the next decade. And so we these are trends that we believe are in play right now, and will be in play for a long period of time, that are really shaping the economy, and both right now and in the future. And those that are standing up, see this, and position themselves will be rewarded by the market. And so that’s really how we’re looking at it, you know, some of the things and we have a whole presentation, it’s a very long presentation. So I won’t get to all the details in this interview. But you know, some of the snippets, and we’ve been saying this for a little while, is we believe inflation is going to be higher for longer. And that has now become more popular sentiment. But you know, was it for for a period of time where inflation is more transitory. This is a short term phenomena. And there’s really two reasons that we believe are driving inflation likely been higher for longer. And this is, again, mostly in the US. But one of those being the huge labour shortage. And so we’ve really, since COVID, ended pressures in the BNF cover, we had a huge spike in unemployment. And then that kind of came down. There’s an interesting chart that we have in our presentations that, you know, shows there’s this huge gap that has continued to grow over the course of the past year to have job openings relative to those looking for full time employment. And it’s a pretty big gap by a factor of a million to several million job openings that can’t be filled. And a lot of it’s because the labour left the market after COVID, a lot of late stage career, folks took early retirement, a lot of dual income families went to single income and one of the spouses decide to stay home. And so the reason that’s important is the labour shortage puts a lot of pressure on wages increasing, which is very inflationary, because the primary driver of GDP is consumer spending. And so if the consumer continues to have more earnings, and they continue to spend that that will continue to contribute to a higher inflation number. And the other one is really we think it’s playing out right now, but we haven’t seen we go into the early stages of it and we think we’re at the early stages of a an energy crisis that we hadn’t seen in a long time. And it’s really going to be driven by a supply shortage of fossil fuels. As we’re making a transition into more green energy, renewable energy sources that is really being driven by a political narrative that, hey, as best as well, attention at its worst is creating a huge gap of understanding what it’s going to take to make this transition. And really putting ourselves in a really bad position from a production and supply standpoint of fossil fuels over the next several decades that we believe is going to be pretty, pretty severe.

Gene Tunny  15:38

Right? Yeah. Yeah. I mean, we’ve got some of the world that energy issue here, arguably in Australia to their concerns about reliability of the network as our coal fired, power stations are decommissioned or shut down over the next couple of decades. And so that’s, that’s a big issue were grappling with here at the moment. And there’s a big debate about nuclear energy, and whether that’s an alternative and that that’s becoming incredibly political. Over here, so yeah, good points, then can ask how do they affect your, your investment strategies is mean, inflation higher for longer, okay. Yep. Yep. Yeah, that that’s, that’s plausible. And then the energy, shock or crisis, or whatever you want to call it? How does that affect your investment choices?

Ben Fraser  16:35

Yeah, absolutely. So if, if we believe inflation is going to be higher, for longer, it really kind of sets the stage for where opportunities will kind of be over the next several years. If that’s the case, right here in the US, the Federal Reserve is really become the point of a lot of conversation, a lot of emphasis in trying to decipher what their approach is going to be. And they’ve been pretty clear from the get go, Jerome Powell stated, they need to get to a sustained level of comfortable GDP growth, which he stayed is 2% and Intel, and when that happens, they’re going to maintain a more aggressive monetary policy to bring inflation back into check. And so obviously, we’ve come way down from the highs of a year or two ago, you know, six and 8%, inflation numbers, you know, we’re down into the threes, which feels like a huge, you know, improvement, which it is, but it’s still very far off the mark. And there may be periods where we kind of dip down to the twos potentially. But given the things I just shared, that we think are systemic issues that are going to be very inflationary, they’re gonna have a hard time keeping interest rates or inflation to where they want to be. And that really drives monetary policy and interest rates. And so we’ve seen, obviously here in the US the fastest increase in interest rates that we’ve ever seen, that has caused a pretty big shock through the commercial real estate market, that we think is still being digested and will really start to play out over the next price several years, depending on what happens, but what our approach is that because inflation is gonna be higher, for longer interest rates will likely be higher for longer, the markets already priced in several rate cuts. This year, I think that’s pretty optimistic, or even heard some economists say that they think we could see six rate cuts this year. I think that’s very, very optimistic, given some of the numbers we just saw reported for q4 for both GDP and unemployment numbers. And, you know, we’re actually even seeing a probability now have an interest rate increase in very small probability. But you know, that’s back on the table if these numbers continue to come in, and you know, beyond expectations, and so we’re this driving opportunity is where we kind of see the biggest opportunity in the real estate market right now is in private credit. And so what that means is playing in this kind of mid section of the capital stack, if you understand what that means, but basically, generally in every deal, you have a senior lender, and you have equity investors, right. And right now, both of these parts of the capital stack are standstills. The lenders are pulling back, they’re tightening credit, they don’t want to put more money out, thanks for getting nervous equity investors, they’re getting capital calls, they want to preserve cash, they don’t want to put more money into deals. And so it’s providing opportunity for the market to come in across the middle part of the capital stack. So you can actually reduce your risk because you can get priority of payment. And you can help inject Apple into a project that, you know has a great path to stabilisation, a great path to reach its ultimate value, but needs a little bit of capital to get there, you come in with with pretty incredible rates of return for pretty minimal risk at this point of credit cycle. So we think it’s a great opportunity, kind of in this transition of the credit cycle, to take advantage of well positioned real estate and good markets with good operators that just need a little bit of extra cash to kind of take it to that next level to make it through and ride out was probably gonna be a pretty bumpy ride in commercial real estate the next few years. Yeah,

Gene Tunny  20:37

yeah, for sure. So I saw your you know, I listened to your episode on what’s been happening with the banks, and he was stunned by just how bad commercial property suffered in the States during the pandemic, and I mean, we had a bit of that, but the, the the plunge in values looks a lot larger in the States. Where’s the market at now? I mean, what’s it like? I mean, are there just parts of CBDs? That are the empty office buildings? Is that is that essentially what’s going on? What what’s the what’s the story there, Ben? Yeah,

Ben Fraser  21:14

so it’s, it’s interesting, because you see the headlines saying commercial real estate is down 30% or 40%. And, you know, as we all know, headlines are usually exaggerated, exaggerating what’s really going on. And while there are certain parts of the market, they’ve definitely been impacted to that degree, what most people think of when they hear commercial real estate, when they think of the big distress. In course, real estate is office. And, you know, when I say commercial real estate, I mean, the whole broad spectrum of all types of real estate, including office, multifamily apartments, you know, single family residences, industrial properties, retail, et cetera, et cetera, et cetera. So there’s lots of components within that big category. And everyone’s performing differently. So there’s some measures of Office that say, Yeah, values are probably dropped 30 to 40%. And, you know, I still think it’s a knife that’s, that’s falling, that we don’t really know where it’s going to where it’s gonna land, because we don’t really know what the value of an office property is that, say 50% occupancy and not probably going to improve from here on, you know, what’s the use case of that property going forward? How much is it worth? Well, I think the market is trying to digest that. But in other asset classes, we’re seeing a pretty different story industrial real estate, it’s actually it’s probably the least impacted by some estimates, it’s maybe only been impacted five, maybe 10%. Values. Retail similar way, apartments are probably the next biggest impact. And a lot of it’s because some of these really hot markets here, the Sunbelt markets are, we’re we’re very, very, the guy very aggressive in the prices. And so we’re seeing kind of a tail off some of these these high prices, but long term trends still support strong values, and housing and multifamily. And so it’s really trying to decipher, you know, here’s the big the big picture narrative, but then where’s the real opportunity to where maybe there’s a dislocation between the headline understanding the narrative and the actual underlying data. And that’s we’re always trying to look for that gap. Because if the market believes there’s a big issue, but the data supports something different, that’s where you can kind of come in and capture the opportunity.

Gene Tunny  23:36

Okay, we’ll take a short break here for a word from our sponsor.

Female speaker  23:42

If you need to crunch the numbers, then get in touch with adept economics. We offer you Frank and fearless economic analysis and advice. We can help you with funding submissions, cost benefit analysis, studies, and economic modelling of all sorts. Our head office is in Brisbane, Australia, but we work all over the world. You can get in touch via our website, www dot adapt economics.com.au. We’d love to hear from you.

Gene Tunny  24:11

Now back to the show. And what about energy? Ben? What what is your analysis? What does that tell you about where your investments should be focused?

Ben Fraser  24:25

Yeah, so try continuing what I was saying a minute ago on fossil fuels. We’ve really seen a pretty big shift or the past decade from investment into new production. And if you think about fossil fuels, it’s very different than real estate where real estate naturally appreciates. Over time with inflation. The fossil fuels naturally deplete over time as we pull more resources out of the ground, there’s less and reserves and by some estimates, it’s somewhere between you know, five to 8%. have total global production is depleted every year. So just by normal usage and demand, numbers, we’re depleting about 5% of all the production that we’re using every year. And just to maintain the same levels of production, there has to be new levels of investment to find, you know, new wells and new reservoirs and build out the infrastructure to increase production, or just to maintain production. So, what’s been interesting is about 10 years ago, we saw a pretty big shift from the the political narrative of the environmental societal governance standards that have been imposed on not only the operators of these assets, but also the capital allocators. And so a lot of the allocators that are investing into different energy verticals are being either penalised for investing in fossil fuels, or they’ve been rewarded for investing in renewables. So it’s created this incentive structure that is moving capital away from fossil fuel production and development into other technologies. And I’m not saying we should suspend all investment into green energy, you know, that, you know, to put on the fossil fuels, but we can’t do the the inverse of bomb or capitalist to new technologies and, and not realise the impact that would have in current energy needs. Because right now about, I think it’s 83% of all of our global energy needs come from fossil fuels. And that’s usually pretty shocking number for most people to hear they think we’re way farther along, right. You mentioned nuclear, which I’m a huge proponent of. But that only makes up I think it’s less than 5% of total global energy needs. And we’re not seeing these these big shifts, we’ve been trying to invest herbal energies for many, many decades. And so to think we’re going to be 100%, the transition to green energy in the next 10 years is just completely irrational. So what’s really happening is this lack of investment is going to cause a future supply issue, right, because as we’re not reinvesting that supply curves continuing to decline, and By most estimates, including the most far left leaning the most renewable, energy focused agencies are predicting that demand for fossil fuels will at least be the same 10 years from now, but most estimates actually anticipate that’d be higher, because we have population growth. And here, at least in America, and so they’re, you know, JP Morgan, just put out a report a month or so ago, predicting a 7.1 million barrel per day shortfall of oil and gas, actually just oil, just oil needs per day. By 2030. If if we don’t have a massive course correction. And so the opportunity is we really believe there’s a huge opportunity to get into fossil fuel production. So we’re investing a lot into these operating wells at really good prices. And we’re, we have pre distort prices right now. But we also think of the probabilities and, and, you know, there’s probabilities to the upside and price as we kind of go later into this energy. kind of issue. Yeah. Good

Gene Tunny  28:30

points there. It’s just I was just thinking that, you know, Saudi Arabia and, and Russia, they’ll be, they’ll be happy because you’re talking about oil, and, you know, potential, you know, shortages and, you know, implications for prices, higher prices in the future. They’ve been trying to engineer that, haven’t they recently, so there was a report in the Financial Times. Yesterday, so OPEC plus members extend production cuts in bid to boost oil price. So they, they’ve been trying to get that up. And it’s been, it’s been quite stubborn that even with all of the geopolitical tensions, I don’t know if you’ve been following that at all.

Ben Fraser  29:10

Yeah, yeah. Yeah. I mean, it’s there’s a lot of game that ship that goes on with with OPEC. And, I mean, what’s interesting, now people don’t realise is that the US is actually the largest exporter of oil in the world. Right. So Saudi Arabia is huge. And they’re, they’re a big player in this, but most people don’t realise that the US is actually the largest. So we have a pretty big place to play in this global geopolitical thing. But in the short term, there’s a lot of, you know, supply cuts or, you know, we’re going to flood the market and there’s a lot of kind of gamesmanship to a certain degree on the short term, you know, prices but at a certain point, you know, supply is inelastic because you can’t just flip a switch and all of a sudden, you know, we just have so much more oil there’s there’s a stir certain range, right, they can they can reduce supply the short term and just keep certain wells not producing. But if your capacity is x, you can’t do more than that, right. So at a certain point, there’s going to be this divergence between supply and demand. And I think that’s where, in a longer term timeframe, we’re gonna run into some bigger issues. But in the short term, I mean, I don’t mind higher oil prices, because I’m a seller of oil, because of my made the investments that we’ve made. So, you know, it’s been interesting to there’s been a lot of shift of the market from kind of years past, here in the US, at least, where, you know, they’re, they got a very aggressive and drill and very aggressive and trying to produce as much oil as possible, kind of flooding the market and got a little bit in front of their skis to where prices dropped massively. But the the market is kind of pulled back today was kind of like these higher oil prices, and we’re okay to, you know, not massively increased supply, because one we’re getting, you know, bad mouth from the politicians and two, will make a lot more when prices are high. And so it’s kind of created this really unique environment where we’re, we’re sitting it kind of elevated prices from a historical standpoint, and, you know, some of this interaction interplay between OPEC in the US, and, you know, other players of oil, like Russia, are, you know, intentionally keeping prices higher in the short term, and I think it’s only going to continue wrong.

Gene Tunny  31:29

Okay. That’s a good insights there, Ben. Now, before we go, I’ve got to ask, I’ve got some of my listeners would describe themselves as libertarian, and they’re very much in or they’re, they’re concerned, or they’re Austrian economists, you could say and they’re very much concerned about the actions of central banks and their money creation and all that and the risks of fiat money. And so they’re very, they’re very interested in gold and I see gold as you know, that’s what is it? It’s was it 2600 Or something an hour or maybe 2100 USD announcer saw the other day, so it’s getting it’s getting up there near the, the historic high. And, you know, so gold’s something that is up again and Bitcoin is dead, it’s had a bit of a surge, particularly since the these Bitcoin ETFs have been allowed. Do you have any thoughts on gold Bitcoin? Where does that fit into your evey alternative investments that you’re looking at?

Ben Fraser  32:33

Yeah, I think they definitely are categorised as alternative investments. This is outside the scope of what we invest in as Aspen. But we definitely comment on gold a lot in our podcast, because we have a lot of listeners probably like you that, you know, want to get have a hedge against, you know, fiat currency. And I mean, I haven’t been around the game, as long as some, but you know, to me, it’s whenever there is maybe undisciplined from central banks, all the gold bugs come out and say, See, we told you so and I think there’s an element of truth. But it also never plays out the way that they expect. It For Me, gold has always had an identity identity crisis, right? Is it a currency? Is it a hedge store value? I think there’s an element of it’s all the above. But I think Bitcoin is also confused the use case for gold as well. Right. And so I do think it’s good to have hedges, I think it’s good to have as a portion of the portfolio, just like a lot of these different things that we’re saying. But people that have really heavy allocations into gold and, and other Kryptos for that matter, I think, take a lot of extra risks, they probably don’t need to, because of, you know, some of these things that are hard to know where they go, I think, you know, the I used to be a much more staunch Austrian economist and, you know, hard money, kind of side of things. But from what we’ve seen since COVID, the modern monetary theory, principles have played out and just certain degree have kind of worked and I think I’ve had to kind of readjust some of my initial thoughts because we would have expected a massive amount of, of deflation throughout the game, we are seeing some higher inflation, but definitely not to the degree that of the stimulus and monetization of what we saw over the past few years. And so I think it definitely can drive higher inflation, but I think it’s only to a certain point. And meanwhile, we’re having a really strong assumer in the US a really strong economy from a GDP standpoint, that continues to support a stronger dollar and so, you know, I’m not, I’m not a, you know, gonna take a big bet against the dollar. anytime soon. And, you know, I think it’s good to have edges, just like anything. But I also think it’s important to have have that imbalance and and measure.

Gene Tunny  35:08

Gotcha. Yeah, yeah. Yeah, I wouldn’t be necessarily betting against it anytime soon that that’s for sure. One thing I guess I should ask because just before we go, because this is something that does, as an external observer, looking at the US and looking at the budget situation, and that big structural deficit that the federal government has, and the debt to GDP ratio just keeps climbing. And, you know, you’re always there’s always talk of a potential shutdown from time to time. And it just, I just wonder, Where are we going to get to a point where there will be a US fiscal crisis at some stage, I’ve had one guest on from Cato Institute’s she was warning against that in the future. Do do you have concerns about the state of US public finances?

Ben Fraser  36:01

Yeah. I mean, it’s no one likes a budget deficit, right. I mean, there’s a lot of reasons that doesn’t work. The thing that’s interesting now is the US of all developed economies, you know, is doing the same thing everyone else is doing, and probably to a lesser degree from a debt to GDP GDP standpoint, you know, we we have one of the better ratios. And you also think about inflation, what does that do to borrowers? Right, it benefits borrowers, if you have higher inflation, the value of the dollars, you take on now, and you pay back later are worth less. And so the US government being the largest borrower, I don’t think I think they want to get inflation down for other reasons, you know, whether it’s political or keep the economy in check, but they also don’t mind a little bit of extra inflation in the short term to erode the value that they gotta pay back. I think the bigger question becomes, at a certain point, do you know government bonds become less attractive than, than other countries and people aren’t willing to take the risk on the government be able to pay back the all the money they’re printing? So I think, at a certain point, yeah, maybe the, you know, that things have big fiscal breakdown. But as of now, I don’t see that happening. Is it happening anytime soon? And, you know, when we’re able to continue to pray, and we saw buyers for, you know, all the bonds, then we can continue to keep it going.

Gene Tunny  37:37

Yeah, that seems to it seems to be the case for the moment. It’s interesting. You mentioned the Yeah, it doesn’t look as bad as some other countries. I mean, you’re talking about I suppose Japan and Greece, I mean, Japan show that you could actually, oh, it’s just extraordinary what Japan has been able to get away with for decades now. Yeah. And the US seems to be, you know, just just keeps going along there. The other point you may, which is a good one is on inflation and inflation, eroding the real value of the debt that’s got to be paid back. There was a famous study by I think it was Robert Eisner in the late 80s, which showed that a lot of the the budget deficit was in the 80s was being offset by that reduction in the real value of the debt, which was quite a clever paper at the time. I put a link in the show notes. It’s very good. Good piece of work. Yeah. Yeah. But I’ve been it’s been terrific. Any, any final points before we wrap up? Now?

Ben Fraser  38:34

This is a fun conversation. And I love love the good question. So appreciate you having me on.

Gene Tunny  38:40

Very good Ben. We’ll all put a link in the show notes to Aspen funds and also invest like a billionaire podcast, which I’ll definitely recommend. I’ve been getting some great insights out of it. I think you’ve got a great interaction with your with your dad on the show. So yeah, really, really good stuff. So again, thanks so much for your time.

Ben Fraser  38:57

I appreciate it dude with fun

Gene Tunny  39:00

rato thanks for listening to this episode of economics explored. If you have any questions, comments or suggestions, please get in touch. I’d love to hear from you. You can send me an email via contact at economics explore.com Or a voicemail via SpeakPipe. You can find the link in the show notes. If you’ve enjoyed the show, I’d be grateful if you could tell anyone you think would be interested about it. Word of mouth is one of the main ways that people learn about the show. Finally, if your podcasting app lets you then please write a review and leave a rating. Thanks for listening. I hope you can join me again next week.

39:47

Thank you for listening. We hope you enjoyed the episode. For more content like this where to begin your own podcasting journey head on over to obsidian-productions.com

Credits

Thanks to Obsidian Productions for mixing the episode and to the show’s sponsor, Gene’s consultancy business www.adepteconomics.com.au. Full transcripts are available a few days after the episode is first published at www.economicsexplored.com. Economics Explored is available via Apple PodcastsGoogle Podcast, and other podcasting platforms.

Categories
Podcast episode

From the Vault: Antitrust with Danielle Wood, now Australian Productivity Commission Chair

In this installment of “From the Vault”, we revisit a compelling 2019 episode on antitrust featuring a conversation with Danielle Wood. At the time of the interview, Wood was a director at the Grattan Institute, a leading Australian public policy think tank. Since then, she has ascended to the influential role of Australian Productivity Commission Chair, marking a significant journey in her career dedicated to economic reform and policy innovation. You can listen to the interview wherever you listen to your podcasts (e.g. Spotify) or via the embedded player below.

This episode dives into the intricate world of antitrust laws, fueled by a renewed interest in scrutinizing the massive market power wielded by big tech companies such as Google, Facebook, and Amazon. Danielle Wood, with her expertise as a former principal economist and mergers director at the Australian Competition and Consumer Commission (ACCC), offers invaluable insights into the evolution of antitrust laws from their inception in the United States in the 1890s to their critical role in today’s digital economy.

The conversation illuminates the historical roots of antitrust laws, born out of a desire to combat the influence and economic power of “trusts” in sectors like railroads, energy, and steel. This backdrop sets the stage for a deeper exploration of the challenges and complexities facing contemporary antitrust enforcement, especially in an era dominated by digital platforms and the unique economic dynamics they present.

Wood’s analysis provides a nuanced perspective on the “hipster antitrust” movement, which advocates for a broader interpretation of antitrust enforcement, beyond traditional economic harms such as price gouging, to include considerations of impacts on innovation, privacy, and political power. This movement, symbolized by figures like Lina Khan and Tim Wu, underscores a growing concern over the adequacy of current antitrust frameworks to address the multifaceted influence of tech giants.

Reflecting on Australia’s own regulatory environment, Wood highlights the work of the Grattan Institute in assessing market concentration and the effectiveness of competition law. Despite not identifying a systemic market power issue, Wood acknowledges sector-specific concerns, particularly in technology, where the enforcement of existing laws, rather than the introduction of new ones, might be key to addressing competitive imbalances.

This episode serves as a timely reminder of the ongoing debates surrounding market power, competition, and the role of policy in ensuring a competitive, dynamic, innovative, and fair economy. As we continue to navigate the complexities of the digital age, revisiting conversations like these provides valuable context and guidance for future economic explorations.

Transcript of Episode 22: Antitrust with Danielle Wood

N.B. This is a lightly edited version of a transcript originally created using the AI application otter.ai. It may not be 100 percent accurate, but should be pretty close. If you’d like to quote from it, please check the quoted segment in the recording.

Gene Tunny  0:08  

The Economist magazine published an article last October titled dismembering big tech. The massive market power of the big tech companies such as Google, Facebook, and Amazon has prompted a renewed interest in antitrust laws. To help us understand antitrust, I’ve invited Danielle Wood from the Grattan Institute onto the programme. The Grattan Institute is a leading Australian public policy think tank based in Melbourne. Danielle is the budget policy and institutional reform programme director at Grattan. Later this year, she will take up the CEO role at the Institute. Danielle is well qualified to talk about antitrust, as she once worked as principal economist and mergers director at the ACCC, the Australian Competition and Consumer Commission. I hope you enjoy our conversation.

Danielle Wood from the Grattan Institute, welcome to the podcast.

Danielle Wood  1:17  

Thanks for having me, Gene.

Gene Tunny  1:18  

Excellent. Danielle, today, we’re going to be talking about antitrust. And this is a topic that has had a resurgence of interest, particularly due to the market power of the big tech companies such as Google and Facebook. Could we begin with you explaining what is this concept of antitrust? And where does it come from, please, Danielle?

Danielle Wood  1:47  

Yes, sure. Well, this is a concept that’s been around a very long time, even though as you say, it’s recently had a resurgence, which is always very nice when something you’re interested in, finally comes to prominence in the debate. But people have been worried about the impacts of market power and concentration of big firms going back a long time. So the first antitrust laws were introduced in the United States in 1890. And at that time, there were a number of big firms known as trusts, they dominated particular sectors: railroads, energy, steel, and sugar. And people were worried about the power they had, their economic power. So because they were in a dominant position they were able to price high. 

They were worried about the impact that had on societies, and on groups like farmers who were suppliers, on inequality, and on the political power that those firms had. So, in response to that, they introduced some antitrust laws. And during the 20th, the early 20th century under Theodore Roosevelt, they started to be quite strongly enforced. So the government actually use the powers that were there in the laws in order to break up those trusts in a number of cases. 

So, from there, many other countries got on board. And now almost every major developed country, and most developing countries have some form of law that controls the actions of firms. So normally, there’s some component that says they can’t get together with their competitors and do things like fixed prices. And then there’s rules around firms with market power, how they behave. So essentially [there are] regulations to stop them misusing their market power.

Gene Tunny  3:25  

Okay. And the big concern back in the late 19th century and early 20th century in the US…you mentioned a number of industries, but particularly, big oil, is that correct? With Standard Oil? 

Danielle Wood  3:40  

That’s right. So the railroads and the oil companies were really a couple of the really big trusts. And they had almost entirely monopoly positions. There was particular concern. Theodore Roosevelt was very worried about the amount of political influence they held. And so breaking up those trusts was really one of the defining features of his presidency. He was referred to as a Trust Buster, and also an octopus hunter, which I love–the idea of these kinds of firms having their tentacles in all sorts of different markets and being being reined in by the exercise of these powers.

Gene Tunny  4:19  

Yes, yes. That’s a really good metaphor, isn’t it? And I think Standard Oil was broken up, wasn’t it? That was broken up into, I think, was it Exxon? Esso?

Danielle Wood  4:35  

Many of the companies that we still know today, were broken up from the original trust of Standard Oil.

Gene Tunny  4:42  

You mentioned an act in the US. I think it’s the Sherman Act. Is that correct?

Danielle Wood  4:51  

That’s right. So, the Sherman Act went through in 1890, and then it sort of sat there unenforced for more than a decade. And it’s one of those laws that could have just withered on the vine if someone didn’t pick it up and use it. But Theodore Roosevelt, who I mentioned before, was particularly concerned about the amount of political power that these firms were exercising. So he took, I think his first case was against JP Morgan and the railroad trust, but then went on to take on Standard Oil and a number of others. And I think he filed more than 40 cases, during histerm as president, so he really enlivened that law by using it very actively. And that, you know, really sort of set the precedent for future administrations.

Gene Tunny  5:40  

Right. Okay. Now, why I approached you on this topic, Danielle, was that you wrote an article on hipster trust busters last year, which I thought was very good. And I’d just like you to explain, if you could, who the hipster trustbusters are and what they’re concerned about, please.

Danielle Wood  6:07  

It’s one of those terms that really catches the imagination, but it was originally used, actually, as a pejorative. And it was simply directed at a group of young scholars that are the ones that have really led this push to revive antitrust laws. So there’s a group of them, Lina Khan is probably the best known. She wrote a very well known paper on Amazon and why she believed it was misusing its market power, while she was still at law school, and she got a huge amount of prominence for that. Tim Wu, who’s recently written a book called The Curse of Bigness, is another one that sort of gets lumped in as a hipster. 

And really, the main contention is that antitrust laws have not been enforced to their full capacity. They are particularly worried about the dominance of the big tech companies, as you mentioned in your introduction, and they would like to see a return almost to those early days of the Sherman Act. We were just talking about it. In those days, really, the laws were enforced quite strongly. And they were enforced, not just with reference to potential economic harm through market power, so that the normal things we think about there: no firms are in a dominant position, so they might be able to up their prices, somewhat. 

They say no, no, that’s certainly not the only harm we should be worried about. It doesn’t even make sense to talk about that kind of harm, particularly for products like Google and Facebook, where it’s free. You know, we should be thinking more broadly about the harm that these firms do to the competitive process. And even things like their sort of dominant political position, their impact on inequality. So they have a very broad ranging set of complaints about how the economy is functioning. And they would like to see a stronger antitrust policy help deal with those.

Gene Tunny  8:00  

Okay, so they think that we don’t have strong enough laws already. Do they give any examples? Are they able to point to cases where governments haven’t had the powers that they’ve needed?

Danielle Wood  8:19  

It’s less about that the laws aren’t there. And certainly, the antitrust laws are cast quite broadly. it’s more a critique of the way in which they’ve been enforced. So it’s a view that, in recent decades, that people have taken too narrow a view on what sort of harm antitrust law should be concerned with. And certainly the case they put, if you go back to the early case law, there was a lot more going on than concern just about price increases. So they say, you know, the law is fine, but it’s how we enforce it that needs to change.

Lina Khan, who writes a lot about Amazon, says we have this firm that we have allowed to become really dominant in terms of online and retail. Yes, it’s priced at a low [price] but if you look at things like its price-earnings ratio, it’s pretty clear that it’s buying market share and at some point in the future, people are expecting it to start upping its prices to take advantage of its dominant position. We’ve let it vertically integrate so now that it’s both a platform where people buy products, as well as a supplier of those same products, and this has all sorts of implications for how retail markets function. So the thesis there is we should have first of all stopped it taking over other competitors, we should have intervened early to limit its behaviour, or we should get involved at this point to try and break it up in some way just like happened with Standard Oil as well as a lot of the other big trusts back in the day.

Gene Tunny  10:04  

What did you mention with Amazon? Would that be an example of predatory pricing? Is that what you’d call that, that they’re charging a price that’s lower than the cost just to gain market share, just to try to crush their competitors? 

Danielle Wood  10:22  

I’ll say this is the challenge. So I mean, how does the behaviour fit into the normal economic models? And what the hipsters are saying is the normal economic models are broken. So if I was normally thinking about predatory pricing, it’s quite a specific conduct, which is really the firm setting the price below cost. It is making losses in the short term in order to drive out competitors in order to later up the price and it would recoup those losses. So normally, that’s the kind of framework that we think about something like predatory pricing in. 

Here, it’s difficult to say that it would meet that technical definition of predatory pricing. They are probably pricing close to costs, certainly not being a company that’s posted a lot of profits. But they’re not necessarily making losses. But they have clearly been aggressively chasing share. And clearly the market does expect some kind of recoupment at some point. But the sort of time horizons we’re talking about are pretty incredible. And it’s been doing this for more than a decade. Normally predatory pricing models expect a short drop in price, and a year or two later prices jump up again. It looks very different. And I think partly what they’re picking up there is the standard economic models have struggled to cope with quite a different paradigm.

Gene Tunny  11:48  

It would be good to talk about what economists have traditionally thought about antitrust. What have been the different schools of thought on it? Because opinion amongst economists has changed over the decades. Is it fair to say that there have been times when economists have been more in favour than less in favour, and maybe economists are more in favour again? Are you able to tell that story, Danielle, please?

Danielle Wood  12:16  

Yeah, sure. Look, so really, the resurgence of economics, really the point at which antitrust became a very economic discipline. And I’ve always said to people, I really think of it as where Economics and Law meet, was in the 1970s, with the emergence of the Chicago school. So the Chicago School, in an antitrust sense, was really almost a single person at the University of Chicago, Aaron Director who went on to lecture a lot of people that became prominent antitrust scholars in their own right, like Richard Posner, and Robert Bork. And the idea they introduced was that this was an economic law. So we shouldn’t be worried about all those other considerations I was talking about around political power, or the impact of market power on inequality, or other types of concerns. We should be sort of narrow, really looking at this question of market power through the lens of consumer welfare. So the only question we need to answer when we’re looking at conduct is does it enhance consumer welfare? Or is it hurting consumer welfare? And so that was very much an economic approach to bring. 

From my perspective, I think that was a good thing to introduce more of a structure and certainly put economic considerations foremost in the enforcement of the law. I think it’s arguable that in the decades prior to that, there was a lot of inconsistency in cases. And there were certainly some cases that by today’s standards would be viewed as very unusual, intervening in mergers where firms were going to reach 2%, market share and things like that. So they said, let’s focus on this, will there be consumer harm? 

The criticism of that approach is that, perhaps it was a little too narrow. So, in defining consumer harm, there was a lot of focus on price as an indicator of harm. What we know, of course, is that in markets where firms have market power, they may choose to exploit that through monopoly pricing, but there can be all sorts of other detriments as well and maybe poor quality. It may be that they are asking us to accept terms and conditions that we might not otherwise accept. So, for example, diminishing privacy would be an example. Or it can just be that they’re enjoying the quiet life. So they’re not pushing to find ways to cut costs or to innovate their product in a way that firms in competitive markets do. So there’s a whole lot of harms that I think are rightly considered economic harms that were perhaps not really emphasised by that narrower Chicago school approach. So I think the Chicago School was good at taking the discipline forward and putting economics front and centre. But at the same time, the criticisms that it’s too narrow in approach do have some validity.

Gene Tunny  15:22  

Okay. So you mentioned the risks of monopoly power. There’s also risks from oligopolies. When you have just a small number of companies in an industry, there are risks of the oligopoly companies coordinating their prices and effectively having some sort of cartel and conspiring to raise prices and rip off consumers. There’s that risk. Now, can I ask you about the view that came in the early 80s or late 70s, early 80s, from William Baumol, that contestable markets view. Was that influential in how we thought about monopoly power and antitrust?

Danielle Wood  16:07  

Yes, it absolutely was. So, previously, perhaps people were very keen to look at indicators of market concentration. So how many firms are there in the market? If there’s not very many, well, then we should assume that there’s a market power problem. So the idea of contestable markets is that, so long as there is a threat of entry, that could be sufficient to constrain the behaviour of the firms in the market. So even in a market where you might have only two or three players, if barriers to entry are low enough, if they tried to either get together, or they found a sort of non-cooperative way to increase prices, then they know that someone’s going to come in and compete those margins.So that kind of keeps prices down. 

So, when when economists are talking about market power, they always have an eye to that question of barriers to entry. 

But I think, perhaps we’ve, in a lot of cases assumed that barriers are lower than what they’ve turned out to be in practice. So often, I think it can be harder than people might expect for firms to enter the market. So if we look at the big tech firms as an example, what’s the entry barrier there? It turns out to be a lot about the data that they already have, and the fact that they’ve collected such deep profiles on all of us, it’s just simply harder for someone to come in and build an equivalently good product.

Gene Tunny  17:46  

Absolutely. And there’s that strong network effect, too, isn’t there, the fact that I mean, Facebook has 2 billion people on the platform already. So it’d be very difficult to set up a social media platform in competition with Facebook.

Danielle Wood  18:05  

Right. So, for some of the platforms, network effects really matter. And Facebook is definitely the most obvious example of that. So, network effects, really, that I get more benefit from being on that platform when other people are already there. So when I’m on social media, and I want to see what my friends are doing, the fact that they’re there on Facebook already adds value to my experience going on Facebook. The same arguments don’t necessarily apply in the same way on something like Google. You can imagine a new search engine coming in. The fact that there’s not a whole lot of other consumers or advertisers, that might not bother me if I’m just there for organic search. But we do know that people prove to be a lot more sticky than we might expect. So even something like changing your search engine, which is a pretty low cost thing to do, there’s literally zero price, you just need to go to a different website to what you’re used to. Even then people prove to be very kind of path-dependent in their behaviour, and they’ll tend to just keep going back to the one that they know.

Gene Tunny  19:15  

Okay, Danielle, I know that Grattan has done some interesting research on market power, the concentration in different markets. Would you be able to give an overview of that research, please? What you found in Australia in the US, I mean, what what industries are the most concentrated overall, how much concentration is there? And is it something we should worry about? So if you could just give us a flavour of what Grattan’s found, please, that would be great.

Danielle Wood  19:49  

Sure. So this is actually work done by my former colleague Jim Minifie and another former colleague Cameron Chisholm. And so they were sort of I’m interested in this claim that markets had got more concentrated over time. So they went to have a look at the data for Australia. And the picture is a bit more nuanced than I think a lot of people might expect. So, you know, they found that there were a lot of concentrated markets in Australia. And perhaps if you think about, supermarkets or insurance or a lot of manufacturing, that’s probably not going to be a surprise to people. 

When they compared market concentration in Australia by market to overseas, they found that we didn’t actually look that bad by international standard, although there were some markets in Australia that were particularly concentrated. So things like supermarkets, mobile phone networks and life insurance,were three that looked particularly more concentrated in Australia than elsewhere. 

In terms of concentration over time, there was no clear pattern. So some industries, like banks have become more concentrated over the past 15 to 20 years. In others, like supermarkets, its concentration has actually fallen. And nor could they really find evidence that profitability, had substantially increased over the last two decades. So sometimes, when you’re trying to measure market power, you look more at profit margins than market concentration, because of some of the limitations with market concentration as an indicator we were talking about before. 

The one thing that they did find, though, that I think perhaps suggests that all is not well is that, in more concentrated sectors, profit margins were higher, and that those profits tended to endure. So if you looked at the 20% of most profitable firms, a decade later, about a third of those were still in the top 20%. So, if you think that markets are contestable, you would expect to see these sorts of excess profits eaten away over time, by new people coming into the market. We seem to have a segment of markets where that didn’t occur over as long as a decade, and they were able to maintain high profit margins. So it suggests there might be parts of the economy where competition isn’t working as well as it should be.

Gene Tunny  22:20  

Yes. And in Australia, that’s probably in banking, is that fair to say? The big four banks have a privileged position in the marketplace, for, well, a variety of reasons. One of which might be the government of the day appears to favour the big four banks and gives them special deals. Remember, during the last financial crisis, for the big four banks, it was much cheaper for them to access the government borrowing guarantee, than second-tier banks. So is that an issue, that we have regulations that favour particular market players? Is that one of the things that’s driving concentration in some sectors?

Danielle Wood  23:14  

It certainly can be. So, we certainly found that firms in heavier, more regulated industries tend to have higher returns than those in less regulated industries. It can be a bit hard to unscramble that observation, because, of course, we tend to regulate more in concentrated industries. So natural monopoly industry is a good example. The reason governments are in their regulating is because it is, by definition concentrated, and it’s trying to sort of mimic competitive market outcomes. But there are certainly examples, and the banks might be a good one, of where the regulation itself can create an entry barrier, and are an advantage for a particular group of firms, which can increase returns. 

So high-regulation firms definitely stood out as tending to be more concentrated and having higher returns, as did innovative firms. This is a pretty consistent finding across the world. So a lot of the work in different countries has suggested that returns have gone up over time, but they’ve gone up only for a segment of the market. And that’s tended to be the firms that are heavily exposed to innovation. So tech firms, platforms, and pharmaceutical companies, tend to be the ones that have been making higher returns over time.

Gene Tunny  24:39  

Could that be a good thing, Danielle?The fact that these firms are being rewarded for innovation, that’s probably what we’d want to see, isn’t it? It might be necessary to have those higher awards to provide the incentives to undertake that innovation. What do you think about that? 

Danielle Wood  25:03  

Sure. I would say that this is the idea really that our law is based on. So, under Australian law, it is not illegal to have market power. And the reason it’s not illegal to have market power is you want market power there as an incentive. So if a firm has got there by competing on its merits, so it’s designed something better than its competitors, or it’s just done something, it’s played hard, or whatever it is, if it’s got there on its merits, and then it stays there on its merits, then it has done absolutely nothing wrong. And that is really the fruits of that work, and what creates the incentive for firms to innovate in that way. What the law says is that’s fine. 

But you can’t misuse that market power when you’re there to maintain your market position. So, if you are doing things like predatory pricing, or bundling your monopoly product with another product to leverage into another market, there’ll be certain circumstances in which those things are being used in order to maintain or grow a dominant market position. That’s when you’ve got a problem, not with the market power, per se.

Gene Tunny  26:16  

Absolutely. You just reminded me with that example of using your product, bundling it with something else. You’ve got a monopoly in one area, and then you bundle it with something else to try and get into another market. That reminded me of what happened with Microsoft in the 90s. And that’s why the US Department of Justice went after Microsoft, over the Internet Explorer browser, if I remember that correctly.

Danielle Wood  26:42  

Exactly. Right. So I mean, it’s interesting, another tech example. And probably the last time the Department of Justice went in really hard on a big company and a big tech company. And the browser was free. So it wasn’t an issue of price. But it was a question of leverage. Were they using their dominance in the PC market in order to get a dominant position? And what they saw was the next big thing, which was the browser market, and that really drove their major competitor at the time who were getting out of the browser market at the time, because everyone ended up using the Microsoft browser that came with the computer.

Gene Tunny  27:26  

Yes, I think it was Netscape if I remember. 

Danielle Wood  27:29  

I was trying to remember whether Netscape was Microsoft’s or the competitor. That’s right. Yes.

Gene Tunny  27:33  

Because I remember the first time I ever saw the internet, it would have been second or third year uni. And we were taken to the library and shown this wonderful new tool. And Netscape was the browser of choice at the time.

Danielle Wood  27:49  

It’s so funny to think back to those days as well. It was it was high school for me. And there was one computer in the library that you could access the internet from. And your librarian had to sit with you and supervise. And I always thought, Gosh, why would anyone want to use the internet when we’ve got this perfectly good library here? All these books. Goodness me!

Gene Tunny  28:07  

Absolutely, Danielle. Before I ask the last question, could I just ask you to tell us where we can find out about your work on the internet, please?

Danielle Wood  28:17  

Yes. So if you go to the Grattan website, and you’re interested in our work on market concentration, there’s a report called Competition in Australia: Too Little of a Good Thing? That’s the place to look. If you’re interested in the article that I wrote on the hipster trustbusters and how things are changing, that’s an article on the Inside Story website called The Hipster Trustbusters.

Gene Tunny  28:45  

Very good. Now, to wrap it up, Danielle, I’d like to ask how concerned are you overall about market power? And what do you think needs to be done? Do we need specific measures to rein in these big tech companies?

Danielle Wood  29:06  

Look, so as an overall proposition, I think it’s not clear to me that there is systemic market power issue, but I think there are clearly concerns in particular sectors, and Tech is one of those. Do we need special measures is an interesting question. And you know, the ACCC has just spent more than a year doing an inquiry on the power of the digital platforms. And my reading of their findings there is, really, that they’re not looking for new powers. They believe that existing powers will generally be enough perhaps with some tweaks. 

I mean, I think if we reflect back on how we got here, in terms of the tech companies, there may have been some decisions around mergers. that you would have hoped would go a different way. So if we look back, we know that Facebook bought Instagram, it bought WhatsApp, Google bought YouTube. I think there is a fair contention that perhaps the major US regulators were too relaxed about those acquisitions. And what looks to be, you know, acquisitions in different markets have actually helped enhance their power in the core markets in which they operate because of the sort of data advantages that we’re talking about. So I think we could be stronger. And this is largely for the US regulators, because obviously Australian regulators can’t control those types of mergers or future acquisitions. 

The ACCC has pretty clearly signalled that it will be looking very closely at all sorts of behaviour by the tech companies under existing laws. So things like trying to leverage power into other markets. So Google, using its search results to favour its phone product, and it’s already been taken on by the European competition authorities over that sort of behaviour. All of that can be done under existing laws. 

And probably the next question is should we see a break up? Again, that’s not a proposition for Australian regulators and Australian regulators do not have the same divestiture powers that they have in the US. Could you envisage a world where at least they reverse the impact of the mergers? A breakup only makes sense if you can kind of find units, self sufficient units to break these companies into, but I could certainly see an argument that you could go back and reverse some of those problematic mergers which occurred in the past. And I think that’s a really interesting proposition, whether a future US government and the US regulators will have the appetite to do that. And that’s certainly come up as a big issue during the Democratic primary race. Candidates are really expected to have a position on whether or not the big tech companies should be broken up, which I think is a pretty interesting development.

Gene Tunny  32:19  

Right, absolutely. Okay. I’ll have to go back and have a look at what some of those candidates have said. I know there have been a lot of debates on health care and on tax. Now that you have mentioned it, I am recalling some of that discussion. So I might go back and look at that. Thanks, Danielle. 

Danielle Wood  32:39  

Elizabeth Warren, in particular, as she has a very long history of advocacy around antitrust law. So she’s got very well-thought-out positions, but certainly, others have thrown their views into the races. 

Gene Tunny  32:54  

And before we conclude, Danielle, are there any other points you’d like to make? Is there anything you think we might have missed in our discussion, our broad overview of antitrust?

Danielle Wood  33:06  

Look, I would just say that I think even though this hipster antitrust movement has been very critical of both the courts and regulators in the US, it’s not clear to me that the problem is anywhere near as acute in Australia. I think we have a real history and a record of pretty robust antitrust enforcement. There’s a reason why the chair of the ACCC tends to be a household name in this country. They’re out there and pretty heavily using the law. The thing I think we should look out for in Australia is what further powers they might seek. 

So the ACCC has been pretty successful in campaigning for law changes where they don’t think they have enough power. And the kind of beefed-up misuse of market power provisions that came out of the Harper review is an example of that. At the moment, they are saying that perhaps the mergers laws aren’t sufficient to block anti-competitive mergers. So I think it’s ‘watch this space’ on whether we actually do get some further beefing up of our laws, but not necessarily to do with the tech companies, but to deal with the fact that the ACCC’s struggled to win mergers cases in courts.

Gene Tunny  34:26  

Okay. So it sounds like the ACCC, the Australian Competition and Consumer Commission, has been doing some great work, but you mentioned it has struggled to win in the courts. So I guess the big corporations can hire the top QC’s; perhaps that’s the issue. 

Danielle Wood  34:49  

Well, look, I think that’s probably partly true, although the ACCC’s got some pretty good QCs on the payroll as well. I think there is a particular problem with mergers cases that courts struggle with because it’s prospective, trying to work out what might happen in the future with and without a merger. It’s quite a different exercise to the normal exercise the courts are going through, which is trying to establish something that’s happened in the past. So I think there’s inherent difficulties in that prospective nature of the mergers tests, which has made it really hard for the ACCC to win. And I think the stat is that they haven’t actually won a mergers case in court in 20 years.

Gene Tunny  35:30  

Oh, no. Okay. Well, we might have to come back to that topic. I haven’t, haven’t looked at mergers for a while, but that doesn’t sound good. And that sounds like something we should look at in the future. 

Danielle Wood  35:43  

Yes, so the agency took one to court, the Vodafone Hutchinson one to court last year, and I think if they lose that, we’ll be hearing a lot more on the topic.

Gene Tunny  35:54  

Yep, absolutely. Okay. Danielle Wood from the Grattan Institute. That’s been terrific. I’ve really enjoyed our conversation, and I’ve learned a lot. So thanks again for coming on to the programme.

Danielle Wood  36:06  

Thanks for having me, Gene. 

Categories
Podcast episode

The Gender Pay Debate: Understanding the Factors Behind the Gap w/ Dr Leonora Risse – EP230

This episode of Economics Explored analyzes Australia’s new gender pay gap data reported by large companies. Are the data useful or are they nonsense, as some critics have alleged? Host Gene Tunny interviews Dr Leonora Risse to discuss the methodology, findings, and criticisms of the report. Risse provides context on factors influencing the gender pay gap, like occupational segregation. Tunny and Risse also debate the impact of societal norms and long work hours or ‘greedy jobs’. While acknowledging limitations, Risse argues the data highlights the need to address remaining gender inequities. 

Please get in touch with us with any questions, comments and suggestions by emailing us at contact@economicsexplored.com or sending a voice message via https://www.speakpipe.com/economicsexplored

You can listen to the episode via the embedded player below or via podcasting apps including Google PodcastsApple Podcast and Spotify.

About this episode’s guest Dr Leonora Risse

Dr Leonora Risse is an Associate Professor in Economics at the University of Canberra and a Research Fellow with the Women’s Leadership Institute Australia and serves as an Expert Panel Member on gender pay equity for the Fair Work Commission. She formerly held roles with the Women and Public Policy Program at Harvard University, the Australian Government Productivity Commission, and RMIT University. She earned her PhD in Economics from the University of Queensland. Leonora is a co-founder and former National Chair of the Women in Economics Network (WEN) in Australia.

What’s covered in EP230

  • Introduction to the Episode and Topic (00:36)
  • Overview of Gender Pay Gap Data Reporting (02:59)
  • Calculation and Implications of Gender Pay Gap Data (04:48)
  • Insights on Compositional Factors and Industry Dynamics (16:28 & 16:41)
  • Critical Analysis of Gender Pay Gap Reporting (33:29)
  • Claudia Goldin’s Work and Nobel Prize Discussion (41:02)

Takeaways

  1. The new gender pay gap data reveal significant disparities across companies in male and female median earnings, with factors like occupation and industry composition playing crucial roles.
  2. In Leonora’s view, transparency in reporting pay gaps is crucial for raising awareness but also poses some risks of normalization and misinterpretation.
  3. Leonora argues societal norms and gender biases significantly influence occupational choices and bargaining power, contributing to the gender pay gap.
  4. Future research and data analysis are essential for understanding the drivers of the gender pay gap. 

Links relevant to the conversation

Link to WGEA Data Explorer (can look up each company’s pay gap and other gender equality statistics)

https://www.wgea.gov.au/data-statistics/data-explorer

Leonora’s Twitter exchange with Senator Matt Canavan:

https://twitter.com/leonora_risse/status/1762395543366717877?s=20

Gender wage transparency and the gender pay gap: A survey

https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/full/10.1111/joes.12545

Do Firms Respond to Gender Pay Gap Transparency?

https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/abs/10.1111/jofi.13136

Pay Transparency and Gender Equality

https://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/papers.cfm?abstract_id=3584259

Claudia Goldin

“Career and Family: Women’s Century-Long Journey toward Equity”

https://press.princeton.edu/books/hardcover/9780691201788/career-and-family

Leonora’s book review in Economic Record (copy attached)

https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/epdf/10.1111/1475-4932.12716

 Leonora’s Conversation article on WGEA pay gap data

https://theconversation.com/qantas-pays-women-37-less-telstra-and-bhp-20-fifty-years-after-equal-pay-laws-we-still-have-a-long-way-to-go-223870

Transcript: The Gender Pay Debate: Understanding the Factors Behind the Gap w/ Dr Leonora Risse – EP230

N.B. This is a lightly edited version of a transcript originally created using the AI application otter.ai. It may not be 100 percent accurate, but should be pretty close. If you’d like to quote from it, please check the quoted segment in the recording.

Leonora Risse  00:04

The risks and opportunities of publishing pay gaps transparently. It does come with potential risk of misinterpretation. It even comes with the risk that some people some employers might look at this list and go you know what? Yes, our gender pay gap is pretty bad but so are all the other companies in our industry and it normalises it and it legitimises going, you know what we’re not that out of step as it is?

Gene Tunny  00:36

Welcome to the economics explored podcast, a frank and fearless exploration of important economic issues. I’m your host gene Tunny. I’m a professional economist and former Australian Treasury official. The aim of this show is to help you better understand the big economic issues affecting all our lives. We do this by considering the theory evidence and by hearing a wide range of views. I’m delighted that you can join me for this episode, please check out the show notes for relevant information. Now on to the show. Hello, thanks for tuning into the show. In Australia, big companies have been forced to disclose differences between male and female median earnings. The Australian Workplace Gender Equality agency published its first set of gender pay data in late February 2024. And these data have prompted a fierce discussion. Do they show a real gender pay gap that we should be concerned about? Or are the figures nonsense as some prominent critics argue? Joining me to discuss the data is returning guest Dr. Leonora Reese, Associate Professor in Economics at the University of Canberra. She’s a research fellow with the Women’s Leadership Institute Australia, and she serves as an expert panel member on gender pay equity for the Fair Work Commission. Previously, Leonora has held roles with the women and public policy programme at Harvard University, the Australian Government Productivity Commission, and RMIT University. Leonora is co founder and former national chair of the women in economics network in Australia. As always, please let me know what you think about what you hear on the show and about ways that I can improve it, including suggested topics and guests. Right? Oh, we’d better get into it. I hope you enjoy my conversation with Dr. Leonora Reese on the gender pay gap. Leonora thanks for joining me again on the programme. Thank you, Jane for having me. Oh, of course, it’s a big week in your field of research, which broadly is, am I correct in calling agenda economics? Right. Okay, great. Because there’s been a really interesting report that’s been published by the Workplace Gender Equality agency, which is an Australian government agency, and it’s on the gender pay gap. And what it does, it reports the gender pay gaps for one of the largest companies in Australia. Can you tell us a bit about it, please?

Leonora Risse  02:59

That’s right. So this is new data that’s now been publicly released. It’s the gender pay gap for all private companies in Australia that have at least 100 staff. So this is not just a sample, this is every large company. And they have to report this data to the agency to Weijia. Anyway, and this is the first year that this data is now publicly available. Previously, companies could voluntarily share this data, they could share the size of the gender pay gap. Now it’s mandated and that came about through reforms to the Workplace Gender Equality Act. And the idea is that this transparency, this openness of information, is designed number one, to raise awareness and attention and get people talking about the existence of the gender pay gap, which I think has achieved, we’ve ticked that box. And then secondly, to really focus attention on what do we need to do to narrow this gender gap? And how do we understand the drivers behind it? Yeah,

Gene Tunny  04:10

look at certainly started a conversation and in terms of reports of data, so economic or financial data, I can’t think of many others that have generated so much discussion and debate and, and controversy and really strong opinions as this one. So it’s, it’s been quite extraordinary. I must say that. So you, you mentioned private companies. Do you mean companies in the private sector? Is it publicly listed companies traded on the stock market as well? Or is it

Leonora Risse  04:41

I think it’s to the exclusion of the public sector that doesn’t include the government but they have other reporting? Right?

Gene Tunny  04:48

Okay. So it’s the largest companies in Australia and they’re required to disclose this gender pay gap and how do they calculate this gender pay gap? Yeah, so

Leonora Risse  04:59

there are various Ways to calculate the gender pay gap, although most, most of them you still see this, in fact, all of them, you still see a gender pay gap. What this particular data is based on is what we call the median. So like the midpoint of salaries that men are earning in a company, compare that to the midpoint, the median of what all women are earning in a particular company. So within the company comparison, if people are curious to know, what is the median compared to the average, the median is a way of controlling for some of those really extreme values, like very, very large values that can skew or distort the data. So we control for that. So you can’t say all this data is being pushed off or distorted by some extreme values, because statistically, we try to control for that this data also does not include remuneration of CEOs. That will be coming in future years. So it’s not being skewed by say, an over representation of men at CEO level. And it is disaggregated or so according to male concentrated industries, and female concentrated industries, and more what we would call more gender balanced industries. And what we see is that it’s in the male concentrated industries, where this overall gender pay gap seems to be the widest, you asked also how its measured. So this is annual salaries. And it’s includes full time workers, of course, but it also factors in, say, part time workers by working out what would be the annualised equivalent of those work. So it’s not skewed towards, you know, still just a segment of the of the workforce and excluding part time workers as well. Yeah. So

Gene Tunny  07:00

if you’ve got somebody who’s working for simplicity, they’re working half time, they’re only working two and a half days a week, then you would double their, what their earnings are to get a full time equivalent earnings. So

Leonora Risse  07:15

effectively, yes, yeah. And also a real added bonus to this data is that you, you have base salary, so you know what your standard salary would be for the year. And then it also includes a calculation which they’re calling total remuneration. And that’s where you factor in overtime payments, bonuses. Extra commission, for example. And when we factor that in, that’s when the pay gap tends to the gender pay gap widens even further, that extra layer of information. And

Gene Tunny  07:49

so it’s reported as a percentage. So one one that stood out to me is and was widely reported Jetstar, so the budget airline carrier in Australia, that makes huge amounts of money flying Australians to barley, among other places, 53.5% pay gap or something like that, if I got that right. Now, this is where I want to get into a bit of, you know, we, it’d be good to sort of ask, I’d like to ask you about the methodology and to what extent is, is giving us reliable estimates. Because like, that must be, that must be because pilots are disproportionately male, and the cabin crew is disproportionately female. So there are compositional issues there that will make it you know, when we interpret this data, we have to consider those sort of things. So yeah, I’m keen to get your thoughts on that. And also what really stood out to with this data, what do you think it really tells us? What are the highlights? What can we read into it?

Leonora Risse  08:51

You’re exactly right, Jane, that this number, this percentage, reflects a combination of different factors that feed into that. And one of those factors is the composition of the workforce within a company. So I’ve heard many people give the example that the aviation and airline industries tend to be characterised by on average, having more men in the roles of pilots or engineers, which tend to be higher paying roles, and proportionately more women, say in the administration or flight attendant roles, which tend to be relatively lower. So I think that’s great that people have picked up on that because yes, that’s one of the reasons there’s different composition. And instead of saying, well, then there’s no such thing as the gender pay gap that gives us reason to pause and think, Well, hang on, why do we see such stark gender patterns exist? Why aren’t more women being attracted into or working their way into into pilot roles? Why aren’t more men attracted to being a flight attendant so that already starts prompt us to think how are those factors conditioned by societal norms, gender biases, gender stereotypes, gender barriers to women going into fields that are traditionally male and vice versa as well. But then that compositional effect we know from other research, academic research that people like myself and many other economists in the field have carried out is that that’s not your complete explanation. So we use other data sets. And I think, over time, we’ll be able to dig deeper into this big data set, because the beauty of it is that he collects a whole bunch of other information about all these companies where we can plug that into our models and start to decompose, we’ll unpack and use decomposition analysis to figure out what are the contributing factors. So you might still see that even in the same sort of occupation, where you have men and women, so for example, say university lecturers, we know there are still pay scales, we know there’s still opportunity for some university lecturers to negotiate for a slightly higher pay, very high pay, then, then others. Because there’s still room for bargaining, there’s still room for negotiation, even if your job description on paper is the same. Often that’s perpetuating an existing salary that someone brings from a previous employer. So they say, This is what I was paid at my previous organisation or my, my previous company, someone might put that forward as that their their case for saying, This is why I should be paid more than my colleague, because this is, this is what I’m worth, if you need to attract me to this role, this is what you’re going to have to pay me not saying that’s valid or legitimate. But that’s some of the everyday realities of how these these gender nuances factor in. And it also speaks to the cultural norm or the societal expectation that it’s more legitimate for men to be more assertive in bargaining more so than women. And it’s very well to say, women, you just need to be more confident when you when you bargain, or, you know, put your facts on the table and say, I deserve a pay rise. But what’s really fascinating is that the research, including behavioural research in this space suggests that that can still be a really risky approach for women, because it’s not a society as societal norm that women demonstrate that behaviour. So it’s it doesn’t always work. It can backfire. Yeah,

Gene Tunny  12:43

I think we chatted about that in a previous episode. I might link to that because I thought that was a good conversation where we went over some of those factors. Can I ask you about some particular companies now? Hopefully, I got Jetstar. Right. Look at what please do just in case, because I don’t want to accidentally defame Jetstar and then have them sue me. But yeah, but I guess this does raise public relations issues for companies and some companies must be pretty annoyed at what the findings are. So that’s a median gender pay gap on base salary for Jetstar group are 53 and a half percent. And now we’ve got a median gender pay gap for total remuneration of 43.7%. So that’s when they factor in is that bonuses or overtime, then that narrows a little bit? Not, you know, it’s still it’s still significant. And it’s got to do with those compositional issues? Or, you know, that’ll that’ll be a big part of it. What are some of the other companies that stood out to you, Leonora?

Leonora Risse  13:41

Oh, I think you’ve got to have good reason to pick on one company than another. But I look at one observation, I think, is that there weren’t there weren’t really big surprises. For me, I have to say in this data, like we’re aware that there are some quite extreme gender pay gaps amongst some of these companies. I think it was to be expected that in some of these traditionally, male companies like transport and Postal Service’s warehousing, that suppose some of those gender pay gaps are quite stark, because it’s, it’s, it’s harder for women to work their way up the ranks in those companies. But then you also see these gender pay gaps still exist across even female concentrated fields like health care, social assistance. So it’s still it’s still pervasive across all of these, all of these industries. I do see some commentary. I think Dan zippers article on the ABC pointed out that some of these companies that have very large gender pay gaps are companies that perform ought to be being supported or catering to the female client group. You know, they they gave the example of some fashion retailers that, you know, really specialised in producing products for women, and yet they have this big gender pay gap. So that’s goes to show I think that some companies, it’s not all what it seems to be. And especially with the International Women’s Day coming up, I think what would be great is if you see companies that are saying, Yes, we support gender equality, and we’re having an International Women’s Day event will go and check their gender pay gap and see if the rhetoric stacks up with, you know, what are some of the dynamics in their company? Again, you don’t know, we you can’t make judgments just based on that pure number, you want to sort of go under the hood and figure out what’s going on? Is that compositional effects is that is there pay inequity. But all the companies also have the opportunity to provide what’s called an employer’s statement on the Wiggio website. So they’ve got a voice to then explain. This is why we have this percentage pay gap that you see. And it’s also a platform for them to explain what actions what policies, what new strategies they’re going to implement, to do something about it.

Gene Tunny  16:28

Okay, a couple of things. I’d like to pick up on there or ask about that. Company. You. You mentioned, the athletic leisure wear company, that’s Lorna Jane. I imagine

Leonora Risse  16:41

that’s the one that was mentioned. Right? Yeah. Dan Zephyrs article. And I think

Gene Tunny  16:46

I saw they had a law firm, did they have their lawyers say, if you’re going to talk about us in this regard, you’ve got to bake, you’ve got to provide the context or whatever. I’ll try and find that article and put it in the show notes. Right, I

Leonora Risse  16:58

think, I think it’s an example of companies feeling the pressure, which is partly what the intention was of these new reforms is to put the onus on companies to at least explain what’s going on and then try to take action. The whole logic behind this pay transparency is that companies care about their public perception. They don’t want to be caught out or perceived as being inequitable, presumably. And these reforms are meant to, I guess, prompt attention, but also give them a chance to explain and an act. So it sounds like you know, some of the ways that the companies have responded is a signal that they they do feel pressure, they are worried about reputational damage. And so the thinking is that that could be an incentive, I would like to also balance that by saying you do have a fair number of companies on this list that have a really narrow gender pay gap in some, and some have ones that are reversed the other way and are in favour of women. So we have examples of companies that are achieving gender equity in PE, what can we learn from those companies? What has worked? What is it about the culture or the practice or the industry characteristics that has given rise to these narrower gender pay gaps? And can we learn something from their experience that can be transferred to some of these worst performing companies? Or is there something really unique and an ongoing and particular struggle or challenge for some of these industries that have perpetually high gender pay gaps? What extra attention or investment do we need? So that these particular companies that are struggling can can improve over time so that how do we be constructive about this rather than just treating it as naming and shaming and like a punitive measure?

Gene Tunny  19:09

Yeah. Do you remember the high level figures? I might put them in the shownotes? Because is it about is it half of the companies have a gender pay gap, favouring males and there’s a like 30% or 40% that are sort of in where there’s no real difference statistically, and then there’s 10% that are if I got that wrong, you’ve got the figures, well,

Leonora Risse  19:30

they those percentages that you’re quoting yet that they are available, the numbers we’re looking at here. For a start, let’s give people a sense of what that reference point is. So a gap of 14.5% That’s the median across all these companies based on base salary, and if we add in bonuses, etc, then it widens to 19%. What we did in This article in the conversation as we calculated how many of these particular companies were kind of in the upper range the spectrum, right, so you’ve got almost 5000 companies on this spreadsheet on this list. So almost 1000, so around 20% have a gender pay gap that exceeds 20%. If we keep going further and further to the worst end of that, that list, 350 of them have a gap of over 30% gender pay gap of over 30%. And then you’ve got 100, at the worst end, where the gender pay gap is greater than 40%. You’ve also got quite a number of companies at the other end that have gender pay gaps that come negative. Yeah, it was, that was a little surprising as well, I guess, you know, in a good way, perhaps. But what we saw is these are particularly concentrated in Health Education and Disability Services where you have proportionally more women in those industries or those companies already, and therefore, your senior roles and more likely to be women. And also they’re just generally lower paid. So you might have a gender pay gap that mathematically comes out looking like women are being paid more, or in more of the senior roles. But compared to the other industries and sectors is an absolute sense. They’re all a bit lower. Yeah. So

Gene Tunny  21:31

they’re about 1000 companies. So that’s 20% of the 5000. And what you found is that they’re mainly in health education, Disability Services. So I’ll put a link in the show notes to that. And that’s getting to that point you were making. As part of like, there is value you see value in this data, because it can allow further research into what could be driving gender pay gap. So I’ll might explore that with you a bit in a moment. Because it just seems to me this issue of the composition is it’s a big deal, the, you know, the importance of the composition of the workforce. And I wonder if have they got enough warnings on this data? Do you think that they explained the data well enough? Do we shoot should this be up in lights, this is just, we’ve got a really simple, straightforward way of calculating this. There are all these other factors that are involved. So just be careful interpreting this data, give the maybe give the don’t sort of jumped to the conclusion that this company is discriminating against women. Is that clear enough? Or does that need to be clear? Look,

Leonora Risse  22:39

I think people’s reaction is a sign that they’re curious to know those answers. So companies can publish their their workforce profile, you know, in their annual reports, you know, they can publish this is this is the gender composition of, you know, our pilots or flight attendants, nothing stopping them from publishing that type of information either. And, indeed, Weijia does collect a lot of other data and statistics from companies that also reflect gender equality indicators, not just just pay. So it is in that data set, and I think, which is very research oriented and evidence based. So they will be looking to dig deep into that data through an analytical lens to you know, make sense of this. It means some of the policy implications could be okay, what are we doing in schools, and training to encourage more women will not just encouraged but support more women into aviation and airlines, and to ensure they thrive and succeed and feel respected and don’t don’t encounter sexism, which is, you know, currently still still an issue. So that in the future for these companies, they can say these compositional effects. We are acting on that, in terms of this, this pipeline, and also retention and career advancement. Of course, once once people are in the company. I think one one big takeaway, a positive takeaway from having this data out there is that we know that there’s a lot of backlash and resistance and scepticism, there’s no such thing as the gender pay gap. As someone working in this field. I hear that all the time. People feel like it’s not justified. It’s not it’s not warranted that you know, it’s against the law to pay women less than men. So really, this is all just an accounting trick. I heard that response in that comment, those comments and they flared up again, obviously, I think when you look at this data, this is these companies missing, saying yes, we have a gender pay gap, but the companies themselves are reporting This number. So you can’t really dismiss an argue and saying there’s no such thing as a gender gap in earnings basically, because the companies themselves now have publicly declaring that they do. So at least that gets us, you know, one step further along in this ongoing argument or case that we, you know, up till now, a lot of our time and energy is spent just simply trying to verify that there isn’t gender passion in earnings, a gender pay gap, partly due to composition, partly due to a whole lot of other factors. At least the companies themselves now are on record is reporting publicly, yes, this is the gender pay gap in our company.

Gene Tunny  25:47

Okay, we’ll take a short break here for a word from our sponsor.

Female speaker  25:53

If you need to crunch the numbers, then get in touch with adept economics. We offer you Frank and fearless economic analysis and advice. We can help you with funding submissions, cost benefit analysis studies, and economic modelling of all sorts. Our head office is in Brisbane, Australia, but we work all over the world, you can get in touch via our website, www dot adept economics.com.au. We’d love to hear from you.

Gene Tunny  26:22

Now back to the show. So in terms of the criticism, so you you mentioned this, there has been some very strong criticism. And some of that has come from economists. So well, at least one prominent economist Judith Sloan commentator at the Australian former commissioner Productivity Commission. She has been on various boards. And she said that it’s nonsense. She thinks that it’s not comparing like with like soy, because you’ve got. So I’m just wondering, is there a way that they could do this? So it’s just not this one indicator where we’ve got these compositional issues? We’re not comparing, like with like, would it make sense to, like have a narrower, like habit for specific occupations or particular types of work in the company? Would that be? I mean, that could be a better way to do it. And it could be less controversial? Because I think it’s like, I like data. And I think this is interesting in terms of public conversation. This is it’s quite extraordinary. I mean, my mother’s actually contacted me about this, with her thoughts on it. So that’s an indication of how wide the reach. I mean, not that I mean, she does follow current affairs and all that, but usually she’s not getting in touch about the latest economic report. But this time she has because it certainly has. Yeah, it’s really gripped people’s attention more than any other report in recent times. So yes, I’m just wondering about that, whether there’s a better way they could present the data, or, you know, just more just make it clear. Yep. This is just be careful. Don’t read too much into this at the moment. We need, you know, you really need more data than this to make judgments.

Leonora Risse  28:15

Yes, look, this is the first year this data has been published. And even I put in a submission to the Workplace Gender Equality Act review, highlighting what some of the overseas experiences were about the risks and opportunities of publishing. pay gaps transparently. It does come with potential risk of misinterpretation, it even comes with the risk that some people some employers might look at this list and go you know what, yes, our gender pay gaps pretty bad, but so are all the other companies in our industry and it normalises it, and it legitimises going, you know what we’re not that out of step as it is, so we’re not that different from our competitors. So you’ve got all these potential risks around this. And I think you’ve you have articulated one there as well, but just with one number, people might dismiss it because they don’t feel like it adequately explains the whole picture, and therefore they disengage, and they put down and criticise the whole effort based on that reaction, so you kind of you kind of can inflame or agitate people because they might be a bit sceptical to begin with, or quite unsure. And this can push them just to disengage and spread rumours or misinterpretations or myths about inaccuracies and how to interpret the data. So I think you are pointing towards the fact that I think what people are searching for is a more complete explanation. That takes into account some of these compositional effects. That’s where economists come into the picture. So how do we how do we communicate I hate that in a way, and how do we build trust in the public to say, look, these methodologies, these analytical processes, they might sound technical, but you, you have to trust some of the way that we do this analysis, because we have rich data sets, like the Hilda survey that I’ve used previously, ABS data, where we can unpack and we don’t want to come up with ideologically driven inaccuracies in how we interpret it, that’s not really helping, because we’re not going to solve the problem if we, you know, diagnose this incorrectly. So, in terms of our role as scientists and evidence based and data driven, professionals, we have to treat this data, right. So I think the capacity is there to unpack it and to relay that interpretation and that story, to the general public and to decision makers and employers and employees. One example could be here is that, you know, there will be some employees of these companies that look at that data. And, and want to understand why there’s a reported gender pay gap of that magnitude, and want to understand what’s driving it. So should they be entitled to more pay? Or is it because they happen to be in the occupational category that’s relatively lower pay, I think employees deserve to have that type of explanation, as well, so they don’t lose morale. So they don’t feel underappreciated. Hopefully, there is there are opportunities where employers do pick up on where there are some gaps that can be can be narrowed. So I think it’s in the interests that we get the diagnosis. Right? Look, one thing I would also say with the analysis, and when when we run these econometric models, and we plug in all this data, what we can use are these decomposition tools that will tell you this is the component of that overall percentage that can be explained by industry confidence, or occupation, composition, or can be explained by that particular industry. Or it can be explained by educational background, for example, that’s something that works in favour of women, because they have overall average higher education levels. Something that is attributed. What part is due to more experience in the workplace and women on average, having more time out, we can actually get a grip on all of those percentages. I think where there’s also controversy is where people say, well hang on, is that, is that by choice? Or is that because of societal insufficient or cultural norms that that’s happened. So that’s another point of contention, where some very liberal thinkers will say, Well, yes, that can be explained by women going into lower earning occupations are spending time out, but that’s their choice or their preference. But then I think sociologists and other types of economists will, will contend that and say, No, actually, that’s not that choice isn’t made in a vacuum, that choice is made, because the full suite of opportunities, weren’t there for that, that person. So I think that’s another point of difference of interpretation.

Gene Tunny  33:29

So just to recap, is it true that the bulk of that gender pay gap can be explained in a way statistically, by differences in occupational choice or, or the industry, they’re working in educational qualifications, and there’s a small, just a small percentage that you really can’t and it’s

Leonora Risse  33:49

unexplained. Look, most of the time, what we try to do in these models is add more and more observable data and variables into the model so that the explained portion expands and that unexplained portion gets smaller and smaller. Now, some of the explained portion can still be interpreted as discrimination, and bias. So for example, you might say, Well, women are more likely to be in some of these care oriented professions, and then lower paid. And so that is one of the explanations for the overall gender pay gap. But then you might say, Well, hang on, what are the gender biases in society that don’t value that workers as much or that that still have gender norms and stereotypes that say that’s a woman’s job, right? So even if it’s explained, it doesn’t necessarily mean it’s free from biases and inequities as well.

Gene Tunny  34:52

Right? Okay. Yeah, yeah, yeah. Yeah, I understand the role of societal norms. And yeah, I think we chatted about that before. So I might put a link back to that conversation. I thought it was a good one. I want to ask about Claudia Goldin because Claudia Goldin, she won the Nobel Prize for Economics last year. Judith Sloan quoted her work in so in Judas article and Judas, because Judas is saying, Well, this is all nonsense, because this is just all yes, you’re not comparing like with like, it’s it’s all just explained by difference differences in composition, different choices people make, and she was interpreting Claudia Goldin to the students is interpreting 40 Golden is saying that the gender pay gap, it’s mostly due to the fact that there’s this premium for long and unpredictable hours and men are more likely to to work those jobs pursue that pursue those jobs, because women are more likely to be care as in they don’t have the Yeah, they, they’re more Yeah, they’re less likely to want to pursue those jobs like as as males, pursue them. So disproportionately, so what do you think about that? As a theory? I mean, what, because I think we’ve chatted about Claudia Golden’s work before or since the Nobel Prize was announced. So would you be able to comment on that, please? Sure,

Leonora Risse  36:20

absolutely. So, Claudia Golden’s. The concept that she’s coined here is, is greedy jobs to reflect these particular jobs in the workforce that demand a lot of you as a worker, to work long hours to be on call on weekends on late shifts, and to be rewarded for that. That’s the important part. So should be paid overtime rates to be fast tracked to promotion to get bonuses in reward for, for being, I guess, more available to your employer, I think it’s partly a symptom of capitalist society as well, you know, to really, to really draw as much of the worker that you can out in terms of their time, their loyalty, their commitment. And so the Claudia Golden’s work brings the gender dynamic into that this concept brings the gender Knight dynamic into that because the way that society and policy is structured is that it forces couples, if we’re looking at a male and female couple should make a choice with as a household as to which of them are going to be that particular worker and be on call, and which of them are going to attend to carrying responsibilities to household tasks at home. So collectively, they’re maximising or optimising their total income and trying to balance, you know, both both spectrums. So the way that gender norms give rise is that it tends to be on average, the male partner who will put their hand up for those greedy jobs. And females who, who would opt to, you know, be on call at home, basically. And so the gender pay gap widens, even on an hourly basis, because this there’s this premium attached with those types of jobs. And they’re rewarded, you know, it’s it’s seen as a positive thing in workplace culture. And so the, my, you know, the way that I interpret Claudia Golden’s work, and she articulates this, I think pretty clearly in her book, career and family is that unless you have gender equity at home, it’s very hard to achieve gender equity in the paid workforce. So as long as there’s some sort of gender division at home, you just don’t have that time availability in the paid workforce. So she’s actually advocating for, for gender equality, she’s not saying this rationalises or legitimises the existence of the gender pay gap, she says it’s a an explanation that needs attention. And that we should be looking at how do we look for ways to reduce this culture of expecting workers to be working such extensive hours and to be on call? How can they be more substitutable with each other, so you know, if you’re not available, it doesn’t matter because your colleague can step in. And she gives examples from the industry of pharmacy, the pharmacy industry where that that is, is a change in cultural practice, and that allowed more women actually to advance in that industry. So that, you know, the action or the policies that emerge from that are ones that start to address that existing inequity in the city. system and steer us towards something that’s more equitable. And I would say also healthier as well. Now, other people might interpret that differently. But I think that’s a very, very, you know, firm and widespread way of expressing Cambodia Golden’s work, I did write a book review of her book, and it’s published in the economic record. Yeah, I’d be very pleased for people to have a read of that and see what see what they think of the points that Claudia Goldin has expressed. And of course, yesterday, Jean, she was awarded the Nobel Prize in Economics, in recognition of decades and decades of work, looking at women’s participation in the workforce, and how that has changed over time, from an historical perspective, right up to contemporary time, so she is a big advocate and champion for working towards a more gender equitable economy.

Gene Tunny  41:02

Yeah, I have to read that book of hers. I read your book review and then read her book. She’s at Harvard, isn’t she? Correct.

Leonora Risse  41:08

She’s in the Harvard economics department. And I believe she was the first female to be tenured as appropriate and reach a professor status at Harvard University.

Gene Tunny  41:20

And you visited Harvard a few years ago. Did you did you get to meet Claudia Goldin? Yes,

Leonora Risse  41:24

that was an absolute highlight. Yes, absolutely. This was before she won the Nobel Prize. But even then, it was a huge honour. She was also very closely involved in the American economics Association’s women’s group, which is the equivalent of our women in economics, here in Australia, so we had a great conversation about that. But what was fascinating, I think, is that she has spent so much of her time and focus, telling this story of how women’s opportunities have changed over time. But effectively, they’re still not entirely a free choice. They’re still governed by, by policy, it’s governed by or shaped by technology. A great example of her work was the economic effects of the invention of the pill, the oral contraceptive, which really, you know, liberated women from a lot of it opened up more opportunities for them to control their their family planning and participate more fully in the paid workforce. So fascinating research over time that looks at what, what factors have shaped women’s opportunities in positive as well as negative ways?

Gene Tunny  42:44

Yeah, absolutely. I’m gonna have to read your work and try to get her on the show one day, for sure. Right? Oh, well, we better start wrapping up because I’ve, I’ve taken a lot of your time. It’s been it’s been really fascinating, good, good having this conversation and sort of delving into this and what it all means. And I think the way that you’ve, you know, you’re making me go beyond what the data, what the exact, you know, the data or just arts industry, its occupation, or think about what’s the other societal factors or norms that are leading to these occupational choices. I think that’s a good point. So certainly worth considering. on that issue of, you know, this greedy jobs, and I think this gets to what, why someone like Matt Canavan, Senator Matt Canavan, an old friend of mine, he’s a Senator for the conservative LNP party, Liberal National Party here in Queensland. And he’s come out very aggressively against this report. Matt’s been on the show before we had a chat about Net Zero. I’ll put a link in the show notes to that. And I think Matt was saying, look, the problem is that you can’t just scale up these jobs, like a point eight, you can’t just multiply it by one divided by point eight to get what the equivalent salary is, and then do a comparison because there’s that premium for the long and, and predictable hours. So that was, I think that’s what his point was, wasn’t it, but that he doesn’t think this exercise is particularly valid at all. And then you had a bit of an exchange with him on Twitter. So could you tell us about what that exchange was about? Please? Leonora? Sure.

Leonora Risse  44:23

So yeah, I mean, again, this is an example of this data, getting people talking, first of all, trying to understand the methodology, how were these gender pay gaps being calculated? So we get a grip on that, and it sounded like, you know, the way you’ve described it there, I think, was a good, good example of then people prompting, or is that the appropriate way to, to analyse this, this data? So I think on Twitter, I mean, I tried to use social media very mindfully and simply really to express what could be or to offer input to correct inaccuracies of interpretation just in the interest of public knowledge and public information is there something I can add so that there there is less risk of misinformation and debunking misinterpretations. So I pointed out, you know, this is the way the data is calculated, it does account for hours worked, it is annualised to a full time equivalent. So it does include people across the different hours spectrum. And it excludes CEOs, and it is calculators, medians, as I mentioned earlier, so we don’t have those statistical effects of extreme outliers. But then I think the way you’ve articulated it was that, you know, I guess Matt Canavan response was, Well, is that really how we should be going about it? Because if you’re working full time, does that mean that your contribution, even per hour is worth more than part time? That’s effectively I guess, one way to interpret it? I guess what he’s saying then is He’s agreeing with the greedy jobs phenomenon. And then that’s a question for all of us. So what is the greedy jobs phenomenon? Actually fair? And is it? Is it also reflective of productivity? Because if you’re working very, very long hours, is your productive value chain is a marginal decline? Is it actually worth more, as well? So you’ve got these other potentially offsetting rationale to think that maybe extra long hours, additional hours? Is that actually worth more per hour? This for hours? You know, so is there a premium? Is that premium justified? If people aren’t able to work more than part time hours, because they have care responsibilities, and so they miss out on that premium for overtime? Well, that will come through in the data. But then again, we should be questioning well, is that actually fair? Is that how we want society to function? Or can we restructure our policy so that if you have predominantly women who are working part time who aspire to work more hours, that can because effective marginal tax rates mean they actually take home less or they don’t have childcare places available? Or, you know, there are other carrying demands that it basically brings up a whole lot of other gender patterned inequities? I mean, what I would also say, I think the exchange with Matt Canavan online, also revealed, I think, some level of an underlying response, which was that we’re talking about masculinity norms coming undone. That there’s another there’s a deeper narrative here that the more that we try to advance women’s opportunities in the workforce, there will be some people out there whose responses? Well, there are still jobs that require physicality that’s associated with masculinity. And that’s worth more I think, I think some of the posts that Canavan posted could have been sort of along those lines, or has made allusions to people feeling that the gender pay gap or gender equity initiatives are unfair for Superman. And therefore that can, in his eyes, rationalise why men might look for highly masculinized icons and role models to gravitate towards for a sense of identity and solidarity. I think that’s potentially one interpretation of this undercurrent of reactions that was coming through,

Gene Tunny  49:01

right. Yep. So Matt, Matt suggested that reports like this could actually widen the gender divide, could actually lead young men to embrace Andrew Tate, for example. So I think that was the example

Leonora Risse  49:13

what is the conclusion he drew, but I think that’s a very, yeah, I wouldn’t enter into Logic.

Gene Tunny  49:18

Okay, I want to just want to go back on the greedy jobs, just so I characterise what Matt was saying, but the technical point he was making, so yeah, there’s the greedy jobs aspect of it. But there’s also the fact that if you’re full time, even if you’re just working 38 hours a week, or 40 hours a week, you’re more valuable, like say, compared with someone who’s only working half time, you’re actually more than you’re more than twice as valuable than that person, because you’re there all through the week and you can respond to the issues that come up and you’ve got continuity of the work so you’re more you can fit more into the the processes that are at play. You’re more reliable, you’re more diverse. In the world to upper management, for example,

Leonora Risse  50:02

I think that’s one party can go down based on that logic. I’m not sure if that if really, he was. He was expansive on that logic or based on on the Twitter post, but I think that’s, that could be one way of some people attempting to rationalise or legitimise why workers who work more hours in absolute terms should be given a higher pay rate per hour. Now, for some employers, that might be their logic, again, I would come back to is that really a measure of your true productive contribution per hour? Or is that a sense of some strategy for some employers to? You know, to really attract and retain and, and extract excessive time and energy from their employees and potentially, in an unsustainable way over time, if you’re working very, very long hours, if you’re always on call? Is that healthy and sustainable over the long run as well?

Gene Tunny  51:25

Possibly not I mean, that was one of the things i There are a lot of good things I liked about when I was working at Treasury. But one of the downsides was that you’re often always on call, depending on the area you’re in. So when I was in budget policy, for example, you were just always on call almost. And you you’d often have to come in on weekends work late at night, if the treasurer wanted a briefing or something. Yeah, it was, it wasn’t I don’t think it was, I don’t think

Leonora Risse  51:50

and also to Gene like, you can control for that in your model as well. So I’ve done analysis using the Hilda data for the gender pay gap based on hourly wages, and I put in a variable to control for overtime, and you still see an unexplained gender pay gap. Right.

Gene Tunny  52:07

Okay. I just finally, well, over time is this. This is both paid and unpaid overtime, because a lot of overtime. Maybe we can we can I can know,

Leonora Risse  52:21

in terms of the data that I’ve been Yeah, yeah. So it does ask, do you usually work more than I think it’s 50 hours, we’ll see it’s got all these different thresholds that you can choose. So you can put that in? And then of course, if you don’t control for that, then you are diluting your hourly wage calculation because you’re dividing by a bigger number. So you really have to control for that. Okay. Yes, yeah. But basically, I’m saying that even if you were to say and accept the logic that say, with the big data where we can’t use annualised full time equivalent, because there’s a premium associated with working sets of hours and overtime being on call, okay, if you want to buy into that logic, we can kind of control for that and adjust the calculations. Okay. It doesn’t, yeah, doesn’t explain away the gender pay

Gene Tunny  53:15

gap. Right. But this is where I think, yeah, yeah. This is where we need to use data sets like Hilda household income labour dynamics Australia, ABS data, to what extent does this do you think you can use this to to help improve the analysis? Or is this just a novelty? Or is this just something that, you know, makes the news? That is that is not really valuable for research and insights? What are your thoughts on this big

Leonora Risse  53:43

data set is one of the most valuable data sets? I would say internationally, right? It is a census. It’s not even a sample. It’s a census of all these companies. And we’re GIA collects a whole bunch of other information about these companies that can be plugged into an analytical model to conduct that type of decomposition analysis. So I know they have that research orientation, and they’re looking to conduct that type of research in the future.

Gene Tunny  54:14

Okay, well, I’ll look out for I’m sure you’re going to be analysing the data, you’ll be looking at the data, that can

Leonora Risse  54:21

be one of those researchers doing that, again, just to make sense of the data. There’s a lot of explanatory power in there. We use the analytical models to get under the hood. Okay,

Gene Tunny  54:33

good. Good. Finally, should have asked, Are we the only country that’s doing this?

Leonora Risse  54:38

Oh, good question. So my understanding is, no, there are a few other countries around the world. So a lot of this was informed by international experiences as well as that sort of gave rise to why these laws changed in Australia. So in the UK, they do it in Denmark. They do it could be a few other companies, but you know what, that’s where some of these lessons learned come from? So one example that I’m aware of is in the UK in universities, they had pay gap transparency. Yes, they saw the pay gap narrower. But mainly, by virtue of senior women negotiating for higher pay or leaving to go to a high paying employer, the junior women didn’t have the same sort of capacity to leverage that data or to bargain. So not all women, for example, can use this data. In Denmark, when they had pay gap transparency, they saw a narrowing of the overall gender pay gap through a slowdown in men’s wage growth on average. So it wasn’t because women’s wages accelerated and caught up. It was because over time, men’s ongoing wage growth, it didn’t go backwards, but it just didn’t go up as much. And so it meant overall, the wage bill for companies doesn’t necessarily go up because you saving maybe there was some men that you were paying more than what they said.

Gene Tunny  56:05

There hasn’t been a causal study of that, though, has there? This is just observation. This is Oh,

Leonora Risse  56:11

no, this is this is a proper academic journal study. Really? Okay.

Gene Tunny  56:15

I have to look at that, that I’ll have to look at the methodology to see how they draw that conclusion. Because it sounds like I mean, yeah, it’d be interesting if it were true. I mean, I’d be interested in seeing the methodology to just to check that, you know, it’s just not something that, you know, happened. I mean, the whole the whole post hoc, ergo Propter. hoc, as

Leonora Risse  56:33

in there could have been some external shock. Potentially, I think you always want to ask those questions. Yeah, sure. I think what was interesting was that it was yes, it was a narrowing, but it was because of this slowdown from men’s wages rather than accelerates it. So it shouldn’t just be expecting all women’s wages are going to catch up now. Yeah. And narrowing of the gender pay gap involves two moving pieces.

Gene Tunny  56:56

Right. Yeah. Okay. Well, you know, this has been great. I’ve really grilled you over the the geo data, and you’ve been doing great in answered a lot of my questions. And yeah, it’s been great to have you on the show. I think this is a very important topic. We’ve talked about it before. Other Any other thoughts? Anything you’d like to say to wrap up?

Leonora Risse  57:23

Open question there. I think I think you’re right, we covered we covered a lot here. I think the takeaway is so how do we act on this data in a constructive way, is to make sure we don’t put the onus on individual women to now go and get this data and expect them to rock up to their employer and say, I deserve a pay rise. Really, the onus should be on employers and companies to care enough about these pay gaps to want to at least explain it and do something about it. So that fix the system rather than fix the women is a recurring piece of advice that I think applies. In this context, if companies are asking or if you’re thinking, What can I suggest to my company? What should I do? What should we recommend that our company does? One evidence based strategy is to make closing the gender pay gap, part of your KPIs, your key performance indicators for your managers and executives. And that’s an evidence based way that really seems to get the ball rolling. Yeah,

Gene Tunny  58:34

yeah, that’s a yeah, that’s, that’s one thing that certainly could motivate the executives to pay attention to it for sure. I mean, I, I expect that for some of these companies, for jet staff or others that you look at the data and like, whoa, that’s, that looks like a much higher gap than I’d expect. you’d hope or Well, I think I would expect that they would have a board paper, the next board meeting, delving into it, trying to explain why there is this gap. Okay. Well, it’s because of the composition of the workforce, right? Yeah. So I think they’ll they’ll have to do

Leonora Risse  59:09

and one, one takeaway there is like, if we are going to judge companies, perhaps one way to look at it is which companies are improving the gender pay gap over time, so not just the absolute amount now, which in some ways might be slightly outside of their control. But if you look from one year to the next, which ones are narrowing, and getting better, in addition to other indicators, we should be looking at, like, other measures of safety and other things that matter for gender equality. So yeah, this is the first of a series of data points. And I think that indication of progress over time, could emerge as a more important indicator than a simple snapshot in time. Yeah,

Gene Tunny  59:55

yeah, I think that’s good point. Okay, Leonora thanks so much for your time. I really Lily enjoy the conversation.

Leonora Risse  1:00:01

Thank you, Jane for having me likewise.

Gene Tunny  1:00:04

Right. Oh, thanks for listening to this episode of economics explored. If you have any questions, comments or suggestions, please get in touch. I’d love to hear from you. You can send me an email via contact at economics explore.com Or a voicemail via SpeakPipe. You can find the link in the show notes. If you’ve enjoyed the show, I’d be grateful if you could tell anyone you think would be interested about it. Word of mouth is one of the main ways that people learn about the show. Finally, if your podcasting app lets you then please write a review and leave a rating. Thanks for listening. I hope you can join me again next week.

1:00:51

Thank you for listening. We hope you enjoyed the episode. For more content like this. To begin your own podcasting journey head on over to obsidian-productions.com

Credits

Thanks to Obsidian Productions for mixing the episode and to the show’s sponsor, Gene’s consultancy business www.adepteconomics.com.au. Full transcripts are available a few days after the episode is first published at www.economicsexplored.com. Economics Explored is available via Apple PodcastsGoogle Podcast, and other podcasting platforms.

Categories
Podcast episode

AI in Finance: Empowering Investors with Real-time Market Insights w/ Andrew Einhorn, LevelFields – EP229

Andrew Einhorn from LevelFields shares insights into leveraging AI for financial market analysis. Their innovative platform is designed to detect key events affecting stock prices, enabling investors to react swiftly. The conversation covers the benefits of AI in democratizing financial information and the future implications for investment strategies. Disclaimer: Nothing in this episode should be considered financial or investment advice. Our aim is to provide information and insights to help you understand the evolving landscape of AI and investing. Always conduct your own research or consult a financial advisor before making investment decisions.

Please get in touch with us with any questions, comments and suggestions by emailing us at contact@economicsexplored.com or sending a voice message via https://www.speakpipe.com/economicsexplored

You can listen to the episode via the embedded player below or via podcasting apps including Google PodcastsApple Podcast and Spotify.

About this episode’s guest Andrew Einhorn

Andrew Einhorn is the visionary CEO and co-founder behind Level Fields, a groundbreaking company leveraging artificial intelligence (AI) to revolutionize the way investors interact with the stock market. With a career deeply rooted in technology and finance, Einhorn has dedicated himself to democratizing access to advanced investment strategies, making it possible for the average investor to make informed decisions swiftly and with confidence. Before establishing Level Fields, Einhorn led a successful event monitoring system company for a decade, serving publicly traded companies and offering insights into how market events affect stock prices. His passion for utilizing technology to enhance market transparency and fairness has led to the creation of Level Fields’ AI-driven platform, designed to scan the market for events impacting stock prices, thereby leveling the playing field between retail investors and the larger, more resource-rich players in the market.

What’s covered in EP229

  • Introduction. (0:00)
  • Using AI to analyze financial news and announcements. (2:47)
  • Using AI for stock market analysis and avoiding fraudulent companies. (7:19)
  • AI applications and their limitations. (13:38)
  • Using AI to analyze market data for investment insights. (18:24)
  • AI-powered stock market analysis. (23:26)
  • AI-powered investment research platform for retail investors. (28:01)
  • Using AI to analyze audio transcripts for investment insights. (33:12)
  • Using AI for event monitoring and investment analysis. (38:45)
  • Using historical data for investment strategies. (44:10)
  • AI’s role in investing and the financial establishment’s reaction. (49:19)

Takeaways

1. AI can help democratize access to investment strategies by scanning vast amounts of market data and financial reports that individual investors cannot monitor themselves.

2. Understanding how historical events have impacted stock prices can provide insights on predicting future price movements and avoiding losses from overreacting to news.

3. While AI is not a crystal ball, it can be a useful tool for investors when combined with human judgment, by automating tedious research tasks and identifying potential opportunities that may otherwise be missed.

Links relevant to the conversation

LevelFields website: https://www.levelfields.ai/ 

Andrew’s interview on the Side Hustle City podcast: https://www.sidehustle.money/1350142/14348901-revolutionizing-investing-andrew-einhorn-unveils-levelfields-the-game-changing-tool-in-stock-market-analysis 

Transcript: Revisiting Ricardo: The Rise and Fall of Ricardian Equivalence

N.B. This is a lightly edited version of a transcript originally created using the AI application otter.ai. It may not be 100 percent accurate, but should be pretty close. If you’d like to quote from it, please check the quoted segment in the recording.

Andrew Einhorn  00:04

Just like any new tech in the market, you’re going to piss off some people. And, you know, we’re trying to give some of these strategies to the general population and democratise access and everyone likes that.

Gene Tunny  00:26

Welcome to the economics explored podcast, a frank and fearless exploration of important economic issues. I’m your host gene Tunny. I’m a professional economist and former Australian Treasury official. The aim of this show is to help you better understand the big economic issues affecting all our lives. We do this by considering the theory evidence and by hearing a wide range of views. I’m delighted that you can join me for this episode, please check out the show notes for relevant information. Now on to the show. Hello, thanks for tuning in to the show. Today we’re exploring an exhilarating intersection, AI and investing. In this episode, we’re joined by Andrew einhorn the CEO and co founder of level fields, a company that’s at the forefront of applying AI in financial markets. Andrew and his team have developed a platform that scans the market for events proven to impact stock prices, allowing investors to make more informed decisions rapidly. For Andrew is not just about speed, it’s about levelling the playing field between the average investor and the big players in the market. As always, I’m interested to hear what you think about the issues we discuss on this show. So please get in touch and share your thoughts. You can find my contact details in the show notes. Before we proceed, I need to make a quick disclaimer. Nothing in this episode should be interpreted as financial advice specific to you. Our aim is to provide information and insights to help you understand the evolving landscape of AI and investing. Always conduct your own research or consult a financial advisor before making investment decisions. Right? Oh, we’d better get into it. I hope you enjoy my conversation with Andrew einhorn from level fields. Andrew einhorn from level fields, welcome to the programme.

Andrew Einhorn  02:15

Thanks, Gene happy to be here. Appreciate you having me on.

Gene Tunny  02:18

Excellent. You’re doing some very interesting things in AI and in applying AI to financial markets that I’m delighted to have you on the show to talk about so your company is level fields and the pitch is find better investments 1800 times faster. Ai scans for events proven to impact stock prices. So you don’t have to. Okay, so can you explain I mean, what are you actually doing there? Andrew? What’s this? What’s this AI? What’s it scanning? Can you please talk to us about that place?

Andrew Einhorn  03:01

Your Yeah, happy to, at a very, very basic level. It’s monitoring the market for events that are proven to move share prices, either north or south, and positively or negatively. If you know how a price is going to move, and you’ll learn about the event happening, then you can anticipate that move. And you can make short, mid or long term bets trades knowledge and information, you know, concrete piece of it would be you know, if the CEO departs from a large corporation like an Amazon, we have a data analytic system that shows that usually results for companies like Amazon in a price decrease of a couple percentage points, you know, what’s happened with Amazon. But the data also shows that within about three months, the stock is right back where it used to be in many cases, far above it. And we can see the different types of stocks, you know, smaller stocks versus bigger ones, profitable or unprofitable companies, they all react a little bit differently. If you take an unprofitable, struggling company, and the CEO leaves, the share price often goes up. People are celebrating that, hey, you know, hope is coming. Let’s bring somebody else in. And so the data set shows that and it alerts people of these kinds of opportunities, which happen in some cases 100 times a day, across 1000s of stocks that are in the market. And so we track all types of events, leadership changes, capital deployments, you know, being added to indexes. Investors coming in large billionaires coming in and buying positions and companies pushing for changes. We have lots of different event types and the ideas, you can just quickly find what’s going on in the market without actually reading very much, because the AI is out there reading all these company announcements, all the reports, they’re putting out the news that’s covering them. And just in the US alone, that amounts to about 6300. Companies, all making announcements constantly. And we get a large part of our information directly from those companies. But the reports can be long, it can be boring, and they can be tedious for somebody to read, even if they have the time to read the reports of 6300 companies, which is physically impossible. Unless you have a couple 100 analysts covering all the stocks, you’re never going to be able to do it as an individual. As a result, there’s a natural discrepancy in the market, where an average investor doesn’t have the resources or the time or even the knowledge sometimes to find out about all these events, to know what’s going on in the marketplace. So they’re constantly at a disadvantage to large hedge funds and asset management shops that do have the resources to scan the entire market to deploy capital. And if you want to test that theory, just ask an average person to name as many stocks as they can. I think you’re gonna stump people around the 20 to 30. Mark, everybody can name the seven, The Magnificent Seven, right? After that, they’ll start to slow down. Even very good seasoned investors will have a tough time after that. And as the reason is that, a lot of the media is biassed towards those mega cap companies, covering them all the time, making you aware of them all the time, because you click on it. And they can if you click on it, and you read about it, they sell more ads. So they keep writing about Elon Musk and everything he says on Twitter because it drives advertising revenue. But what it also does is really Rob, you have the opportunity to hear about all these other companies that are doing great things that the media doesn’t cover, or they don’t have the staff to cover. And so that’s where the AI comes in, it can monitor the entire market for you. And really, for the first time ever, you have a personal assistant in reading and understanding and analysing financial news and financial announcements. And you can take that and create a very customised AI search agents look for just this type of thing that you want. So if you say, You know what, I really love investing in energy companies, and you go out look for energy companies that are growing revenue, at least 10% growing earnings, at least 20% and recently increased their dividend by you know, whatever percent, I just alert me every time that happens, I don’t have to do anything, ever again, on my research, I’m gonna get an alert, right in my email, when my criteria is matched. And if that’s my investment thesis, then I just go along on on those investments. So there’s a lot of flexibility in the platform. And what we’re really trying to do is kind of break down that barrier that most people have, and not being able to monitor the market at scale, not being able to see those was really interesting. bull markets, or in some cases, bear markets, because we can go both ways, you know, in the, in the strategies, short and long, that are reacting to different macroeconomic events. And we see that on the basis of company financials, we see that in the basis of what CEOs are saying and our financial outlook. We see that in the basis of what the leadership is doing with capital allocation. And so, you know, an example is when, you know, when Russia invaded Ukraine, there was in the middle of a pretty decent sell off already in 2022. That was happening. And this really accelerated the market sell off. But there were some companies that were thriving. I doubt many people would know what those companies were could list them, but a lot of them were fertiliser manufacturers that are based in Canada and the United States. And the reason was, they couldn’t get fertilisers, which a large percentage of them came from Ukraine, Belarus and Russia, you couldn’t get them out of that region because of the conflict. So the price of these types of fertilisers was rising was doubling. And so companies that weren’t involved in the conflict and could export their product. Were then selling it for double the price. And so what we saw on the platform was a slew of fertiliser companies, increasing their dividends doing special dividends, increasing stock buybacks, and we’re sort of you know, beating earnings and we’re wondering what is going on with fertiliser companies? I had no idea I never bought a fertiliser company in my life. But you do two seconds of Google research you say okay, they sell this you know, potash potash is a lot of it coming out at Bell roofs, they can’t get it. Price is 100 percent bull market for fertiliser companies. And so this one company that I actually invested in, called nutrient because Canadian, you know, the share price jumped 75% In about two months. So, you know, if you’re an investor and you can go straight equity, you can leverage with options, stock options, you can make a lot of money on those types of things. But you have to have the awareness, you have to know those things are going on. And you have to have a system is sort of connecting the dots for you fast enough for you to react otherwise, you know, you’re kind of going to sit in the same 789 stocks forever, not really knowing why they’re going up and down. Yeah, gotcha.

Gene Tunny  10:43

Are you scanning social media too? Because I mean, some of the names, you mentioned them, and you think of some of these high flying CEOs. Many of them are engaging in risky activities, you know, go into space, and all of that. I mean, are you scanning social media for for, you know, hints of, you know, potential, you know, shock news,

Andrew Einhorn  11:04

we were a little bit, we kind of pulled back from it, because Twitter was cutting off access to their data sets and their API to third party developers like us. But we also found it for the most part, you know, we were relying wanted to rely on the company announcement as much as possible. We want to do overweight, potential pumping, dumps that, you know, market manipulation that can sometimes happen. We’re trying to protect, you know, the users and the investors on our platform. Because there are some savvy, bad actors out there that will utilise social media to pump up stocks and fake news. And, you know, sometimes, if you’re not watching closely, you can fall prey to that.

Gene Tunny  11:44

Yeah, that’s a good point. Yeah. So there’s a lot. Yeah, so yeah, you got to be careful, you don’t really know what, what’s true out there. So that’s a really good point. Whereas with the company reports, I mean, obviously, they’re, you know, they’ve got a legal obligation to tell the truth, but have been sometimes, of course, you know, there can be,

Andrew Einhorn  12:03

and that happens to they, you know, sometimes the reports are fake, there was a company. I forget the name, but the ticker was to T IO. And they faked all their financials. And it looked like, you know, they did this wonderful quarter, and they were growing by 5,000%. And it was like, wow, one of the scenarios in the events that we tracked is the short seller reports. So, in funds, you know, they specialise in kind of busting the fakers that are out there in the market. And so he saw in our platform, those short sale report went up on this, went out on this company to and said, you know, all the all the founders were criminals, and they had already been convicted fraud before. Looks like they’re doing fraud. Again, they investigated some of these alleged sales contracts that they had that were worth, like a billion dollars. And what the company had done was sort of open up like a shell LLC, create a fake purchase order back to the company, and use that as sort of evidence that they were driving sales up. And so the whole thing just fizzled out. And so you do you do see a good amount of that, you know, years back, it was luck, and Coffea, China, they were faking their arse. And a similar kind of hedge fund, you know, put up a camera and started counting how many people actually went into the luck and coffees and said, you know, if, if their numbers are right, then they’re they’re serving four times the number a couple of coffees and Starbucks. Yeah, yeah.

Gene Tunny  13:39

So I just want to talk a bit about the AI, because you mentioned you’re scanning these company reports and news from the companies. And so to an extent, you’ve got to trust what’s coming out of them. And what have you got, is it so people talk about, and this is what I want to explore with you, because I think pre show we were talking about how, look, there’s been applications of AI for years. And there’s been things like algorithmic trading, which I mean, I’d be interested in your thoughts on how close that is to the AI, whether that’s a true AI, that the public discussion about AI is just really taken off with these, what they call these generative, pre trained transformers, if you’ve got that, right, the GPT chat GPT, where we’ve got that interaction with a Can you talk about please Andrew, they’ll try to explain, like what you’re doing, is it a are you using a GPT? Is that right? And how does it differ from what other people have done in the past

Andrew Einhorn  14:43

now we developed our own proprietary artificial intelligence system. And the way you kind of think about it is, you know, the chat. gfpt is sort of the mouth of a body. And the stuff that we’re doing is more like The beating heart. Right. And so the interaction with AI through chat, GBT is obviously, you know, through chat, it’s a communication channel. And so that’s one deployment of AI. whereas ours is more sort of, like, you know, a monitoring, AI, it’s going and finding different pieces of information that are out there. It’s making sense of them putting them together, you know, it’s a little bit more like cognitive functioning, I should say, probably better, better than the heart analogy. And so AI, in general, can be anything, you know, very, very basic tasks, very, very difficult sort of self directed tasks, it sort of depends on on your goal. Chat. GPT is great, you know, for interacting, but it’s completely reliant on third party data that has already found the answer to the question that it’s now speaking, right. It’s not thinking and processing for itself, it’s going into a database of information that it knows. And then it’s extracting that information and then saying to you, and like, plain language, here’s what I found, you know, a little bit more like an advanced Google search. And so what we’re doing is we’re finding the answer, right? So if you ask a question, like, why was Apple stock down yesterday, you’re gonna get some message that says, you know, my, my training only goes to February 2023. We, you know, we don’t do real time analysis, or might say something like, Well, according to this one news article, you know, blah, blah, blah. It’s not doing anything on its own, it’s just summarization, our system is going out and coming up with an answer, because we are not only extracting what happened in that event. So let’s use the example of Apple. So Apple stock goes down yesterday, we find out that Apple made an announcement through our AI and AI identifies Apple doing a product release of vision, pro whatever. And then in the system, it’s identified that the share price moved down. And that was the only major event. So those pieces of information the AI then puts together and says the reason why apples down was this bullish event product launch, which, you know, seven times out of 10 is actually negative for Apple. Now that we have that piece of information, you could overlay something like a Chet GPT into our database and say, Hey, why was Apple stock down yesterday, it would look at our data, pull it out and be able to summarise, you know, coordinate a level fields. This was because of, you know, blah, blah, blah, like Apple stock was down because of a product launch that didn’t go well, instead of you. If you look at that at scale, and say, Okay, well, our system is more was a research agent that’s actively out there looking for information, assessing what’s going on analysing what’s going on, and then coming up with a data array of information, just showcase what happened. It gives you far more information about what’s likely to occur next. And I think the best example I can give is like a weather report. Yeah, here’s where it’s raining, here’s where it’s sunny, there’s an 80% chance that the rain is going to be four inches of rain. And it’s going to last for 12 hours. And that’s kind of what the analytics of historical data sets like ours can provide. And so if you are, you know, a type of person who wants to invest in stocks, but maybe doesn’t necessarily want to listen to someone’s opinion on CNBC, or, you know, one of these newsletter services, this is this is the next Amazon or these are five other stocks that are better than Amazon, you can actually look at the data set and see, well, this company had a big bullish event, this bullish event 80% of the time, ends up in a positive price return of 20% over the next X number of days, weeks, months. And so we’re trying to move away from that, you know, kind of human opinion driven stock market and move closer towards an understanding of how things normally play out. And a lot of the market, to your extent is is driven by algorithmic trading. And those trades, about 60% of the trades in the market are automated. And so why, how are they automated or automated on the basis of patterns that people are telling it to find? And so if you know how the algorithms are reacting, and you know what they’re reacting to, when you find the reason why they’re reacting, it’s easy to predict what happens next. And usually, they’re using some kind of technical analysis, looking at patterns and charts. And so the piece that we really plug in and say, well, these patterns and graphs and movements on the charts. That’s great. But events caused them. And so what we often see as the event happens, it starts to raise the price from the for the stock that that people are watching, then the algorithms see that price movement, because it breaks the pattern of some kind of technical analysis. And then the algorithms buy it and drive it even further. So you have that kind of double burst if you can get out in front of these events. Right. And that’s a lot of how the market moves. Yeah.

Gene Tunny  20:28

So yeah, a few follow ups. This is fascinating. Is your AI? Is it trying to then model how the algorithms will respond? Is it? Or are you just looking at the impact of events, so I know that you’ve from a previous interview, you’ve done your you’ve done a lot of deep research, we’ve looked at Google Scholar, you’ve pulled out studies, events, studies, which show how particular events impact the market, so you’ve got that information, or you also, and you know, there might be an immediate impact to you, then, are you trying to maybe to some extent, they’ve looked at this themselves, but are you then looking at how the market reacts through the reactions of all the other participants through the algorithmic trading, etc,

Andrew Einhorn  21:10

you look at an aggregate. So we think of market participants just broadly how it reacts, right, and in some cases, the system you can see, the speed of the reaction differs depending on the event type. For example, one of the events we track is an increase in dividend amount. You invest in dividend stocks are generally not moving really fast. You know, they’re there for longer term, they’re collecting dividends. And so the price action on that first event is relatively slow. Whereas other events, like a company being added to an s&p 500 index, there are big hedge funds that trade that specific scenario that have spent a lot of money to develop algorithms to buy shares, the second, the s&p organisation announces a new cause, you know, a new constituent in the index, that does trade very quickly. When we just show it, we just you can see it on the platform that they have, the average move is a percent done at an event like this. And if you start to look at some of the data, you’ll see it moves fast versus a dividend event, which may be moving slowly over several days, you know, and then if you’re looking at some of these things, in aggregate, like multiple dividend increases over the span of let’s say, a year, year and a half, you then can predict longer term gains, you know, a company that’s repeatedly saying things are good, so much, and they’re so good, we’re gonna give away money. And then that other pattern starts to reveal itself. And so it really depends how you want to use the system. And we’re, we’re very much the data provider using the AI to kind of showcase these patterns that exist all over the market. And in some cases, you can take kind of contrarian views or find these, you know, hidden gems that you would never see before. Just just just by having access to all of the data at kind of the palm of your hand. My favourite example is a stock called very, very active. It’s VR TV got bought out, but years ago, this was mid March 2020. We’re in the middle of COVID. And stock market selling off, we are going into lockdown globally. You know, the big ship is moving towards New York, you know, with extra hospital beds. And there’s there’s a there’s a panic. At that time, most companies, you know, are starting to slash their dividends. They’re looking at cost saving measures. There’s one company that came in started doing stock buybacks or buying back there shares. And it’s a very brave move. And you would think, stupid move for somebody to take their company’s cash right as we’re going into, you know, potentially a global depression and take that cash and start buying back their shares with it instead of using it for operating capital. Why would they do that? Well, this particular company is a engineering and kind of design firm. They build and sell direct to consumer product packaging, isn’t it that everybody used to sell through the big stores who had a product could no longer sell to the big box stores. They had to get it to your doorstep that required new type of packaging. In order to do that. The whole world was going through the same issue. Everybody’s Sitting at home buying stuff. And now you Commerce has completely shifted, this company is sitting in the middle of what ended up being a goldmine for them. And that precipitated a stock run of 2,600% growth over the next three years. And you would have never seen that had you not been following, you know, why would anybody be doing this random stock buyback in the middle of COVID. And so that’s the kind of thing that this system can can identify. And it’s, it’s, it’s a proof point that the macro economic event is either positively or negatively impacting, you know, these individual stocks. And you can’t, you can’t monitor the market for that kind of thing, because stocks still went down. That was a funny thing. And you hear people, you know, they’ll give a criticism, well, I just look to see what stocks are up. And when stocks are down, well, then it happens after Seminary has decided what to do. In this case, the stock kept going down for the next couple of weeks while the market sold off, and then began 26x run over the next three years.

Gene Tunny  26:09

Okay, we’ll take a short break here for a word from our sponsor.

Female speaker  26:15

If you need to crunch the numbers, then get in touch with adept economics. We offer you Frank and fearless economic analysis and advice. We can help you with funding submissions, cost benefit analysis studies, and economic modelling of all sorts. Our head office is in Brisbane, Australia, but we work all over the world. You can get in touch via our website, www dot adapt economics.com.au. We’d love to hear from you.

Gene Tunny  26:44

Now back to the show. Where are you guys? Do you in direct somewhere you’re in DC, the DC area or Baltimore? Is that right? Yeah, just

Andrew Einhorn  26:55

outside of Washington DC. We’re a Virginia based company.

Gene Tunny  26:58

Right authority. So Virginia rather than Maryland. And so if you’re you must have computer scientists on staff. Do you who develop this proprietary AI? I mean, what what’s your operation look like? Do you have? And you have people? Do you have actual analysts as well, I mean, you’re you solely relying on the AI to deliver the predictions.

Andrew Einhorn  27:21

We have all the above. You know, we have couple PhDs, some in linguistics, some in AI, some in physics, astrophysics, at do a lot of good in the modelling, and analysis work, we have those who have financial backgrounds, we have a lot of financial advisors that are from the street or certain hedge funds, previously, and sort of former lives that have helped devise the system. And so a lot of what we’re really trying to do is think, what are the big annoying, tedious, time consuming tasks that you have to do as an investor to figure out what to buy? And how can we automate that, all of it so that the barrier goes away. So you don’t have to sit there time and time again, doing a stock screen, or, you know, fiddling through a news feed for an hour and a half to keep up with what’s going on with your existing investments. We just want to streamline at all we want to give superpowers of investment research to an average person. So we started, you know, this process back in 2019. And it took several years to get it right. Part of it is built on historical academic models of others across the world that have studied, you know, how events impact share prices, some of them are original to us, others, you know, belong to hedge funds that we knew, use some of these event driven strategies and said, You know what, we could do this within our platform, let’s just put that on there. There should, shouldn’t need to have $10 million, you know, to be able to participate in the market. And so we saw subscription costs, very, very low, it’s the equivalent of $19 a month as our starting point. And then it goes up to 167 a month, depending on the tier that people are subscribing for, and the level of information that they want. But it makes it unique, more accessible to more people. So that you don’t have to rely on television stations, which frankly, are very often helping to push a narrative or push a particular stock, right? It’s often that these large asset managers are selling shares while they’re on TV talking about how great stock is because they need to sell 30 million shares. They need, you know, millions of buyers to offload those shares. Yeah,

Gene Tunny  29:54

yeah. So this is a you’re aiming at retail investors so you can Get this on while your browser or your phone, there’s an app for it, I imagine and you said their email alerts, is that right?

Andrew Einhorn  30:07

There’s email alerts. Yeah, we are, you can certainly access it from your phone, we don’t have a specific app, but we have mobile ready. And mobile accessible pages, you can get on your desktop, it’s very easy to use to try to make it as simple as like shopping for a flight on an airline. And unlike even unlike that, where you have to put in your destination, if you want, you can just browse to see, you know, what events that happened recently? And what are the price movements, quickly set an alert, and forget it, you know, and then the alert comes in, it will say, Hey, this is a bullish event. Share price typically moves, you know, X percent over time, or you can look into your own analysis, you know, based on the data that’s in there. So raw, we’ve tried to keep it very, very simple. Good one,

Gene Tunny  30:55

do you have any data on the performance of people who use your platform, or who you who use level fields,

Andrew Einhorn  31:03

we don’t track them. We have regularly, you know, get feedback, like thanks made a bunch of money on this are 1000 today that was, you know, bang for my subscription, 10 times, we do have a level we call it level two service. This is more of our white glove service where we have analysts that monitor the AI alerts. And they kind of cherry pick the best ones, and we’ve sent it out. And it’s really for people that want a little bit more help picking out your entry and your exit point that that service really outperformed our expectations. We we looked at the closed alerts for our first year of operating that and the return was 2,800% cumulative over the course of the year.

Gene Tunny  31:53

Right for the cherry picked alerts. Right. Okay. Do you have any data or any? I guess it’d be a very difficult thing to do. But of all the alerts, I mean, are you giving explicit bias buy or sell recommendations on with these alerts? Or are you just saying this, you should be paying attention to this?

Andrew Einhorn  32:14

Well, it will say, you know, this is a bullish event than in a bullish event, the share price goes up, right, so I tell them to buy, but it will say the share price is gonna go up, you can do whatever you want with that information, and it’s gonna go up by 3% in the first day, and then you know, 75% of the time by day 10, it’s going to be up this much. And so it’s really your job as the investor to say you how you want to play it, we have all types of users of the system, some will just buy it and make a quarter percent every single day. And others want to be able to just find the event that’s going to be up, you know, 100%, and they’re okay, waiting all year for two or three of those, which they do happen. They have others who have a lot of stocks in their portfolio. And what they’re looking to do is just find opportunities to make more money off the stocks that they have. So if they own apple, and Apple has a positive event, they get alerted to that. And they might sell an option contract for extra premium when this bullish event happens. Knowing that on day two, according to the statistics, that particular event actually pulls back to where it was people started to sell. So, you know, we’re we’re not trying to create the strategies per se, for folks, they’re there for the taking. And there’s a lot of guidance on the system. But the data itself is very revealing. It’s like, okay, if you knew every time you walk out the door, what the weather is, like, you know how to dress. This is the same thing. Like, you know what, what to do when these events happen. And that’s been a lot of the problem in the market is often people overreact, because they don’t know how bad the bad news is. They don’t know how good the good news is. And you see this like massive overreaction, you know, 2021, the whole year, but you see it all the time, you know, bow past where it’s supposed to be and then eventually pulls down and people get hurt because they buy at the top, and then they start selling on the way down and then stock goes back up. So, you know, it’s just as much about avoiding bad decisions, as it is finding good investments. And some of the events that we put on there we know, are 5050 they could go either way. You know, there’s a Tesla one on there as an example, and test the product launches. There’s a lot of traders that like to think, oh, every time there’s a new Tesla product, of course, Tesla’s gonna go up. It’s not true. After time goes down. And we we’ve gotten criticism for putting that event type on there. They’re like, well, like Can’t really trade this is 5050. And we’re sort of saying, well, that’s the point. Stop making bad decisions. That’s what we put it on there. So I knew it was like flipping a coin. Yes. Good point. Can I ask what? What markets you and you mentioned, you’re in, so equities in the US and there was what over 6000 companies on? Was it on the s&p. So New York Stock Exchange, Stock Exchange? Yep. Anything traded on the New York Stock Exchange anything on the NASDAQ, and we have some of the larger companies on the OTC so that includes foreign companies that have ADRs that trades in the US, it also includes, you know, the OTC Markets, which are some of the bigger European companies, like Volkswagen, is there. Yeah.

Gene Tunny  35:52

Okay. So just in equities? Are you in fixed income in bonds at all? Now?

Andrew Einhorn  35:57

Not yet, we’re just sticking to straight equities at the moment, although we do have a lot of option traders that use the platform to inform, you know, their particular option trades. Gotcha.

Gene Tunny  36:09

Okay. So as your competitive advantage, you’re getting this information quicker, because you’re getting a you’re looking at these reports that other analysts may not you’re getting a feed? Is it? Is it an API, you’re tapping into an API to get these reports? And then you’ve got the, the AI that analyses them all? Quickly? And there’s some AI magic there, it’s a neural net or some or something? Is that what is that what’s going on? You’re able to get this information in your Hoover it up, analyse it extremely quickly, and then push out the the advice is that essentially, what it’s about, in

Andrew Einhorn  36:51

a way? Yeah, I mean, it’s not necessarily a speed issue. You know, we certainly try to get the information as fast as we can. And largely, we get it within 45 minutes of an event taking place. Or being announced. We get the information ourselves, which means we data mined it ourselves, we pull it in, and we have it. And what the AI is really doing is it’s like a speed reader. So it’s reading 30,000 documents a minute. Yeah, okay, you just got through 30,000 reports. And then within that extracting 21 million events per year. And then looking at a group of events, saying okay, of these 21 million events, which ones actually move the share price and which ones don’t matter. And so then it’s selecting out about five or 6000 events that are known. We call them material events in their material to the share price movement. Once that happens, we’re then identifying what company had that event, pairing it with real time price action from the markets, to then correlate whether or not that particular event has had an impact on that particular equity. And then as we do that, for groups of events, let’s just say, you know, CEO departures, we have every CEO departure in an aggregate data set. And then you can look and say, Well, how to co departures, typically affect share prices, and it’s one click away. And there’s summary statistics that will show you okay, it moves in 4%. And it’s usually a bullish event. And then you can filter that information if you want. So, you know, is it the same cases in energy companies, as in tech companies? Is it the same case in large tech versus small tech, which is not the same case. So very quickly, you can kind of see, you know, with a couple filters, what’s going on there. And now that we have the data, yeah, you can get alerted to it. And you can act on it, if you want to trade it. Or you could just use it to do faster research. You know, by having all that you don’t have to read all that information yourself, because you just knew you now know what the main events are. For the equity that you’re doing research on, let’s see, pull up apple. In the platform, you put Apple Company page, and then you pull up a chart. And typically when you look at a stock chart, its ups and downs, ups and downs. Don’t know why it’s ups and downs, right? We’re just looking at it. And then normally, you would have to say, Okay, why did Apple drop 20% On this day? Let me go to look at a news feed. Let me go to the day of the news and look at the, you know, 300 articles that were about Apple that day and try to find information that would tell me why was it down 20% In this one day, you no longer have to do that. Because right on our charts, we have the event appended there that move the share price. And so you save yourself all that hassle all that time as you look at In Apple graph, you know, there might be 20 events, and each event is right before all those big movements on the graph, you can look at it that way, you could just scroll down the screen and see a list of all the recent events that Apple has has happened product launches, buybacks, dividends and so forth. And you just get within 15 seconds of view of, you know, what are the recent things that have happened to this company. And a lot of that is, is missing from the market today. Because if you were to go to something like a typical stock screener, and your brokerage system, and you’re gonna go, oh, I want to find out, I want to find a stock that has a great dividend, right? You’ll find these companies that have a 12% dividend. And you got to then then your research really begins because you get to find out, is there a weird reason why they have a 12% dividend, and then you pull up the share price? stock chart, and it shows that it was $60. And now it’s a $20 stock, which is why the dividend is now 12%. But why did it drop from $60 to 20? Now you have to go and do that research on our platform, you know, we would tell you, hey, you know, they’re filing for bankruptcy. You don’t need to do any research like that. But then it’s still what it is, they haven’t got it yet. So it’s time savings. It’s finding it investments, monitoring the market at large, setting your research process to be automated, but he’s AI search agents that you can use out of the box that we have or customised yourself, and really just see a lot more of what’s going on in the market and why it’s moving the way it’s moving. Right? So

Gene Tunny  41:43

you say AI search agents, out of the box that you have? Is this stuff you’ve developed? Or you’ve you’ve licenced from somewhere else?

Andrew Einhorn  41:54

No, we build everything from scratch, build everything. Right? Okay. So

Gene Tunny  41:58

you’ve How long have you been going have you been going before GPT and the GPT 3.5, for

Andrew Einhorn  42:06

where we started in 2019. Although I will say we had a company before this for 10 years that we operated, which also was an event monitoring system of sorts. Our client base was actually the publicly traded companies. And so the software system we built in that company did similar monitor events for large corporations. But it wasn’t geared towards investors, it was geared towards the public relations professionals that publicly traded companies. And so we’d see these patterns, and that, you know, something bad would happen, like if it was a train company, that train would come off the tracks for ash into a river or spill pollution, then the share price would plummet on the stock. And they would lose billions of dollars in market cap. And this would happen again. And again. And again, you know, same same type of event, same type of company. In other situations, you might have, you know, a data breach, like a cybersecurity data breach, then the company’s share price would fall. And so our software monitor that, and would send alerts to the corporate affairs and corporate communications people and they would get up in front of the podium where they would get the press releases out. And they would say, well, this wasn’t our fault. You know, they was actually the oil company that overloaded the train. And they would try to shake, save the share price by kind of blame. And so we have a lot of experience in that for 10 years. And then, you know, during that time, we’re like, maybe we on the wrong side of this issue, you know, we’re saving these people, billions of dollars a year. Maybe we should be using, you know, our knowledge and events to help make investments. And we sort of put that aside for a little while, sold the company and then started a new company and started checking with different ideas of what we could do with AI and how do we prove what we did the last 10 years. And then COVID hit in 2020. And it was like Aha, events, events, change everything that’s focused on events.

Gene Tunny  44:09

I do and day they’re doing day. You’ve got a fascinating backstory there. And I might, I’ll link in the show notes to a interview you did with on the side hustle city podcast, which was really good interview. And yeah, you told the full story and how you did consulting work for the Pentagon. I think it was and and then yeah, yeah. And your management, did management consulting, you did a grad, you did graduate studies at George Washington, if I remember correctly. So you’ve got an academic background, too, which is great. Yeah, so I’ll put a link in the show notes to that. I’ve just got a couple more questions. I’m wondering about hedge funds because one thing, some of the points you’re making, I’m thinking of that’s similar to the Ray Dalio Philosophy of because he’s he’s very interested in history and looking at how historical events played out and learning from those learning from events in the past. Imagine something, you know, Bridgewater or other hedge funds around the place, they must be interested in this sort of thing. Are they? Do you have any hedge fund clients? Are they like competitors of yours? Or how do you see? How do you see the other financial market players?

Andrew Einhorn  45:25

We don’t have a hedge fund clients, we certainly have some that have come to us. I don’t know if they’re pretending to be client or wanting to be a client, but they’re certainly interested in our methodologies and technology. I think, you know, just like any new tech in the market, you’re going to piss off some people. Have they cornered? And, you know, we’re trying to give some of these strategies to the general population and democratise access, and not everyone likes that. So we’re expecting it, you know, and the right now, you know, we’re for a self directed investor construct. The platform says it’s for personal use, commercial use, you know, will we make an API, you know, that can be accessed in the future? For certain types of data? Maybe, you know, we’re we’re looking at different ways that we could look, take our massive amounts of data that we have, and kind of enable different levels of processing of that data set. So yeah, I mean, it’s, it’s it’s an interesting marketplace, and that there are a lot of different strategies that people are deploying, there are large firms that have event driven strategies, some of them are fairly straightforward. Some of them are complicated. And it is a factor of historical information. But how you can utilise these patterns in the market to make better investments to make quicker money. I mean, the most famous trade in the world at this point was Bill Ackman straight during COVID, where he shorted the market while being on television, telling everybody to panic on CNBC, and made, you know, a couple billion dollars on that market short. And so the fund returned something like 75% that year. So when you can do those massive trades, then it’s great. You know, why? Why would you sit in the market all year, and watch, you know, these constant ebbs and flows of events, change the trajectory, or you’ve got wars that are breaking out, we have, you know, freighters that are being shot at oil prices are up, oil prices are down to nothing like you can’t, you know, and then you’re trying to be an investor and buy and hold philosophy, and then maybe you got a gain or you lose for the year, it doesn’t make sense to sit there forever, when you can just make that in a short period of time, hang out in cash at 5% yield, and then go back into the market when it’s safer. So our kind of method, or general philosophy really puts the buy and hold method on notice. And raw calls BS, okay, and says, you know, what, buy and hold is great if you’ve got the greatest stocks in the history of the market. But most of the time, it doesn’t work out so well. You know, GE, was the biggest stock in the s&p 500 in 2002. Now, it’s below where it was trading 20 years ago, that you’re buying and holding, you’re constantly losing money for two decades. You know, likewise, if you were to buy the s&p 500, in 2000, you would not make a single dollar until 2013 13 years later. So yeah, there’s a lot of these market myths about how long you should be holding and, you know, dollar cost averaging and things like that, that are that are kind of baked in narratives pushed by asset managers, banks, so you keep your money parked with them, and they can make money off your money. Yeah, look,

Gene Tunny  49:19

I think you make a lot of good points there, we might have to have you back on the show served over the future to have to have this discussion. Because I mean, I’m, as an economist, I am sympathetic to the view of, you know, just, you know, it’s time and time and time in the market beats timing the market, if you know what I mean. So I’m sympathetic to the view that the best thing you can do is just, you know, invest in the index and just let it grow over time. But I have to I do take your points. I don’t want to have a I don’t want to debate it out now. But it might be good to have a discussion in the future because I think it’s yeah, it’s a really important issue that you’re getting out there in terms of how we think about Investing.

Andrew Einhorn  50:01

Oh, yeah. And you know, I would just add that the argue, but it depends on your timeline. Right. Like it’s great. Yes. He’s got unlimited time. Fantastic. Eventually it’ll be right. Yeah, someday. But for a lot of people, they need to access their money. It’s an unreasonable assumption, you know that you’re not going to touch your money for 20 years.

Gene Tunny  50:19

Yeah. Yeah. I think one of the points. Yeah, it’s, it’s a, it’s an important point you’re making and I mean, one of the challenges like in Australia here, we’re we’ve moved towards individual retirement accounts, we move toward that in the 90s. And so a lot of people ended up, they’re relying on Super, and then, you know, what happens if you’re a retiree? And then, you know, the market goes down? 40%, like it did in the financial crisis, right. And then yeah, I mean, it’s

Andrew Einhorn  50:49

bad times every time when you’re 78 years old.

Gene Tunny  50:53

Yeah. People ended up having to keep working for for several years. But yeah, that was a that was an awful event. Right. Yeah, that bill, that was it. Bill Ackman. You mentioned with a, I’m gonna have to look up that. I mean, that’s outrageous. And that’s why, you know, that’s what outrages the public about, you know, the activities on Wall Street’s I remember seeing

Andrew Einhorn  51:14

it live. I mean, he just, he scared the hell out of me. When I was watching TV. I was like, I didn’t think it was gonna be this bad. But now I do. Yeah. Shocking. If you just Google greatest trade of all time. Yeah. You’ll you’ll see the data sources on it. But you know, the fact is, was that a lot of this stuff, that historical data gives you plenty of ammo for how to navigate the markets, for instance, the look back at Zika and SQL, but yeah, that was spreading and in 2016. And they closed the ports of Miami. And the cruise ship stocks, on average dropped about six and a half percent when they close those ports. COVID had a transmission inside the country for the first time in the US, I think it was in Houston. And cruise ship stocks went down six and a half percent. Same reaction to the virus just seven hours later. So there’s always historical reference. And you gotta remember that the people who are moving the markets are also looking at the history of

Gene Tunny  52:21

IT. Yeah. People like Ray Dalio is crew at Bridgewater. Yeah, absolutely. Very good point. Right. Final, final question. I just want to ask you, like, what’s the reaction among the financial establishment to this approach? Because there’s a, I was just wondering about it, because there was a very negative opinion piece by Gregory Zuckerman in the Wall Street Journal last year. So April 12 2023. Ai can write a song, but it can’t be the market quants have tried for decades with limited success. At the biggest challenge, all very negative about it. I mean, how do you react? What do you think about what do you think about that? I mean, what’s the what’s the reaction out there to what you’re trying to do?

Andrew Einhorn  53:12

Well, there’s there’s two questions there. The first is, you know, the, the article itself, I think is, has a little bit of a misnomer about what AI is, and only is right, there’s this belief that AI is sort of the profit, right, it’s sort of the crystal ball that can see the future because it’s, you know, super crunching all these numbers and coming up with perfect algorithms that humans can’t possibly imagine. And there are certain people that are working on that. But largely, that’s not what AI is, AI is, for the most part, replacing kind of grunt tasks that we don’t want to do anymore. Things that humans can do, the computers can just do faster and at scale. And so you know, when you say something like aI can’t beat the market, but it’s really saying is an AI created algorithm to beat the market won’t beat the market. And there’s been very little development of sort of AI generated algorithms. It’s usually a human using AI to crunch numbers and then coming up with the algorithm that it then allows AI to execute. So the human is integrated through the whole process. And just by that biassing, the outcome of this, you know, assessment. I would take the view that, you know, AI is a tool in the toolbox of doing whatever you want to do much like a hammer versus a power drill. Difference. Yeah, you know, you could go hammer out the nails, or you could have a nail gun. And the AI is the nail gun for most tasks. And so if you’ve got a nail gun, you’re gonna get your job done faster than the guy that’s sitting there. with a hammer, gotcha.

Gene Tunny  55:00

Yeah, yeah. Okay, so all fascinating. Andrew, really, really enjoyed the conversation, are you looking at extending into, say, Australia or the UK because your us focused or have I got that wrong, where

Andrew Einhorn  55:14

us focus, but we, we actually collect data in about 35,000 different equities. We’ve just been rolling out, kind of slow and steady to make sure we don’t overwhelm the user. Those stocks do include Australian stocks, they do include, you know, the London Stock Exchange. So, you know, if demand is high enough, we’ll provide access to that and the same model. A lot of the large stocks, you know, it’s in both of those exchanges, like AstraZeneca, for example, or, you know, forget big mining companies that are ADRs that do trade in the US. Trade in the US market, I was trying to remember what the big mining companies in Australia but not remembering Olga bhp,

Gene Tunny  56:01

Rio Tinto, so yeah, so

Andrew Einhorn  56:05

those are in the system, you know, as an example, okay. Because global again, and you know, anything above generally, about $10 billion market cap is going to be traded in the US exchanges. Gotcha. Okay.

Gene Tunny  56:19

Excellent. All right. Andrew, on hold, this has been terrific. Any final points before we wrap up,

Andrew Einhorn  56:25

I would just say, you know, if, if you’re interested, and you’re out jogging, or you’re working out at the gym, while you’re listening to this, the company name is level fields, AI, you know, text yourself, write it down. If you don’t feel like you can use it for your own investments, you probably know somebody that might please get the word out. We have a discount code of podcast 23 that you can apply. And you can get a discount on this subscription. Rod. Is

Gene Tunny  56:56

that all caps? So

Andrew Einhorn  56:57

does it matter? It doesn’t matter? No. Okay, excellent. The number 23 for level fields

Gene Tunny  57:03

mastering Okay, enter on well, and thanks so much for your time. I really enjoyed the conversation. And yeah, I really learned a lot. And for sure, this is this is part of the, the way of the future. So it’s fascinating to learn what people are doing out there like yourself. So all the best with it in the future. And I look forward to seeing more of what you’re doing in in future years. So thanks so much.

Andrew Einhorn  57:29

Thank you. I appreciate having me on and happy to come back and have that buy and hold debate. Good

Gene Tunny  57:35

one. I think about that for sure. Okay. Thanks, Andrew.

Andrew Einhorn  57:38

Thank you,

Gene Tunny  57:41

Rocco. Thanks for listening to this episode of economics explored. If you have any questions, comments or suggestions, please get in touch. I’d love to hear from you. You can send me an email via contact at economics explore.com Or a voicemail via SpeakPipe. You can find the link in the show notes. If you’ve enjoyed the show, I’d be grateful if you could tell anyone you think would be interested about it. Word of mouth is one of the main ways that people learn about the show. Finally, if your podcasting app lets you then please write a review and leave a rating. Thanks for listening. I hope you can join me again next week.

58:28

Thank you for listening. We hope you enjoyed the episode. For more content like this where to begin your own podcasting journey head on over to obsidian-productions.com

Credits

Thanks to Obsidian Productions for mixing the episode and to the show’s sponsor, Gene’s consultancy business www.adepteconomics.com.au. Full transcripts are available a few days after the episode is first published at www.economicsexplored.com. Economics Explored is available via Apple PodcastsGoogle Podcast, and other podcasting platforms.